The present work is an expansion of a series of elementary lessons developed gradually during twenty years of teaching Sahidic Coptic at the college level. The Lessons are designed to provide a carefully graded introduction to the basic grammar and vocabulary of the language. The content of the Lessons and the mode of presentation were dictated by purely practical pedagogical considerations; the book is in no way intended to be a scientific reference grammar. The Reading Selections are furnished with glosses designed to facilitate the translation to unsimplified material. A thorough mastery of these and the Lessons will bring the student to the level at which any Sahidic text of average difficulty can be read with no trouble. The emphasis on basic matters has necessitated the omission of much technical linguistic data not immediately relevant to the needs of the average beginning student. Those who are interested in a detailed study of the phonology, in the relationship of Sahidic to the other Coptic dialects, or in the historical development of Coptic from ancient Egyptian may consult the standard works on these subjects as cited in the Bibliography.
A special effort has been made to provide a Glossary that will be useful to the student beyond his first year's study. In addition to covering the words used in the present text, the Glossary is intended to contain the full vocabulary of the Sahidic New Testament, including most associated phrases and idioms, as well as a generous selection of lexical items from other Biblical and literary texts. Deliberately excluded from the Glossary are words of a specialized nature, such as the names of plants, vessels, implements, drugs, and animals occurring only in technical texts that usually provide little clue to their precise meanings; nor has any effort been made to include the unusual lexical usage of Shenute. For these items the reader must consult the indispensible A Coptic Dictionary of W. E. Crum, which, together with M. Wilmet, Concordance du nouveau testament sahidique, is the main authority for the Glossary included here.
I would like to express my sincere thanks to my colleague, George W. MacRae, the Charles Chauncey Stillman Professor of Roman Catholic Theological Studies, Harvard Divinity School, for encouraging me to undertake this work and for his helpful comments on a large portion of the manuscript; to Mr. Gary A. Bisbee, for the exceptional skill and care with which he prepared the final copy for publication; to Mr. Watson E. Mills, Director of the Mercer University Press, for his part in initiating and publishing this work.
Thomas O. Lambdin
Cambridge, Mass.
June 1982
The names of specific conjugations and inflected verbal forms are capitalized throughout the book.
The political unification of Egypt took place around the beginning of the third millennium B.C. with the establishment of the First Dynasty at Memphis. Soon afterward written records began to appear in the hieroglyphic script, which together with its cursive derivatives, hieratic and demotic, remained the sole medium for writing the Egyptian language until the end of the second century A.D. At that time, the missionaries of the Church, then centered in Alexandria, undertook the translation of the Bible from Greek into Egyptian in order to facilitate their task of Christianizing the country. They abandoned the three-thousand-year-old hieroglyphic writing system, probably as much because of its complexity and imperfections as for its "heathen" associations, and chose instead to employ a modified form of the Greek alphabet. Egyptian in this new guise is known as Coptic, a modern term derived from Arabic qubṭî, itself a corruption of the Greek word (ai)gúpti(os), Egyptian.
The conquest of Egypt by Alexander the Great in 332 B.C. and the subsequent Greek-speaking administration of the country under the Ptolemies led to the thorough Hellenization of Lower (i.e. Northern) Egypt. Egyptian-Greek bilingualism was apparently commonplace in the Delta, and it is probable that much Greek technical, legal, and commercial terminology was introduced into spoken Egyptian at this time. Rough and unsystematic attempts to transcribe Egyptian in the Greek alphabet were made as early as the third century B.C. It was only natural, then, that the Coptic translators of the Bible not only adopted the Greek alphabet but also generously supplemented the native lexicon with many more borrowings from Greek. The Greek vocabulary of any Coptic text is significantly large.
Evidence of dialectal differences is found as early as the third millenium B.C., but the general conservatism of the hieroglyphic script and the practice of standardizing a particular form of the language for long periods of time (e.g. Middle Egyptian, New Egyptian) tend to obscure the great dialectal diversity that must have existed in the spoken language as one traveled the 750 miles down the Nile from Aswan to the Mediterranean. The individual dialects first become recognizable when we reach the Coptic period and see the language spelled out in the Greek alphabet. The exact geographical location of the dialects is still a matter of scholarly debate, but the reader should become familiar with their names and the approximate chronological range of their use for literary purposes.
Sahidic, the dialect treated in this book, was the dialect chosen for the official translation of the Bible mentioned above. There is conflicting evidence on its geographical location: the name Sahidic, from Arabic aṣ-ṣaʿîd, Upper (i.e. Southern) Egypt, places it in the south (hence its alternate name: Theban, Thebaic); linguistic considerations, however, favor a northern locale, in the neighborhood of Memphis and the eastern Delta. One cannot rule out the possibility that both locations are correct; the fact that Thebes and Memphis alternated as the capital of Egypt through much of its history and were the chief centers of religious (priestly), building, and commercial activity could have led to the development of an "urban" dialect in these two areas, quite distinct from the dialects of the "rural" areas that lay between. By the fourth century A.D. Sahidic was firmly established as the standard literary dialect and retained this status until its demise around the tenth century. Surviving texts in Sahidic include, in addition to the New Testament and a large portion of the Old, a considerable corpus of Church literature and some remnants of secular literature, nearly all of which is translated from Greek. Of native works we have only the writings of Pachomius (c. 300), the founder of Egyptian monasticism; Shenute (c. 400), the administrator of the White Monastery in Upper Egypt; and Besa, a disciple of Shenute. The Coptic writings of Shenute, who attempted to mould the language into a literary vehicle comparable to Greek, are often referred to as the "classics" of Sahidic literature. Their syntactic complexity and unusual vocabulary usage, however, place them beyond the scope of the present work, which is based on the language of the more widely studied translation literature.
Bohairic replaced Sahidic as the standard literary dialect. Bohairic texts are attested as early as the ninth century, but the dialect does not seem to have achieved wide usage until it was adopted as the official language of the Coptic Church in the eleventh century. Most Bohairic texts come from after this time, and many of them were translated from Sahidic originals. The term Bohairic comes from Arabic al-buhairah, Lower (i.e. Northern) Egypt; it is generally assumed that Bohairic was the dialect of the Western Delta, including Alexandria and Nitria. The designation Memphitic has also been used for this dialect.
Fayyumic, as its name implies, was the dialect of northern Middle Egypt in the vicinity of the Fayyum Basin. It is well attested in texts ranging from the fourth to the eleventh century, but it apparently never attained the status of Sahidic.
Achmimic, generally located in the area of Akhmim (Panopolis) in southern Middle Egypt, enjoyed only a brief literary period from the third to the fifth century.
Subachmimic, tentatively localized between Akhmim and Thebes, was used extensively in the fourth and fifth centuries for the translation of Manichaean and Gnostic literature. Its association with this heretical material probably had much to do with its early demise as a literary dialect. The Nag Hammadi texts are in Subachmimic or a variety of Sahidic influenced by Subachmimic in varying degrees.
For further details on the dialects the reader should consult the works of Worrell, Vergote, Kahle, and Till cited in the Bibliography.
The Arab conquest of Egypt in 641 A.D. and the subsequent suppression of the native Christian population resulted in the gradual dying out of the Egyptian language in favor of Arabic. We cannot be sure how long this process took, but it is safe to assume that by the fifteenth century Coptic had ceased to be a native spoken language, thus bringing to an end a continuous written record of over four thousand years.
Sahidic Coptic is written in the Greek alphabet augmented by six letters borrowed from Demotic script, the last stage of Egyptian hieroglyphic writing. The letters of the full alphabet, together with their conventional transcription, are as follows:
The following paragraphs deal with the Coptic, not the Greek, pronunciation of this alphabet.
ⲃ was apparently pronounced like English v in voice, but it is generally read simply as b in back.
ⲅ occurs only as a positional variant of ⲕ in a very small set of forms. Pronounced like the g of good.
ⲇ and ⲍ do not normally occur in standard Sahidic spelling. ⲍ may occur for ⲥ in a few words, e.g. ⲁⲛⲍⲏⲃⲉ for ⲁⲛⲥⲏⲃⲉ school. Pronounced d as in dog and z as in zoo respectively.
ⲫ, ⲑ, and ⲭ occur in Sahidic Coptic words only as combinations of two consonants: ⲡ + ϩ, ⲧ + ϩ, and ⲕ + ϩ respectively. ⲑ is fairly frequent, e.g. ⲡⲉⲑⲟⲟⲩ evil, for ⲡⲉⲧ ϩⲟⲟⲩ. ⲫ and ⲭ are rare and need not be used at all. The Copts seem to have used this same pronunciation for these letters in Greek words, contrary to the ordinary Greek pronunciation of ⲫ as f, ⲑ as th (thin), and ⲭ as ch (German ich, ach).
ⲕ, ⲡ, and ⲧ were like English k, p, t, but without aspiration. Thus, they were more like the k, p, t of skin, spin, stop than the aspirated sounds of kin, pin, top.
ⲗ, ⲙ, and ⲛ were probably the same as English l, m, and n.
ⲝ is simply a combination of ⲕ + ⲥ, rarely used. E.g. ⲝⲟⲩⲣ ring.
ⲣ is conventionally pronounced like English r in road. Its actual pronunciation is unknown.
ⲥ was like English s in see.
ⲯ is simply ⲡ + ⲥ, rarely used. E.g. ⲯⲓⲧⲉ nine (psite).
ϣ was the sh of shall.
ϥ was the f of foot.
ϩ was probably like English h in hope.
ϫ is conventionally pronounced like the j of judge. Its actual pronunciation was probably closer to that of the [tʸ] of tune.1
ϭ, conventionally like the ch of church, was probably closer to the [kʸ] of cue, cute.
ϯ is merely a graphic symbol for ⲧ + ⲓ, but it was the normal way to spell this sequence of sounds. E.g. ϯⲙⲉ village (time).
1 Brackets are used to indicate phonetic pronunciation in standard phonetic symbols. Do not confuse these with the conventional transcriptions.
ⲁ like the a of father. E.g. ⲁϥ [af] meat.
ⲉ like the e of let. E.g. ϩⲉⲛ [hɛn] some.
ⲏ probably like the a of hate. E.g. ⲙⲏⲧ [met] ten.
ⲓ like the i of machine. This vowel is always spelled ⲉⲓ in initial positions: ⲉⲓⲛⲉ [íne] to bring, ⲉⲓⲥ [is] behold. Internally and finally the spelling alternates between ⲓ and ⲉⲓ, but ⲓ is preferred.
ⲟ like the o of log, fog, dog, off, on. E.g. ⲧⲟⲡ [tɔp] edge.
ⲩ does not appear as a simple vowel in Coptic words.
ⲟⲩ is the normal writing of the vowel [u], the oo of food. E.g. ⲛⲟⲩⲃ noub [nub] gold.
ⲱ like the o of hope. E.g. ϩⲱⲡ [hop] to hide.
The consonants y and w of English yet and wet are often referred to as semivowels because they are the same sounds as the vowels [i] and [u] of beet and boot very briefly articulated. The Coptic vowels ⲉⲓ (ⲓ) and ⲟⲩ may function as consonants in the same way. E.g. ⲉⲓⲱⲧ [yot] father, ⲟⲩⲟⲡ [wɔp] to become pure.
The semivowels ⲉⲓ (ⲓ) and ⲟⲩ combine with a preceding simple vowel to form various diphthongs. Many of the diphthongs have more than one spelling; the reader should follow the spelling used in the Lessons. The diphthongs should be pronounced carefully, with the value of the single vowel as given above plus a final y or w as the case may be.
ⲁⲓ, ⲁⲉⲓ as in ⲥⲁⲉⲓⲛ [sayn] physician, ⲁⲓⲡⲱⲧ [aypót] I ran.
ⲁⲩ (rarely ⲁⲟⲩ) as in ⲛⲁⲩ [naw] to see, ⲁⲩⲡⲱⲧ [awpót] they ran.
ⲉⲓ (less commonly ⲉⲉⲓ) as in ⲡⲉⲓⲣⲱⲙⲉ [pɛyrómɛ] this man. Although a knowledge of the grammar is necessary for making the correct distinction between ⲉⲓ = [i] and ⲉⲓ = [ɛy], the problem is not a serious one: in normal Sahidic spelling ⲉⲓ has the value ⲉ + ⲓ (1) in the demonstrative adjectives ⲡⲉⲓ- ⲧⲉⲓ- ⲛⲉⲓ- (Lesson 5), (2) in the first person verbal prefixes of the forms ⲉⲓ-, ⲛⲉⲓ-, ⲙⲉⲓ- (Lesson 21 and following), and in a few isolated words like ⲉⲓⲉ [ɛyɛ] (Lesson 29).
ⲉⲩ (rarely ⲉⲟⲩ), as in ⲉⲩϣⲁϫⲉ [ɛwšátʸɛ] while they were talking.
ⲏⲓ as in ⲡⲏⲓ [pey] the house.
ⲏⲩ (less commonly ⲏⲟⲩ) as in ⲧⲏⲩ [tew] wind.
ⲓⲉⲓ, ⲉⲓⲉⲓ is very rare and is [yi] not [iy], e.g. ϩⲓⲉⲓⲃ [hyib] lamb.
ⲓⲟⲩ is rare, e.g. ⲥⲓⲟⲩ [siw] star.
ⲟⲉⲓ, ⲟⲓ as in ⲟⲩⲟⲉⲓⲛ [wɔyn] light.
ⲟⲟⲩ as in ⲙⲟⲟⲩ [mɔw] water, ⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧ [mɔwt] dead.
ⲱⲓ as in ⲉϫⲱⲓ [ɛtʸóy] on me; rare except in final position.
ⲱⲟⲩ as in ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ [town] to stand up, ⲉϫⲱⲟⲩ [ɛtʸów] on them.
ⲟⲩⲓ (rare) as in ⲛⲟⲩⲓ [nuy] mine; also possibly as [wi] in some words, e.g. ⲕⲟⲩⲓ [kwi] small.
ⲟⲩⲟⲩ (rare) as in ⲙⲟⲩⲟⲩⲧ [muwt] to kill, ⲛⲟⲩⲟⲩ [nuw] theirs.
The double writing of any of the simple vowels is generally understood to be an indication of the presence of a glottal stop, i.e. the complete but very brief stoppage of airflow in the glottis, conventionally indicated by ʾ in transcription. Thus ⲙⲁⲁⲃ máʾăb thirty, ⲥⲉⲉⲡⲉ séʾĕpe remainder, ϣⲟⲟⲡ šóʾŏp to be. The stress is on the first vowel; the vowel after the glottal stop was probably of very brief duration.
Vowel doubling occurs in diphthongs as well, e.g. ⲙⲁⲁⲩ máʾăw mother, ⲙⲉⲉⲩⲉ méʾĕwe to think. There is no sure way of knowing whether ⲟⲟⲩ indicates [ɔw] or [ɔ́ʾɔ̆w].
One of the most distinctive features of Sahidic spelling is the short stroke placed over certain consonants or groups of consonants. This supralinear stroke, as it is called, indicates a syllable, but there is some disagreement among Coptic scholars on how this syllabification actually sounded in the spoken language. When the stroke is used over a voiced consonant such as ⲛ, it probably meant that the consonant is functioning as the vowel, i.e. the most sonorous part, of the syllable in question, exactly like the final n of English button and sudden, phonetically [-tn̥] and [-dn̥]. Thus, ϣⲛ̄ⲧ (to seek me) was pronounced [šn̥t] and ⲛ̄ⲧ (to bring me) as [n̥t]. The voiced consonants capable of having this syllabic pronunciation are ⲃ, ⲗ, ⲙ, ⲛ, and ⲣ, known mnemonically as the blemner consonants. Note that they are all voiced continuants, i.e. consonants whose voiced duration may be prolonged at will (remember that ⲃ is v, not b). E.g.
| ⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | (we hear) | [tn̥sótm̥] |
| ϣⲧⲟⲣⲧⲣ̄ | (to disturb) | [štɔ́rtr̥] |
| ⲧⲃ̄ⲧ | (fish) | [tv̥t] |
| ⲕⲣⲙ̄ⲣⲙ̄ | (to mutter) | [krḿ̥rm̥] |
The stroke over the remaining consonants may be pronounced as a brief ⲉ or as ə (the first vowel of English above) before the consonant over which the stroke is placed, e.g. ⲥⲡ̄ⲥⲱⲡϥ̄ [səpsópəf] to entreat him. This pronunciation may also be used with the blemner consonants for the sake of convenience.
In non-standard texts, of which there are many, the vowel ⲉ is often written instead of using the stroke (and vice versa), but most frequently in proclitic elements and initial clusters, e.g. ⲥⲉⲡⲥⲱⲡϥ̄ = ⲥⲡ̄ⲥⲱⲡϥ̄, ϩⲉⲙ ⲡⲏⲓ = ϩⲙ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ. In standard spelling ⲉ is used regularly instead of the stroke only when the consonant preceding the consonant that would have had the stroke is a blemner; thus ⲙⲟⲕⲙⲉⲕ and ⲛⲟϭⲛⲉϭ are words of the same pattern as ⲥⲟⲡⲥⲡ̄ and ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲗ̄. This convention may have been adopted to prevent incorrect syllabification: ⲙⲟⲕⲙⲕ could be read as [mɔ́km̥k] or [mɔ́kmək]. The chief exceptions are indeed words where a different syllabification is required: ϣⲟⲙⲛ̄ⲧ [šɔ́mn̥t] three, ⲧⲱⲙⲛ̄ⲧ [tómn̥t] to befall. The ⲛ̄ of these words is an intrusive (secondary) glide from the labial ⲙ to the dental ⲧ; the earlier forms were ϣⲟⲙⲧ̄ and ⲧⲱⲙⲧ̄. The convention likewise does not apply when the final consonant is also a blemner: ⲛⲁϩⲙⲛ̄ [náhmn̥] to rescue us. Much of the variation between ⲉ and a stroke that occurs in the writing of certain verbal prefixes (e.g. ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣϥ̄-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥ-; ⲙⲁⲣϥ̄-, ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥ-) probably results from inconsistent application of this rule.
The forms ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ (to arise) and ⲥⲟⲟⲩⲛ̄ (to know) have been standardized in the Lessons. In the Reading Selections the orthography of the source has been followed.
Coptic is a highly compounding language, mostly by prefixation. All prefixal elements are proclitic, i.e. unstressed and bound, to the word which stands last in the sequence, regardless of its length, e.g.
ϩⲛ̄ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ = ϩⲛ̄-ⲧⲉ-ϥ-ⲙⲛ̄ⲧ-ⲁⲧ-ⲧⲁⲕⲟ́
in his imperishability
Any element designated as prefixal in the course of the Lessons should be considered as proclitic. All simple prepositions are proclitic, like ϩⲛ̄ in the above example, but for the sake of clarity they are written as separate words in this text.
The main stress, then, is on the word standing at the end of the compound. The successive application of the following rules will enable the reader to apply the correct stress in all but the rarest cases:
Assimilation, for our present purposes, may be defined briefly as the alteration of a sound due to its proximity to another sound, usually resulting in greater phonetic compatibility. The final ⲛ̄ of prefixal elements (e.g. prepositions, particles, articles) is regularly assimilated to ⲙ̄ before ⲡ and ⲙ, e.g.
*ϩⲛ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ → ϩⲙ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ
in the house
*ⲛ̄ⲙⲁⲉⲓⲛ → ⲙ̄ⲙⲁⲉⲓⲛ
the signs
The assimilation of consonant -ⲛ also occurs but is not standard, e.g. ⲧⲉⲙⲡⲓⲥⲧⲓⲥ for ⲧⲉⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲓⲥ (our faith). In some texts the particle ⲛ̄, which has several grammatical functions, assimilates completely to ⲃ, ⲗ, and ⲣ, e.g. ⲛ̄ⲃⲣ̄ⲣⲉ → ⲃ̄ⲃⲣ̄ⲣⲉ (the young), ⲛ̄ⲣⲱⲙⲉ → ⲣ̄ⲣⲱⲙⲉ (the men). This is not considered standard, but it is not uncommon; numerous examples will be met in our reading selection from the Wisdom of Solomon.
Whatever the pronunciation of the supralinear stroke was, an alternate spelling with -ⲁ- often occurs before final -ϩ: ⲱⲛⲁϩ = ⲱⲛϩ̄ to live. This represents an assimilation to the guttural quality of ϩ.
An alternation between -ⲱ- and -ⲟⲩ- in certain word patterns is a result of an assimilation in the pre-Coptic stage. ⲱ was altered to ⲟⲩ after ⲙ and ⲛ; thus, words like ⲙⲟⲩϩ, ⲛⲟⲩϫⲉ, ⲙⲟⲩⲟⲩⲧ, and ⲛⲟⲩⲕ originally had the same vowel as ⲕⲱⲧ, ⲕⲱⲧⲉ, ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ, and ⲧⲱⲕ respectively.
Greek words in Coptic are usually spelled correctly. Certain types of errors do occasionally occur, however, resulting in part from the discrepancy between the classical spelling and the contemporary pronunciation, and they must be taken into account when consulting a standard Greek dictionary. The most frequent of these are confusions between (1) ⲏ and ⲩ; (2) ⲉ and ⲁⲓ; (3) ⲓ and ⲏ; (4) ⲟ and ⲱ; (5) ⲅ and ⲕ; (6) ⲓ and ⲉⲓ; (7) ⲏ and ⲉ; (8) ⲧ and ⲇ; (9) initial ϩ and zero. All of these are illustrated by the following words chosen from our Reading Selections.
1.1 Gender. There are two grammatical genders in Coptic: masculine and feminine. Nouns denoting male beings are usually masculine; those denoting females, feminine. The gender of other nouns cannot, in general, be deduced either from their form or meaning and must be learned for each noun. Examples:
| masculine | feminine | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲓⲱⲧ | father | ⲙⲁⲩ | mother |
| ⲕⲁϩⲓ | earth, ground | ⲫⲉ | sky, heaven |
| ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | day | ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ | night |
There are some pairs of nouns where a formal relationship exists between the masculine and the feminine form:
| masculine | feminine | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲥⲟⲛ | brother | ⲥⲱⲛⲓ | sister |
| ϣⲏⲣⲓ | boy, son | ϣⲉⲣⲓ | girl, daughter |
| ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ | old man | ϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ | old woman |
These will be noted in the lesson vocabularies. The derivational process involved is no longer a productive one in Coptic: such pairs cannot be formed at will.
1.2 Number: singular and plural. Only a relatively small number of nouns have preserved a distinct plural form. For example:
| singular | plural | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲓⲱⲧ | father | ⲓⲟϯ | fathers |
| ⲥⲟⲛ | brother | ⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | brothers |
| ϫⲟⲓ | ship | ⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships |
The plural is otherwise made explicit by the form of the article (see below), the noun itself remaining unchanged. Those plurals that are in common use will be given in the lesson vocabularies along with the singular. They should be learned as they occur, since there is no consistent pattern for their formation.
1.3 The definite article. The definite article has the forms
| masc. sing. | ⲡ ⲡⲓ, ⲫ |
| fem. sing. | ⲧ ϯ, ⲑ |
| common plural | ⲛ ⲛⲓ, ⲛ |
These are attached directly to the noun, as in
| ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | man | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the man | ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the men |
| ϫⲓϫ | hand | ⲧϫⲓϫ | the hand | ⲛϫⲓϫ | the hands |
The plural article appears as ⲙ before ⲡ and ⲙ (cf. Intro., p. xvi):
| ⲫⲉ | sky | ⲧⲫⲉ | the sky | ⲙⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ | the heavens |
| ⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | sign | ⲡⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | the sign | ⲙⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | the signs |
Before nouns beginning with a vowel the plural article appears as either ⲛ or ⲛ:
| ⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships | ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ or ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | the ships |
Before initial stroked consonants there are several possibilities:
| ⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ | repose | ⲡⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲡⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲡⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ | the repose |
| ⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲉⲛⲭⲁⲓ | thing | ⲛⲉⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲛⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲛⲛⲭⲁⲓ | the things |
The fuller forms ⲡⲉ-, ⲧⲉ-, ⲛⲉ- are used regularly before nouns beginning with two consonants:
| ⲭⲗⲟⲙ | crown | ⲡⲭⲗⲟⲙ | the crown | ⲛⲭⲗⲟⲙ | the crowns |
| ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | woman | ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | the woman | ⲛϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ | the women |
Note that ⲟⲩ and (ⲉ)ⲓ have a consonantal value (w and y respectively) in certain initial situations:
| ⲟⲩϩⲟⲣ | dog | ⲡⲟⲩϩⲟⲣ | the dog (pewhor) | ⲛⲟⲩϩⲱⲣ | the dogs |
| ⲙⲱⲓⲧ | road | ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ | the road (tehyē) | ⲛⲙⲓⲧⲱⲟⲩⲓ | the roads |
The fuller forms are also used with certain nouns denoting periods of time:
| ⲡⲥⲏⲟⲩ | the time |
| ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | the day |
| ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ | the hour (ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ) |
| ⲧⲉⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ | the year |
| ⲡⲉϫⲱⲣϩ | the night (ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ) |
Note that ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ and ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ fall under the two-consonant rule above.
1.4 Prepositions. Coptic prepositions are proclitic (i.e. unstressed and bound) to the word they govern. In many texts some or all of the prepositions are printed as a unit with the following word: ϩⲓⲡϫⲟⲓ on the ship, ⲉⲡⲏⲓ to the house. In this text, however, all prepositions will be printed as separate words: ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ, ⲉ ⲡⲏⲓ. An exception will be made only in the case of the preposition ⲉ (to, for) if it is ligatured orthographically to a following ⲟⲩ- as ⲉⲩ-.
The preposition ⲛⲉⲙ (with) is used as the conjunction "and" in joining two nouns:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the man and the woman |
A definite noun followed by a prepositional phrase or local adverb (e.g. ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ there) constitutes a full predication (sentence) in Coptic:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ. | The man is on the ship. |
| ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. | The woman is in the house. |
| ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. | The ships are there. |
In sentences of this type there is no overt equivalent of English "is/are". We shall refer to sentences of this type as sentences with adverbial predicates.
In the lesson vocabularies all nouns will be given with the definite article, separated from the noun by a period. This device makes both the gender of the noun and the correct form of the article clear at a glance. To save space, the article is not included in the definition. Prepositions and particles which regularly have assimilation of final ⲛ̄ to ⲙ̄ before ⲡ and ⲙ will be noted, as e.g. ϩⲛ̄ (ϩⲙ̄).
2.1 The indefinite article. The indefinite article for nouns of either gender is ⲟⲩ in the singular, ϩⲁⲛ in the plural, prefixed directly to the noun:
| ⲟⲩϫⲟⲓ | a ship | ϩⲁⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships, some ships |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ | a man | ϩⲁⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ | men, some men |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲱⲓⲧ | a road | ϩⲁⲛⲙⲓⲧⲱⲟⲩⲓ | roads, some roads |
The plural indefinite article may be translated as "some, certain" or be omitted entirely in translation, as the context requires. The plural indefinite article is frequently written as ϧⲉⲛ and is easily confused with the preposition ϧⲉⲛ. In the exercises to the lessons we shall always distinguish between the two, but in part of the Reading Selections the orthography of the source is maintained.
Because the use of the Coptic articles, both definite and indefinite, corresponds closely to the use of the articles in English, only exceptions to this general correspondence will be noted in the following lessons when appropriate. References to the omission of the article require special attention. For the present lesson note that indefinite nouns designating unspecific quantities of a substance require an indefinite article in Coptic where there is none in English:
| ⲟⲩⲙⲱⲟⲩ | water | ϩⲁⲛⲱⲓⲕ | bread | ϩⲁⲛⲁϥ | meat |
The choice between the singular and plural article here is lexical, i.e. it depends on the particular noun. All such nouns, if definite and specific, may of course appear with the definite article: ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ, ⲡⲱⲓⲕ, ⲡⲁϥ. Abstract nouns, such as ⲙⲏⲓ truth, often appear with either article (ⲟⲩⲙⲏⲓ, ⲧⲙⲏⲓ) where English employs no article.
2.2 Indefinite nouns cannot be used as subjects of sentences with adverbial predicates unless introduced by the word ⲟⲩⲟⲛ or its negative:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| A monk is on the road. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ is actually a predicator of existence ("there is, there are"), and the sentence given may also be translated as "There is a monk on the road.".
The negative of ⲟⲩⲟⲛ is ⲙⲙⲟⲛ (also spelled ⲙⲙⲟⲛ). In general, an indefinite article is deleted (omitted) in negation in Coptic:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| There is no monk on the road. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| There is no man in the house. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ and ⲙⲙⲟⲛ are not used before definite nouns.
The sentence ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ is negated by adding ⲁⲛ:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| The man is not in the house. |
2.3 The genitive (or possessive) relationship between two nouns is expressed by the preposition ⲛ̀ (of):
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the house of the man |
| the man's house |
| ⲧϣⲉⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the woman's daughter |
If the first noun is indefinite, however, the preposition ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ is used instead of ⲛ̀:
| ⲟⲩϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ |
| a book of the monk |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| a servant of the king |
3.1 Relative clauses. As we shall see in subsequent lessons, relative clauses in Coptic exhibit a variety of forms, depending on the type of predication involved. In the present lesson we shall consider only those relative clauses associated with sentences with adverbial predicates. Note the transformation
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| The man is in the house. |
| → |
| (ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ) ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ |
| (the man) who is in the house |
The relative pronoun ⲉⲧ functions here as the subject of the relative clause; it is not inflected for number or gender:
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| the woman who is on the road |
| ⲛϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲉⲛⲉⲉⲧⲉ |
| the monks who are in the monastery |
Negation is with ⲁⲛ:
| ⲛ̀ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲉⲛⲉⲉⲧⲉ ⲁⲛ. |
Relative clauses cannot be used to modify an indefinite noun. This is an important general rule of Coptic.
Any relative clause may be substantivized, i.e. converted to the status of a noun, by prefixing the appropriate form of the definite article:
| ⲡⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ |
| the one who (he who, that which) is in the house |
| ⲧⲉⲧ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ |
| the one (f.) who is with the boy |
| ⲛⲉⲧ ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ |
| those who (those things which) are on the ship |
Such constructions may refer to persons or things, depending on the context.
The relative clause ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, who (which) is there, is used to express the further demonstrative "that":
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| that man |
| ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| those ships |
3.2 Greek nouns. The typical Coptic text contains a large number of Greek loanwords. Greek masculine and feminine nouns retain their gender; Greek neuter nouns are treated as masculine:
| ὁ ἄγγελος | ⲡⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ | the angel |
| ἡ ἐπιστολή | ⲧⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲏ | the letter |
| ἡ ψυχή | ⲧⲯⲩⲭⲏ | the soul |
| τὸ πνεῦμα | ⲡⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ | the spirit |
| τὸ δῶρον | ⲡⲇⲱⲣⲟⲛ | the gift |
Greek nouns appear in the nominative singular form of Greek and are usually not inflected in any way. Occasionally, however, a Coptic plural ending is added to a Greek noun:
| ⲛⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲟⲟⲩⲉ |
| the letters |
| ⲛⲯⲩⲭⲟⲟⲩⲉ |
| the souls |
The Greek noun ἡ θάλασσα (the sea) was borrowed as ⲧ.ϩⲁⲗⲁⲥⲥⲁ, i.e. ⲑ was taken as the definite article plus ϩ. Thus, "a sea" is ⲟⲩϩⲁⲗⲁⲥⲥⲁ.
Initial χ, φ, θ, ψ, ξ of Greek nouns are considered two consonants in attaching the definite article (cf. Intro., p. x).
| ⲧ.ⲭⲱⲣⲁ |
| the country |
| ⲡ.ⲫⲓⲗⲟⲥⲟⲫⲟⲥ |
| the philosopher |
| ⲧ.ⲯⲩⲭⲏ |
| the soul |
| ⲧ.ⲑⲩⲥⲓⲁ |
| the offering |
4.1 Pronominal possession is indicated by inserting a bound form of the appropriate pronoun between the definite article and the noun so modified. It is best to learn the forms, i.e. the article plus the pronoun, as a unit:
| masc. sing. noun | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ | my father |
| 2 masc. | ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 2 fem. | ⲡⲉⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 3 masc. | ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ | his father | |
| 3 fem. | ⲡⲉⲥⲓⲱⲧ | her father | |
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲡⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ | our father |
| 2 com. | ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 3 com. | ⲡⲟⲩⲓⲱⲧ | their father | |
| fem. sing. noun | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲧⲁⲙⲁⲩ | my mother |
| 2 masc. | ⲧⲉⲕⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 2 fem. | ⲧⲉⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 3 masc. | ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ | his mother | |
| 3 fem. | ⲧⲉⲥⲙⲁⲩ | her mother | |
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲧⲉⲛⲙⲁⲩ | our mother |
| 2 com. | ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 3 com. | ⲧⲟⲩⲙⲁⲩ | their mother | |
| plural noun (my brothers, etc.) | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | |
| 2 masc. | ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 2 fem. | ⲛⲉⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 masc. | ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 fem. | ⲛⲉⲥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲛⲉⲛⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | |
| 2 com. | ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 com. | ⲛⲟⲩⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
Note that there is a gender distinction in the second and third persons of the singular but not of the plural. This is characteristic of all pronominal paradigms in Coptic. The term "common" (com.) refers to forms or categories where no gender distinction is made.
4.2 The nearer demonstrative "this" is expressed by the forms
| masc. sing. | ⲡⲁⲓ- |
| fem. sing. | ⲧⲁⲓ- |
| com. pl. | ⲛⲁⲓ- |
prefixed directly to the noun:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ | this man |
| ⲧⲁⲓⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | this woman |
| ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | these brothers |
After a noun with a demonstrative adjective the genitive is usually expressed by ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, as in
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ |
| this book of my brother('s) |
4.3 The pronominal element -ⲕⲉ- inserted between the article and the noun expresses "other":
| ⲡⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the other man |
| ⲛⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the other men |
The indefinite article is omitted in the singular but not in the plural:
| ⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | another man |
| ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | (some) other men |
-ⲕⲉ- may also be used after demonstrative or possessive prefixes:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| this other man |
| ⲡⲁⲕⲉϫⲟⲓ |
| my other ship |
-ⲕⲉ- is not inflected for number or gender in this usage.
Adjectifs et Pronoms Démonstratifs.
1. Adjectifs.
| Sing. | Pl. | |
|---|---|---|
| masc. | fém. | |
| ⲡⲁⲓ- «ce» | ⲧⲁⲓ- «cette» | ⲛⲁⲓ- «ces». |
2. Pronoms.
| Sing. | Pl. | |
|---|---|---|
| masc. | fém. | |
| ⲫⲁⲓ «celui-ci» | ⲑⲁⲓ «celle-ci» | ⲛⲁⲓ «ceux-ci». |
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ «celui-ci est mon fils»[5];
ⲡⲁⲓ-ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «ce jour»;
ⲧⲁⲓⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ «cette année»;
ⲛⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ «ces hommes»;
ⲛⲁⲓϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ «ces femmes».
Le pronom ⲫⲁⲓ ⲑⲁⲓ ⲛⲁⲓ s'emploie souvent après un nom pour renforcer le sens de l'adjectif poss. ou démonstratif:
ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲫⲁⲓ «mon fils que voici»[1].
ⲡⲁⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲫⲁⲓ «ce jour-ci»[2].
ⲫⲁⲓ et ⲛⲁⲓremplacent le neutre des autres langues:
ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ «à cause de cela»,
ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲛⲁⲓ «après ces choses»,
ⲛⲁⲓ ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ «disant ces choses»[3].
1. Pronoms.
Sing. masc. ⲫⲏ «celui-là», fém. ⲑⲏ «celle-là»; pl. ⲛⲏ «ceux-là, celles-là».
2. L'adjectif ne s'est pas conservé; quand on veut indiquer expressément des objets éloignés on se sert de deux expressions invariables: ⲉⲧⲧⲏ, ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ composées du relatif ⲉⲧ et des adverbes ⲧⲏ, ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ «là, là-bas» (20). Le substantif prend l'article:
ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲧⲏ «ce jour-là»[4];
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ «en ce temps-là»[5].
Quand le substantif est accompagné d'un qualificatif, on le place avant ou après l'adverbe:
ϯⲧⲫⲱ ⲉⲧϩⲟⲣϣ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ «ce lourd fardeau-là»[1].
ⲡⲓⲟⲩⲏⲃ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲁⲕⲁⲑⲁⲣⲧⲟⲥ «ce prêtre impur»[2].
Le pronom peut aussi être renforcé par ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ: ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ «celui-là».
Pronom relatif.
Le pronom relatif a trois formes qui conviennent à tous les genres et à tous les nombres: ⲉ, ⲉⲧ, ⲉⲧⲉ.
Ce pronom s'unit aux démonstratifs ⲫⲏ, ⲑⲏ, ⲛⲏ pour former les composés suivants appelés relatifs démonstratifs:
| Sing. | masc. | ⲫⲏ ⲉ | ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧ | ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ | «celui qui»; |
| fém. | ⲑⲏ ⲉ | ⲑⲏ ⲉⲧ | ⲑⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ | «celle qui»; | |
| Pluriel | ⲛⲏ ⲉ | ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧ | ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ | «ceux qui». |
Ces pronoms forment avec les verbes (spécialement avec le qualitatif) et les constructions prépositives des propositions nominales qui équivalent à un nom et en remplissent toutes les fonctions (sujet, régime):
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲃ «celui qui (est) saint = le saint»;
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲑⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ «ceux qui (sont) morts = les morts»;
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲥⲁϧⲟⲩⲛ «les choses qui sont dedans, les entrailles».
Le pronom relatif s'unit aussi à l'article:
Sing. ⲡⲉⲧ, ⲡⲉⲧⲉ «celui qui, ce qui»;
Plur. ⲛⲉⲧ, ⲛⲉⲧⲉ «ceux qui, les choses qui».
Ces pronoms s'emploient généralement pour les choses, rarement pour les personnes:
ⲡⲉⲑ-ⲟⲩⲁⲃ «ce qui est saint» ou «le saint»[1];
ⲡⲉⲧ-ϩⲱⲟⲩ «ce qui est mal = le mal»;
ⲡⲉⲧ-ϩⲏⲡ «ce qui est caché»;
ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲕⲛⲁⲁⲓⲥ «ce que tu feras»[2].
Ces mots composés peuvent encore être déterminés par l'article:
ⲡⲓ-ⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ «le mal»; ϩⲁⲛ-ⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ «des maux»[3].
Pour l'emploi du pronom relatif et la différence entre ⲉ, ⲉⲧ, ⲉⲧⲉ, voir la proposition relative (378).
5.1 Sentences with nominal predicates. A second type of non-verbal sentence is illustrated by
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ. |
| He (It) is my father. |
| ⲧⲁⲙⲁⲩ ⲧⲉ. |
| She (It) is my mother. |
| ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are (It is) my brothers. |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ. |
| He (It) is a man. |
| ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲧⲉ. |
| She (It) is a woman. |
| ϩⲁⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are (It is) ships. |
The pronominal subject is expressed by ⲡⲉ (m.s.), ⲧⲉ (f.s.), and ⲛⲉ (pl.), the choice of which depends usually on the gender and number of the predicate noun. Simple two-member sentences like the above are relatively rare except in response to such questions as "Who is that?" "What are these?" where an answer giving the predicate alone is sufficient, the subject being understood from the context. Modifiers of the predicate, such as a genitive phrase, may optionally stand after the pronominal subject.
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲃ. |
| He is the son of the priest. |
A nominal subject may be added to the basic predication, producing a three-member sentence in which ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ are reduced virtually to the status of a copula. If the predicate is indefinite, the order is almost always predicate + ⲡⲉ, the subject being placed before or after the whole unit:
| ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ. |
| My father is a teacher. |
If the subject and predicate are both definite, the normal position of ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ is between them:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ. |
| This man is our teacher. |
Identification of subject and predicate in this case can be made only on a contextual basis. The rarer order, ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ, places as emphasis on the real subject: "As for this man, he is our teacher."
In the event that there is a disagreement in the number or gender of subject and predicate, the copula ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ usually assumes the number and gender of the noun immediately preceding it.
All of the preceding sentences are negated by placing ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀) before the predicate and ⲁⲛ before the ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ. |
| It is not my father. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ. |
| My father is not a teacher. |
| ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ. |
| This man is not our teacher. |
Note that in the case where both subject and predicate are definite, the nominal element negated is, by definition, the predicate.
Sentences with nominal predicates are converted to the status of relative clauses with ⲉⲧⲉ. For the moment we shall restrict ourselves to those clauses where ⲉⲧⲉ functions as the subject of the relative clause:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ |
| the man who is a teacher |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| the man who is not a teacher |
The phrase ⲉⲧⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ is frequently used to introduce explanatory material, much like English "namely, i.e., that is to say":
| ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲏⲣ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲓ̄ⲥ̄ ⲡⲉⲭ̄ⲥ̄ |
| our savior, i.e. Jesus Christ |
5.2 The nearer demonstrative pronouns (this, these) are ⲫⲁⲓ (m.s.), ⲑⲁⲓ (f.s.), and ⲛⲁⲓ (pl.). They are frequently employed as subjects in sentences with nominal predicates:
| ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| These are his words. |
| ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁϫⲟⲓ. |
| This is my ship. |
| ⲑⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲧⲉ. |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲧⲉ ⲑⲁⲓ. |
| This is a maidservant. |
1. ⲁϣ quel? quelle?
2. ⲛⲓⲙ qui? quel?
3. ⲟⲩ quoi?
4. ⲟⲩⲏⲣ combien?
5. ⲁϧⲟ⸗ pourquoi?
Excepté ⲁϧⲟ⸗ forme avec suffixes, tous ces mots sont invariables et s'emploient de deux manières: substantivement et adjectivement, c.-à-d. comme déterminatifs d'un substantif auquel ils s'unissent au moyen de ⲛ̀:
Subst. ⲛⲓⲙ ⲉⲧⲟⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ «qui est semblable à toi?»[4].
Adjec. ⲁϣ ⲛ̀-ⲣⲏϯ «quelle manière?».
ⲁϣ désigne les personnes et les choses:
ⲁϣ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲧⲓⲙⲏ ⲫⲁⲓ «quel est ce village?»[1].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲫⲁ-ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϣ «de quel nome es-tu?»[2].
ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲛ̀ⲣⲏϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ «quel est l'état de la terre?»[3].
ⲛⲓⲙ ne remplace que les personnes:
ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲱⲣⲓ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲉⲑⲛⲁϫⲉⲙⲥ «la femme forte, qui la trouvera?»[4].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟ ⲧϣⲉⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲙ «de qui es-tu fille?»[5].
ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «quel homme?».
ⲟⲩ ne s'emploie que pour les choses, il se met avant ou après le mot auquel il se rapporte:
ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ϯⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ «qu'est-ce que la vérité?»[6].
ⲛⲉⲕϣⲓⲛⲓ ϩⲁⲛ-ⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ «quelles sont tes nouvelles?»[7].
ⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ «quel prodige?»[8].
ⲁⲕⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲟⲩ «que cherches-tu?»[9].
Avec le verbe ⲉⲣ «faire», ⲟⲩ forme le composé ⲉⲣⲟⲩ qui est toujours suivi du datif ⲛ⸗ et signifie «qu'importe à? que sert à?», en arabe ما لِ:
ⲉⲣⲟⲩ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲁⲓ «qu'est-ce que cela me fait?»[10].
ⲟⲩⲏⲣ désigne les personnes et les choses:
ⲟⲩⲏⲣ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲓⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲱⲛϧ «quel âge as-tu? Littér. quot sunt anni dierum vitæ tuæ?»[11].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲏⲣ ⲛ̀ⲱⲓⲕ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ «combien avez-vous de pains?»[12].
ⲁϧⲟ⸗ (ما بال) «pourquoi?» (Ṣ. ⲁϩⲣⲟ⸗).
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲁϧⲟⲓ | 1. | ⲁϧⲟⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲁϧⲟⲕ | 2. | ⲁϧⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲁϧⲟ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲁϧⲟϥ | 3. | ⲁϧⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲁϧⲟⲥ | ||
ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲁϧⲟ ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲙⲓ «femme, pourquoi pleures-tu?»[1].
Il a aussi le sens de «qu'importe?» (ما لِ):
ⲁϧⲟⲕ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲛ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫϯ ما انا ولكَ ابن الله «qu'y a-t-il entre toi et nous, Fils de Dieu?»[2].
1. ⲟⲩⲁⲓ, fém. ⲟⲩⲓ un, une.
2. ⲟⲩⲟⲛ quelqu'un.
3. ϩⲗⲓ aucun, rien.
4. ⲛⲓⲙ un tel.
5. ⲕⲉ autre, aussi.
6. ⲭⲉⲧ, fém. ⲭⲉϯ autre.
7. ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ pl. autres.
8. ⲙⲏϣ beaucoup.
9. ⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ peu.
10. ϩⲟⲩⲟ plus, davantage.
ⲟⲩⲁⲓ, fém. ⲟⲩⲓ (Ṣ. ⲟⲩⲁ, fém. ⲟⲩⲉⲓ) s'emploie substantivement et adjectivement.
ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ «un des douze»[3].
ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ «un de ces petits»[4].
De ⲟⲩⲁⲓ dérive l'adjectif ⲟⲩⲱⲧ qui a deux sens:
1. «Unique, seul» quand son substantif a l'article ⲟⲩ: ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲱⲧ «un seul Dieu».
2. «Le même, la même» quand le substantif a l'article défini ou ses dérivés:
ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲱⲧ «le même jour».
ⲧⲁⲓ-ⲡⲟⲗⲓⲥ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲱⲧ «cette même ville»[1].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ est toujours employé subst. et désigne les personnes: ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ «quelqu'un de nous».
ⲕⲉⲅⲁⲣ ⲫⲓⲱⲧ ⲁϥⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲛⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲏϯ ⲛⲏ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲱϣⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «car le Père cherche des personnes de cette sorte, qui l'adorent»[2].
ϩⲗⲓ (Ṣ. ⲗⲁⲁⲩ) s'emploie pour les personnes et pour les choses, généralement dans une proposition négative:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲭⲁ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲱⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲥⲱⲙⲁ «ne laisse personne emporter mon corps»[3].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ϩⲗⲓ «il ne parla à personne»[4].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϯ ϩⲗⲓ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲉⲃⲏⲗ ⲉ ⲡⲓⲗⲉⲃⲓⲧⲟⲩ «ne mettez sur moi rien autre chose que l'habit monacal»[3].
ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ (فلان), pronom indéfini[5], est généralement marqué d'un trait pour le distinguer de ⲛⲓⲙ interrogatif. Il s'emploie:
1. seul, substantivement, pour indiquer la place d'un nom propre:
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «moi, un tel».
ⲁⲃⲃⲁ ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «l'abbé un tel», ou mieux «l'abbé N.»[6].
2. avec l'article attributif ⲡⲁ ⲧⲁ dans les deux expressions consacrées:
masc. ⲡⲁ-ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «celui d'un tel, c.-à-d. un tel, fils d'un tel».
fém. ⲧⲁ-ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «celle d'un tel ou d'une telle, c.-à-d. une telle».
Ces deux termes ont parfois le même sens que ⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «un tel, une telle», mais ils sont plus déterminés:
ⲡⲉⲕⲃⲱⲕ ⲡⲁⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «ton serviteur, un tel»[1].
ϯⲉⲕⲕⲗⲏⲥⲓⲁ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲃ ⲧⲁⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ «la sainte église, une telle».
Mais on traduira dans le premier sens:
ϯⲉⲕⲕⲗⲏⲥⲓⲁ ⲧⲁⲛ︤ⲓ︦ⲙ︥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲗⲓⲥ «l'église de telle ville»[2].
Remarques.
1. L'expression grecque équivalente qui se trouve dans l' Ordinal est indiquée par les deux sigles ⲇⲇ: ⲇⲉⲓⲛⲁ ⲇⲉⲓⲛⲟⲥ «un tel, fils d'un tel».
2. A peu près de même sens, mais de racine différente (égyp. men) est le mot composé ⲡⲁ-ⲫ-ⲙⲁⲛ «un tel» qui est rare:
ⲡⲁⲫⲙⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ϧⲉⲗϣⲓⲣⲓ «tel jeune homme»[3].
ⲕⲉ «autre, aussi» (Ṣ. ⲕⲉ, ϭⲉ) est adjectif et adverbe.
Adjectif, il signifie «autre» et précède toujours le nom. Celui-ci peut être déterminé ou indéterminé; lorsqu'il est indéterminé, il ne prend pas d'article au singulier; au pluriel, il prend ϩⲁⲛ:
ϯ-ⲕⲉ-ⲫⲁϣⲓ «l'autre moitié»[4];
ⲛⲉⲙ ⲕⲉ-ⲁⲗⲟⲩ «avec un autre enfant»[5];
ϩⲁⲛ-ⲕⲉ-ⲁⲗⲱⲟⲩⲓ «d'autres enfants».
Adverbe, il signifie «aussi» et doit être précédé de l'article ⲡ ou de ses dérivés. En ce sens il s'emploie dans deux cas:
1. Devant les noms et même parfois les pronoms:
ⲛⲓ-ⲕⲉ-ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲟⲩ «les rois aussi»[6].
ⲡ-ⲕⲉ-ⲏⲣⲱⲇⲏⲥ «Hérode aussi»[7].
ⲡ-ⲕⲉ-ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ϩⲱⲕ «toi aussi»[8].
2. Devant l'infinitif des verbes, sous la forme ⲉⲣ-ⲡ-ⲕⲉ:
ⲧⲉⲛ-ⲉⲣ-ⲡ-ⲕⲉ-ⲥⲁϫⲓ «nous parlons aussi»[1].
ⲁϥ-ⲉⲣ-ⲡ-ⲕⲉ-ⲟⲩⲱⲣⲡ «il a aussi envoyé»[2].
ⲭⲉⲧ, fém. ⲭⲉϯ est toujours employé subst.
ⲡⲓ-ⲭⲉⲧ «l'autre», ⲡⲁⲓ-ⲭⲉⲧ «cet autre».
ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ «autres» lui sert de pluriel et a le même emploi:
ⲛⲓ-ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ «les autres»; ϩⲁⲛ-ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ «d'autres».
Chacun, chaque.
Pour traduire «chacun», on répète deux fois ⲟⲩⲁⲓ f. ⲟⲩⲓ avec l'article défini si l'expression est déterminée, sans article, si elle est indéterminée:
masc. ⲫ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲫ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ, ⲡⲓ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲡⲓ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ «chacun»[3];
fém. ⲑ-ⲟⲩⲓ ⲑ-ⲟⲩⲓ «chacune».
On traduit «chaque» en répétant deux fois le nom que ce mot détermine:
ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «chaque jour»[4].
ⲡⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲡⲓⲟϩⲓ «chaque troupeau»[5].
L'adjectif «chaque» se rend par ⲧⲉⲛ- dans l'expression «chaque année»: ⲟⲩⲥⲟⲡ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ «une fois chaque année»[6].
ⲙⲏϣ et ⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ sont proprement des noms qui peuvent être employés adjectivement:
ⲟⲩ-ⲙⲏϣ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «beaucoup de jours»[1].
ϩⲁⲛ-ⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «peu de jours»[2].
ϩⲟⲩⲟ est un adverbe qui peut déterminer un substantif ou un verbe avec ⲉⲣ-:
ϥⲛⲁⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟϥ ϩⲓⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲉⲛ ϩⲟⲩⲟ-ⲟⲩⲧⲁϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «il le purifiera afin qu'il rapporte plus de fruits»[3].
ⲉⲣ-ϩⲟⲩⲟ-ϭⲓⲥⲓ «exalter grandement».
Dans le sens de pronoms indéfinis, s'emploient aussi quelquefois les substantifs ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «homme», ϩⲱⲃ «chose», ⲥⲁϫⲓ «parole, chose»: ⲁ ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲇⲉ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉϥⲛⲁϣⲧ «la chose fut pénible»[4].
6.1 The independent personal pronouns.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ | I |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ | you (m.s.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟ | you (f.s.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ | he, it (m.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲥ | she, it (f.) |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ | we |
| ⲛⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (c.pl.) |
| ⲛⲑⲱⲟⲩ | they (c.pl.) |
These pronouns occur frequently in sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. When used as predicates in a two-member sentence, they are invariably followed by ⲡⲉ:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ. | It is I. |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. | It is she. |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ⲡⲉ. | It is we. |
In three-member sentences they may appear in ordinary subject or predicate positions:
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲭ̄ⲥ̄. |
| He is the Christ. |
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is a god. |
| ⲛⲉϥⲉⲃⲓⲁⲓⲕ ⲛⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲛ. |
| We are his servants. |
In sentences with an indefinite nominal predicate a special construction without ⲡⲉ is used with the pronouns of the 1st and 2nd person; negation is with ⲁⲛ alone:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲁⲙϣⲉ (ⲁⲛ). |
| I am (not) a carpenter. |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩⲏⲃ. |
| We are priests. |
In this construction a reduced proclitic form of the pronoun is very often used:
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄- | I |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲕ̄- | you (m.s.) |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉ- | you (f.s.) |
| ⲁⲛ- | we |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲧⲛ̄- | you (c.pl.) |
as in
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄-ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ (ⲁⲛ). |
| I am (not) an angel. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲕ̄-ⲟⲩϩⲁⲙϣⲉ. |
| You are a carpenter. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲧⲛ̄-ϩⲉⲛⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ. |
| You are pupils. |
A 3rd person masc. form ⲛ̄ⲧϥ̄- also occurs, but is very rare. The reduced forms of the 1st and 2nd person pronouns may also be used with a definite predicate, but this construction is rather infrequent:
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄-ⲑⲙ̄ϩⲁⲗ ⲙ̄ ⲡϫⲟⲉⲓⲥ. |
| I am the handmaiden of the Lord. |
6.2 The interrogative pronouns.
| ⲛⲓⲙ | who? |
| ⲁϣ | what? |
| ⲟⲩ | what? |
These pronouns are used in sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ? |
| Who is it? |
| ⲁϣ ⲡⲉ? |
| What is it? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ? |
| Who is this man? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲣⲁⲛ? |
| What is your name? (note idiom) |
| ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ? |
| What is this? |
| ⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ? |
| What are these? |
The interrogative pronoun normally stands first. The choice of number and gender for the copula depends on the understood or expressed subject. The pronoun ⲟⲩ is also found with the indefinite article:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ? |
| What is it? (lit.: It is a what?) |
| ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ? |
| What are they? (lit.: They are whats?) |
When the subject is a personal pronoun of the 1st or 2nd person, it may be placed before ⲛⲓⲙ or ⲟⲩ:
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Who are you? |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲟⲩ? |
| What are you? |
The personal pronoun may be repeated for emphasis:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ? |
| Who am I? |
Note that ⲛⲓⲙ may also be used in ordinary genitive constructions:
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whose son? |
Formation, Genre et Nombre des Noms.
Les noms sont: primitifs, dérivés ou composés.
Les noms primitifs sont formés de la racine elle-même sans addition: ⲥⲟⲛ «frère».
Les noms dérivés sont formés d'une racine et de suffixes: ⲥⲱⲛ-ⲓ «sœur».
Les noms composés sont formés d'une racine et de préfixes. Nous appelons préfixe tout mot ou toute particule mis en tête d'un autre mot et unis à lui dans l'écriture: ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲥⲟⲛ «fraternité».
1. Noms primitifs.
Les noms primitifs ont été transcrits de l'égyptien d'après les règles exposées plus haut § 13 et suivants. Il est donc inutile de revenir ici sur leur formation.
Genre.
Il y a en copte deux genres: le masculin et le féminin. En égyptien les noms féminins étaient terminés par t; cette terminaison ayant disparu en copte (22), les noms féminins offrent souvent la même finale que les noms masculins dont la dernière consonne est aussi tombée (21):
masc. ⲣⲱⲙⲓ, ⲥⲟⲛⲓ;
fém. ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ, ⲥⲱⲛⲓ.
Il est donc impossible de les distinguer à leur forme extérieure.
On peut cependant faire les remarques suivantes:
1. Quelques noms sont des deux genres avec une différence de sens:
ϯ-ⲁⲫⲉ «la tête», ⲡⲓ-ⲁⲫⲉ «le chef»;
ϯ-ⲃⲏⲧ «la côte», ⲡⲓ-ⲃⲏⲧ «la palme»;
ϯ-ϫⲟⲓ «le mur», ⲡⲓ-ϫⲟⲓ «la barque».
2. Avec une différence de sexe (noms épicènes):
ⲡⲓ-ⲁⲗⲟⲩ «le garçon», ϯ-ⲁⲗⲟⲩ «la fille»;
ⲡⲓ-ⲉϩⲉ «le bœuf», ϯ-ⲉϩⲉ «la vache».
A cette catégorie se rattachent les noms de fruits qui au masc. désignent le fruit lui-même, et au fém. l'arbre producteur:
ⲡⲓ-ⲁⲗⲟⲗⲓ «le raisin», ϯ-ⲁⲗⲟⲗⲓ «la vigne»;
ⲡⲓ-ⲕⲉⲛⲧⲉ «la figue», ϯ-ⲕⲉⲛⲧⲉ «le figuier».
3. Dans le même sens:
ⲡⲓ- ϯ- ⲥⲃⲉ «la porte»;
ⲡⲓ- ϯ- ϫⲉⲃⲥ «le charbon».
4. Les noms neutres grecs sont déterminés par l'article masc. en copte, les autres noms gardent leur genre: ⲡⲓ-ⲥⲱⲙⲁ «le corps», ⲡⲓ-ⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ «l'esprit».
2. Noms dérivés.
Les principales terminaisons qui s'ajoutent à la racine pour former de nouveaux mots sont ⲉ, ⲓ, ⲱ, ϥ, ⲥ, ⲧ.
1. ⲉ masc., ⲏ fém. forment des adjectifs; le radical prend ⲁ ou bien ⲉ après la première consonne. La terminaison a parfois disparu après ⲧ:
ϣⲁϥⲉ, fém. ϣⲁϥⲏ «désert», de ϣⲱϥ «dévaster»;
ϣⲁϥⲧ «méchant», de ϣⲱϥⲧ «se tromper»;
ⲑⲉϣⲉ, fém. ⲑⲉϣⲏ «voisin», de ⲑⲟϣ «limite»;
ⲛⲉϣⲧⲉ «dur», de ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲧ «être dur».
2. ⲓ forme des substantifs féminins:
ⲟⲩⲟⲃϣⲓ «blancheur», de ⲟⲩⲟⲃϣ «blanc»;
ⲏⲡⲓ «nombre», de ⲱⲡ «compter»;
ϩⲗⲏϫⲓ «douceur», de ϩⲗⲟϫ «devenir doux»;
ϩⲣⲏϫⲓ «pesanteur», de ϩⲣⲟϫ «devenir lourd».
ⲓ forme aussi le féminin de quelques adjectifs:
ϣⲟⲣⲡ «premier», fém. ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ;
ϣⲟⲙⲧ «trois», fém. ϣⲟⲙϯ;
ⲕⲟⲩⲣ «sourd», fém. ⲕⲁⲩⲣⲓ.
3. ⲱ forme également des noms féminins:
ϩⲉⲃⲥⲱ «vêtement», de ϩⲱⲃⲥ «vêtir»;
ϫⲁϫⲱ «marmite», de ϫⲱϫ «faire cuire»;
ⲉⲧⲫⲱ «fardeau», de ⲱⲧⲡ «porter».
4. ϥ forme des noms masculins:
ⲛⲁϩⲃⲉϥ «joug», de ⲛⲟϩⲉⲃ «atteler»;
ⲣⲱⲟⲩⲧϥ «allégresse», de ⲣⲱⲟⲩⲧ «joyeux».
On emploie de même ϥ avec les formes avec suffixes des noms et des verbes lorsqu'on veut les prendre dans un sens absolu, sans indication de personne:
ⲡ-ⲧⲱⲛϥ «l'action de se lever», de ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ «se lever»;
ⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ «le bon plaisir», de ⲣⲁⲛⲉ- «plaire à»;
ⲡⲓ-ⲡⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ «le bien», de ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉ⸗ «bon»;
ⲡⲓ-ϭⲓϩⲣⲁϥ «le respect humain», de ϭⲓ «prendre» et ϩⲣ⸗ «face»;
ϯ-ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «la complaisance humaine»[1].
5. ⲥ forme des noms féminins:
ⲑⲱⲟⲩⲧⲥ «réunion», de ⲑⲱⲟⲩϯ «réunir»;
ⲕⲉⲗⲡⲥ «vol», de ⲕⲱⲗⲡ «voler سَرَقَ»;
ⲑⲣⲁⲡⲥ «aiguille», de ⲑⲱⲣⲡ «coudre»;
ⲥⲟⲣⲙⲉⲥ «erreur», de ⲥⲱⲣⲉⲙ «errer».
6. ⲧ vocalisé ⲏⲧ ou ⲓⲧ:
ϣⲉⲙϣⲏⲧ «serviteur», de ϣⲉⲙϣⲓ «servir»;
ϩⲁⲗⲏⲧ «oiseau طائر», de ϩⲱⲗ «voler طار»;
ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ «ami», de ⲙⲉⲓ, ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ- «aimer».
Ces derniers mots sont des qualitatifs devenus substantifs.
3. Noms composés.
La première partie du composé, le préfixe (121), peut être un nom, un verbe ou une particule. C'est toujours une forme abrégée. La seconde partie, qui a l'accent tonique, est un nom ou un verbe à l'infinitif.
1. Le préfixe est un nom.
Il y a en copte un nombre assez restreint de noms qui ont une forme abrégée et peuvent être employés comme préfixes.
Voici les principaux avec quelques exemples:
1. ⲓⲟⲣ ⲓⲁⲣ- «canal»,
2. ⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲓⲁϩ- «champ»,
3. ⲙⲁ-ⲛ̀- «lieu de»,
4. ⲛⲏⲃ ⲛⲉⲃ- «maître»,
5. ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲉⲙ- «homme»,
6. ⲥⲑⲟⲓ ⲥⲑⲩ- ⲥϯ- «odeur»,
7. ϧⲉⲗ- «personne»,
8. ϩⲱⲃ ϩⲉⲃ- «chose».
Exemples:
1. ⲓⲁⲣⲟ (grand canal) «fleuve, le Nil». ⲟ fém. ⲱ est un ancien adjectif qui en ég. signifiait «grand» et qui ne s'est maintenu en copte que dans les noms composés (cf. ⲟⲩⲣⲟ roi, ⲟⲩⲣⲱ reine; ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ vieillard, ϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ vieille femme).
2. ⲓⲁϩϫⲱⲓⲧ «champ d'oliviers», ⲓⲁϩⲁⲗⲟⲗⲓ «vigne», ⲓⲁϩϣϣⲏⲛ «forêt».
3. ⲙⲁ-ⲛ̀- est toujours suivi d'un verbe: ⲙⲁⲛ̀ϣⲱⲡⲓ «demeure», ⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲫⲱⲧ «refuge», ⲙⲁⲛ̀ϣⲁⲓ «orient», ⲙⲁⲛ̀ϩⲱⲧⲡ «occident».
4. ⲛⲉⲃⲏⲓ «maître de maison», ⲛⲉⲃⲁϩⲓ «âgé», ⲛⲉⲃⲟϩⲓ «maître du troupeau», ⲛⲉⲃⲓⲟϩⲓ «maître du champ».
5. ⲣⲉⲙ- et plus généralement ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀- forme des noms de profession; devant un nom de ville ou de lieu, il indique les habitants: ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϩⲱⲃ «ouvrier», ⲣⲉⲙⲣⲁⲕⲟϯ «Alexandrin», ⲣⲉⲙⲙ̀ⲃⲉⲧⲥ «guerrier», ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ «Egyptien», ⲣⲉⲙⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲕⲓ «citadin», ⲣⲉⲙϯⲫⲟⲓⲛⲓⲕⲏ «Phénicien»[1].
6. ⲥⲑⲟⲓⲛⲟⲩϥⲓ ⲥⲑⲩⲛⲟⲩϥⲓ «encens, bonne odeur», ⲥⲑⲟⲓⲃⲱⲛ ⲥⲑⲩⲃⲱⲛ «mauvaise odeur».
7. ϧⲉⲗ- n'est employé qu'en composition: ϧⲉⲗϣⲓⲣⲓ «jeune homme», ϧⲉⲗϣⲁⲓⲣⲓ «jeune fille»; ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ «vieillard», ϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ «vieille femme».
8. ϩⲉⲃⲛⲟⲩϥⲓ «bonne action», ϩⲉⲃⲃⲱⲛ «mauvaise action».
2. Le préfixe est un verbe.
Dans ces composés, la seconde partie est toujours un substantif; ils sont de tout point semblables aux mots composés français coupe-papier, garde-robe, etc. Le verbe prend ⲁ après la première radicale; le substantif reste invariable:
ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ «qui aime Dieu», de ⲙⲉⲓ «aimer».
Il y a ainsi une quinzaine de verbes qui forment des composés; ces mots s'emploient adjectivement, c.-à-d. après un substantif auquel ils s'unissent au moyen de ⲛ̀. Tels sont:
ⲁⲛ-ϣⲉ «chef de cent, centenier» de ⲓⲛⲓ «conduire», ⲁⲛϣⲟ «chef de mille».
ⲗⲁϥ-ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ «luxurieux», de ⲗⲓⲃⲓ «délirer».
ⲙⲁⲓ-ϩⲁⲧ «qui aime l'argent», ⲙⲁⲓ-ϩⲏⲕⲓ «qui aime les pauvres», ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «qui aime les hommes», etc.
ⲙⲁⲛ-ⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ «berger, pasteur», de ⲙⲟⲛⲓ «faire paître», ⲙⲁⲛ-ϫⲁⲙⲟⲩⲗ «chamelier», etc.
ⲛⲁϣⲧ-ⲛⲁϩⲃⲓ «à tête dure», de ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲧ «être dur».
ⲟⲩⲁⲙ-ⲥⲛⲟϥ «sanguinaire», de ⲟⲩⲱⲙ «manger», etc.
ⲫⲁⲥ-ⲥⲟϫⲉⲛ «parfumeur», de ⲫⲓⲥⲓ «faire cuire».
ⲫⲁϣ-ⲙⲟⲩ «à moitié mort» de ⲫⲱϣ «diviser».
ϥⲁⲓ-ϣⲓⲛⲓ «messager», de ϥⲁⲓ «porter».
ϧⲁⲧⲉⲃ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «meurtrier» de ϧⲱⲧⲉⲃ «tuer».
ϣⲁⲙϣⲉ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ «serviteur de Dieu», de ϣⲉⲙϣⲓ «servir», ϣⲁⲙϣⲉ-ⲓⲇⲱⲗⲟⲛ «idolâtre».
ϫⲁⲃⲓ-ϩⲏⲧ et ϫⲁϥ-ϩⲏⲧ «lâche», de ( ϫⲉⲃⲓ) «être faible».
ϫⲁϫ-ϣⲁⲓ «qui a le nez coupé», de ϫⲱϫ «couper».
ϭⲁⲓ-ⲃⲉⲭⲉ «mercenaire», de ϭⲓ «recevoir» et ⲃⲉⲭⲉ «salaire».
ϭⲁⲥⲓ-ⲃⲁⲗ «orgueilleux», de ϭⲓⲥⲓ «exalter»; ϭⲁⲥⲓϩⲏⲧ «fier, altier».
3. Le préfixe est une particule.
Voici les principales particules préfixes:
ⲁⲛ- (collection),
ⲁⲧ- «sans»,
ⲉ- (profession),
ⲗⲁ- (abondance),
ⲙⲉⲧ-, ⲙⲉⲑ- (état),
ⲣⲉϥ- (agent),
ⲥⲁ (profession),
ϣⲟⲩ- «digne de»,
ϩⲁ- (commencement),
ϩⲁⲙ-, ⲁⲙ- «ouvrier»,
ϫⲓⲛ- «action de».
ⲁⲛ- s'unit surtout aux noms de nombres pour indiquer la collection:
ϣⲁϣϥ «sept», ⲁⲛϣⲁϣϥ «semaine»;
ⲙⲉⲧ «dix», ⲁⲛⲙⲉⲧ «dizaine»;
ⲛ̅ (ⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ) «cinquante», ⲁⲛⲛ̅ «cinquantaine»;
ⲣ̅ (ϣⲉ) «cent», ⲁⲛⲣ̅ «centaine»;
ϣⲟ «mille», ϩⲁⲛ-ⲁⲛϣⲟ «des milliers».
On peut même redoubler ⲁⲛ-: ⲛⲓⲁⲛⲁⲛϣⲟ ⲛ̀ϣⲟ «les milliers de milliers»[1].
On trouve aussi ⲁⲛ-ⲧⲱⲟⲩ «chaîne de montagnes».
ⲁⲧ- (ⲁⲑ- devant ⲃ ⲗ ⲙ ⲛ ⲣ) forme des adjectifs privatifs d'un fréquent usage:
ⲁⲧⲥⲙⲏ «sans voix, muet»;
ⲁⲧⲯⲩⲭⲏ «sans âme, lâche»;
ⲁⲧ s'emploie surtout avec l'infinitif potentiel formé de ϣ- «pouvoir»:
ⲁⲧϣⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ «impuissant»,
ⲁⲧϣⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «indicible».
ⲉ- forme avec un verbe quelques noms de profession:
ⲕⲱⲧ «construire», ⲉⲕⲱⲧ «architecte»;
ϣⲱⲧ «négocier», ⲉϣⲱⲧ «négociant».
ⲗⲁ- indique l'abondance devant les substantifs et les adjectifs: ⲗⲁϥⲱⲓ «poilu», ⲗⲁϫⲁⲗ «touffu», ⲗⲁⲟⲩⲁⲓ «tout à fait un», ⲗⲁⲙⲁϧⲧ «glouton»[1].
ⲙⲉⲧ- ⲙⲉⲑ- forme des substantifs abstraits qui sont tous féminins:
ⲁⲗⲟⲩ «enfant», ⲙⲉⲧⲁⲗⲟⲩ «enfance»;
ⲙⲏⲓ «vrai», ⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ «vérité»;
ⲟⲩⲁⲓ «un», ⲙⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲓ «unité».
ⲣⲉϥ- s'emploie devant l'infinitif et le qualitatif des verbes pour former le nom d'agent:
ⲥⲱⲛⲧ «créer», ⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲛⲧ «créateur»;
ϣⲱⲛⲓ «être malade», ⲣⲉϥϣⲱⲛⲓ «malade»;
ⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ «être mort», ⲣⲉϥⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ «mort».
L'infinitif peut avoir un complément: ⲡⲁⲣⲉϥⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲧ «mon sauveur».
ⲥⲁ suivi de ⲛ̀ forme des noms de profession:
ϣⲁⲣ «cuir», ⲥⲁⲛ̀ϣⲁⲣ «corroyeur»;
ⲕⲁⲡ «corde», ⲥⲁⲛ̀ⲕⲁⲡ «cordier»;
et dans un sens métaphorique: ⲥⲁ-ⲙ̀-ⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ «fabricant de mal, méchant»;
ⲥⲁ-ⲙ̀-ⲙⲉⲑⲛⲟⲩϫ «menteur».
ϣⲟⲩ- «digne de» forme des adjectifs qui sont toujours à l'état pronominal:
ⲧⲁⲓⲟ «vénérer», ϣⲟⲩⲧⲁⲓⲟ⸗ «vénérable»;
ⲙⲉⲓ «aimer», ϣⲟⲩⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ⸗ «digne d'être aimé»;
ⲉⲣϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ «admirer», ϣⲟⲩⲉⲣϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ «admirable»;
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲩⲧⲁⲓⲟϥ «un homme vénérable».
ϩⲁⲙ-, et par chute du ϩ initial ⲁⲙ-, est un ancien mot qui signifiait «ouvrier», il est resté dans quelques noms de profession:
ϣⲉ «bois», ϩⲁⲙϣⲉ, ⲁⲙϣⲉ «charpentier»;
ⲕⲉⲗⲓ «serrure», ϩⲁⲙⲕⲉⲗⲓ «serrurier».
ϩⲁ- indique le plus haut point, le commencement d'une chose:
ⲣⲟ «bouche», ϩⲁⲛ̀ⲣⲟ «lèvre»;
ⲧⲟⲟⲩⲓ «la matinée», ϩⲁ-ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲟⲟⲩⲓ «le matin»;
ⲣⲟⲩϩⲓ «la soirée», ϩⲁ-ⲛⲁ-ⲣⲟⲩϩⲓ «le soir»;
ⲙⲉⲣⲓ «midi», ϩⲁ-ⲛⲁ-ⲙⲉⲣⲓ «midi».
La particule ϩⲁ- peut être considérée comme l'état construit de ϩⲏ «commencement».
ϫⲓⲛ- (Ṣ. ϭⲓⲛ-) forme le substantif verbal (مصدر):
ⲙⲟϣⲓ «marcher», ⲡⲓϫⲓⲛⲙⲟϣⲓ «la marche»;
ⲱϣ «lire», ⲡⲓϫⲓⲛⲱϣ «l'action de lire».
Ces substantifs sont généralement du masculin. Cependant quand ils indiquent la manière dont est faite l'action exprimée par le verbe, plutôt que cette action elle-même, ils sont du féminin:
ϯϫⲓⲛⲁⲙⲟⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ «la patience»[1];
ϯϫⲓⲛⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ «la tenue»[2];
ϯϫⲓⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ «la conversation»[1];
ϯϫⲓⲛⲉⲣϩⲱⲃ «la manière d'agir»[2].
Remarques.
1. Les mots qui commencent par ⲃ prennent parfois un ⲙ̀ initial sans changer de sens:
ⲃⲣⲉϩⲓ et ⲙ̀ⲃⲣⲉϩⲓ «char»;
ⲃⲣⲁⲓ et ⲙ̀ⲃⲣⲁⲓ «plat de lentilles»;
ⲃⲣⲟⲩⲭⲟⲥ et ⲙ̀ⲃⲣⲟⲩⲭⲟⲥ «sauterelle».
2. Les mots qui commencent par ⲭ ϣ prennent aussi ⲛ̀ et quelquefois changent de sens:
ϣⲁϣⲓ = ⲛ̀ϣⲁϣⲓ = ⲉⲛϣⲁϣⲓ «amertume»;
ϣⲱⲧ «couper», ⲉⲛϣⲱⲧ «hache»;
ⲭⲁⲓ = ⲛ̀ⲭⲁⲓ = ⲉⲛⲭⲁⲓ «chose»;
ⲭⲣⲟϯ = ⲉⲛⲭⲣⲟϯ «enfants».
Il y a en copte deux nombres: le singulier et le pluriel.
Pour la plupart des noms, le pluriel est semblable au singulier, il ne se distingue que par l'article:
ⲡⲓ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «l'homme», ⲛⲓ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «les hommes»;
ⲡⲓ-ϣⲏⲣⲓ «le fils», ⲛⲓ-ϣⲏⲣⲓ «les fils».
Cependant un assez grand nombre de noms ont au pluriel une terminaison particulière. Dans l'ancien égyptien les terminaisons du pluriel étaient w pour le masc., wt (prononcé ouit) pour le féminin. De la première, dérive en copte le plur. masc. en ⲟⲩ; de la seconde, le plur. fém. en ⲟⲩⲓ (Ṣ. ⲟⲩⲉ).
1. Pluriels masculins.
1. Noms masculins terminés par une voyelle.
La terminaison ⲟⲩ peut être précédée des voyelles ⲱ ⲏ ⲉ accentuées.
1. ⲱⲟⲩ forme le pluriel des noms masc. terminés en ⲟ:
ⲣⲟ «porte», pl. ⲣⲱⲟⲩ;
ⲟⲩⲣⲟ «roi», pl. ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲟⲩ;
ⲓⲁⲣⲟ «fleuve», pl. ⲓⲁⲣⲱⲟⲩ;
ⲉⲃⲟ «muet», pl. ⲉⲃⲱⲟⲩ;
ⲟⲩⲉϫⲣⲟ «montant de porte», pl. ⲟⲩⲉϫⲣⲱⲟⲩ;
ϣⲉⲙⲙⲟ «étranger», pl. ϣⲉⲙⲙⲱⲟⲩ;
ϣⲧⲉⲕⲟ «prison», pl. ϣⲧⲉⲕⲱⲟⲩ.
Quelques noms en ⲟ ont aussi un plur. en ⲟⲓ:
ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟ «riche», pl. ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲱⲟⲩ et ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟⲓ;
ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ «vieillard» pl. ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟⲓ.
2. ⲏⲟⲩ (Ṣ. ⲏⲩ) forme le pluriel des substantifs masculins terminés en ⲉ:
ⲁⲙⲣⲉ «boulanger», pl. ⲁⲙⲣⲏⲟⲩ;
ⲃⲉⲭⲉ «salaire», pl. ⲃⲉⲭⲏⲟⲩ;
ϣⲛⲉ «filet», pl. ϣⲛⲏⲟⲩ;
ϣϫⲉ «sauterelle», pl. ϣϫⲏⲟⲩ.
Suivent cette règle les deux mots: ⲥⲟⲛ «frère», pl. ⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ; ϫⲟⲓ «barque», pl. ⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ.
3. ⲉⲩ (Ṣ. ⲉⲉⲩ) forme le pluriel des noms dérivés en ⲉ (124):
ⲥⲁⲃⲉ «sage», pl. ⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ;
ⲃⲉⲗⲗⲉ «aveugle», pl. ⲃⲉⲗⲗⲉⲩ;
ⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉ «témoin», pl. ⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉⲩ;
ⲑⲉϣⲉ «voisin», pl. ⲑⲉϣⲉⲩ;
ϣⲁϥⲉ «désert», pl. ϣⲁϥⲉⲩ.
2. Noms masculins terminés par une consonne.
Les noms terminés par une consonne forment, en général, leur pluriel par un changement intérieur de voyelles. C'est quelque chose d'analogue au pluriel brisé arabe (الجمع المكسَّر). Les changements se réduisent à quatre principaux:
1. ⲁⲩ dans les mots suivants:
ⲁⲛⲁϣ «serment», pl. ⲁⲛⲁⲩϣ;
ⲥⲛⲁϩ «lien», pl. ⲥⲛⲁⲩϩ;
ⲁⲑⲁϩ «fardeau», pl. ⲁⲑⲁⲩϩ;
ϭⲛⲁϩ «bras», pl. ϭⲛⲁⲩϩ;
ⲙ̀ⲕⲁϩ «douleur, peine», pl. ⲙ̀ⲕⲁⲩϩ;
ⲉⲑⲱϣ «Ethiopien», pl. ⲉⲑⲁⲩϣ;
ϭⲁⲗⲟϫ «pied», pl. ϭⲁⲗⲁⲩϫ.
2. Changement de ⲟ en ⲱ dans les mots terminés par ⲣ et dans plusieurs autres:
ⲁϩⲟ «trésor» (21), pl. ⲁϩⲱⲣ;
ⲟⲩϩⲟⲣ «chien», pl. ⲟⲩϩⲱⲣ;
ϩⲑⲟ «cheval» (21), pl. ϩⲧⲱⲣ;
ϣⲗⲟⲕ «cruche», pl. ϣⲗⲱⲕ;
ϣⲗⲟⲗ «nation», pl. ϣⲗⲱⲗ;
ϩⲃⲟⲥ «habit», pl. ϩⲃⲱⲥ;
ϩϥⲟⲧ «aune», pl. ϩϥⲱⲧ;
ϫⲣⲟϫ «semence», pl. ϫⲣⲱϫ.
3. Les noms terminés en ⲏⲧ, ⲓⲧ forment leur pluriel en ⲁϯ:
ⲃⲏⲧ «palme», pl. ⲃⲁϯ;
ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ «ami, chéri», pl. ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲁϯ;
ⲟⲩⲣⲓⲧ «gardien», pl. ⲟⲩⲣⲁϯ;
ⲣⲉⲙⲏⲧ «dixième partie, dîme», pl. ⲣⲉⲙⲁϯ;
ϩⲁⲗⲏⲧ «oiseau», pl. ϩⲁⲗⲁϯ;
ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ «premier», pl. ϩⲟⲩⲁϯ.
4. Quelques noms changent la voyelle longue en brève et ajoutent ⲓ:
ⲁⲃⲱⲕ «corbeau», pl. ⲁⲃⲟⲕⲓ;
ⲁⲫⲱⲫ «géant», pl. ⲁⲫⲟⲫⲓ;
ϣⲫⲏⲣ «compagnon», pl. ϣⲫⲉⲣⲓ;
ⲓⲱⲧ «père», pl. ⲓⲟϯ;
ⲉϣⲱⲧ «marchand», pl. ⲉϣⲟⲧ;
ⲙⲟⲩⲧ «nerf» (29), pl. ⲙⲟϯ;
ⲙⲉϣϣⲱⲧ «champ», pl. ⲙⲉϣϣⲟϯ;
ⲙ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲧ «mamelle» (29), pl. ⲙ̀ⲛⲟϯ;
ainsi que tous les autres noms en ⲱⲧ. Le mot ϧⲣⲟϯ «enfants» n'a pas conservé son singulier.
2. Pluriels féminins.
La terminaison du pluriel féminin ⲟⲩⲓ (145) peut être précédée des voyelles accentuées ⲱ ⲏ.
1. ⲱⲟⲩⲓ forme le pluriel des noms féminins terminés en ⲱ et en ⲏ:
ⲉⲧⲫⲱ «poids, charge», pl. ⲉⲧⲫⲱⲟⲩⲓ;
ⲉⲣⲙⲏ «larme», pl. ⲉⲣⲙⲱⲟⲩⲓ.
Quelques noms masculins forment leur pluriel de la même manière:
ⲁⲗⲟⲩ «enfant», pl. ⲁⲗⲱⲟⲩⲓ;
ⲣⲉϥϫⲱ «chantre», pl. ⲣⲉϥϫⲱⲟⲩⲓ;
ⲥⲫⲓⲣ «côté», pl. ⲥⲫⲓⲣⲱⲟⲩⲓ;
ⲙⲱⲓⲧ «chemin», pl. ⲙⲓⲧⲱⲟⲩⲓ.
2. ⲏⲟⲩⲓ forme le pluriel des noms féminins en ⲉ:
ⲁⲫⲉ «tête», pl. ⲁⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ;
ⲫⲉ «ciel», pl. ⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ;
ϧⲣⲉ «nourriture, mets», pl. ϧⲣⲏⲟⲩⲓ;
et d'une manière analogue celui des masculins:
ⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ «temple», pl. ⲉⲣⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ;
ϩⲱⲃ «chose», pl. ϩⲃⲏⲟⲩⲓ.
Remarque.
Il est un certain nombre de pluriels qui n'entrent pas dans les modèles qui précèdent. On les apprendra par l'usage. Tels sont:
ϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ plur. de ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ «femme»;
ⲁⲙⲁⲓⲟⲩ plur. de ⲓⲟⲙ «mer».
Remarques pour l'emploi du pluriel.
1. La forme du pluriel est obligatoire pour un certain nombre de mots; on les apprendra par le dictionnaire:
ⲛⲓ-ⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ «les cieux» (et non pas ⲛⲓ-ⲫⲉ).
2. Les autres peuvent garder au pluriel la forme du sing.; ainsi on dit également:
ⲛⲓⲕⲁⲗⲁⲙⲫⲟ et ⲛⲓⲕⲁⲗⲁⲙⲫⲱⲟⲩ «les collines».
Il y a cependant cette différence entre ces deux manières de s'exprimer, que la forme du sing. avec l'article défini pl. indique plutôt plusieurs individus pris séparément, tandis que la forme du pluriel désigne l'espèce, l'ensemble, la collectivité; aussi cette forme prend plus volontiers l'article indéfini ϩⲁⲛ:
ⲛⲓ-ⲥⲁϧ «les scribes» (pris individuellement), ϩⲁⲛ-ⲥⲁϧⲉⲩ «quelques scribes, un certain nombre de scribes».
Noms grecs.
Les noms grecs introduits en copte ne changent pas au pluriel: ⲡⲓⲥⲱⲙⲁ, ⲛⲓⲥⲱⲙⲁ.
Il n'y a d'exception que pour ⲁⲩⲗⲏ «cour» et ⲯⲩⲭⲏ «âme» qui ont parfois un pluriel copte: ⲁⲩⲗⲏⲟⲩ, ⲯⲩⲭⲏⲟⲩ ou ⲯⲩⲭⲱⲟⲩⲓ.
En S. les noms grecs en ⲏ ont parfois un plur. en ⲟⲟⲩⲉ: ⲯⲩⲭⲏ, ⲯⲩⲭⲟⲟⲩⲉ; ⲅⲣⲁⲫⲏ, ⲅⲣⲁⲫⲟⲟⲩⲉ.
7.1 The First Perfect. Verbal inflection in Coptic is commonly, but not solely, of the form: verbal prefix + subject (noun/pronoun) + verb. The infinitive is the main lexical form of the verb and may occur in all of the verbal conjugations. Its uses and further modifications will be dealt with in subsequent lessons. The conjugation known as the First Perfect is the narrative past tense par excellence and corresponds to the English preterite (simple past: I wrote, I wept, I sat down) or, if the context demands, the English perfect (I have written):
| ⲁⲓϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ | I went |
| ⲁⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ | you (m.s.) went |
| ⲁⲣⲉϣⲉ ⲛⲉ | you (f.s.) went |
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ | he went |
| ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ | she went |
| ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ | we went |
| ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (c.pl.) went |
| ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ | they went |
The pronominal elements are for the most part familiar from the possessive prefixes of Lesson 4. In the 1st person singular ⲓ is normal for most of the verbal system (contrast the -ⲁ- of ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ). The pronominal element of the 2nd person feminine exhibits much variation and should be noted carefully for each conjugation introduced: ⲁⲣⲉⲃⲱⲕ and ⲁⲃⲱⲕ are also attested in the First Perfect.
If the subject is nominal, the verbal prefix is ⲁ-:
| ⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man went |
There are two other ways in which nominal subjects may be used in a verbal phrase: (1) they may stand before the verbal unit, which in the First Perfect still requires a pronoun as well:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man went |
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ |
| the woman went |
or (2) they may stand after the verbal unit, again with a pronominal subject, introduced by the element ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man went |
| ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the woman went |
All three constructions are common and differ only in the emphasis accorded the subject. When the verbal prefix is followed by the indefinite article, the resulting ⲁ-ⲟⲩ… may be spelled ⲁⲩ…, as in
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| ⲁⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| a monk went |
7.2 The prepositions ⲉ, ϣⲁ, ⲉϫⲉⲛ are frequent after verbs of motion.
ⲉ indicates motion to or toward a place or person, less commonly motion onto or into:
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲡⲭⲣⲟ. |
| He went to the shore. |
| ⲁⲩⲫⲱⲧ ⲉ ⲧⲉⲕⲕⲗⲏⲥⲓⲁ. |
| They ran to the church. |
| ⲁⲩⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉ ⲡϫⲟⲓ. |
| They got on (or into) the ship. |
Otherwise the preposition ⲉ is very frequent in a general referential sense: "to, for, in regard to," with many other nuances that will be noted in passing.
ϣⲁ indicates motion to, up to; it is used more frequently with persons than places:
| ⲁϥⲫⲱⲧ ϣⲁ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ. |
| He ran to his father. |
| ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ϣⲁ ⲡⲉⲡⲓⲥⲕⲟⲡⲟⲥ. |
| We went to the bishop. |
ⲉϫⲉⲛ indicates motion onto, on:
| ⲁϥⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲱ. |
| He got on the donkey. |
| ⲁⲥϩⲉⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. |
| She fell on the ground. |
ⲉϫⲉⲛ properly denotes motion onto, while ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ denotes static location; the two are sometimes interchanged. The same contrast exists with the less frequent pair ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ (at the entrance of) and ⲉⲣⲉⲛ (to the entrance of).
Several of the prepositions we have already introduced also occur freely with verbs of motion. For example ϩⲓ, ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ (on or along a surface), ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ (behind, after), ⲛⲉⲙ (along with), ϧⲉⲛ (within a circumscribed area), ⲛ̀ⲛⲁϩⲣⲉⲛ (into the presence of), ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ (up to, near). The preposition ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ often has the sense of English "after" in "to go after," i.e. to go to fetch, or "to run after," i.e. to try to overtake. The reader should give particular attention to the use of prepositions with verbs, since these combinations are sometimes quite idiomatic and unpredictable.
Relations des Noms Entr'eux.
1. Lorsqu'un nom commun ou propre est mis en apposition à un nom propre, il le suit avec l'article et sans particule:
ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ ⲡⲓⲣⲉϥϯⲱⲙⲥ «Jean-Baptiste».
ⲏⲣⲱⲇⲏⲥ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ «le roi Hérode»[1].
ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲫϯ «le Seigneur Dieu».
ⲓⲥⲁⲁⲕ ⲡⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ «son fils Isaac»[2].
2. Lorsqu'un nom propre est mis en apposition à un nom commun ou à un pronom, il est ordinairement précédé de ϫⲉ qu'on pourrait traduire par «nommé»:
ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲗⲱⲧ «l'homme nommé Lot»[3].
ⲟⲩϣϣⲏⲛ ϫⲉ ⲥⲁⲃⲉⲕ «un arbre appelé sabek»[4].
Parfois ϫⲉ est supprimé:
ϯⲡⲟⲗⲓⲥ ⲕⲉϥⲧ «la ville de Keft»[5].
Il l'est toujours après les noms qui indiquent des titres honorifiques comme ⲁⲃⲃⲁ, ⲁⲡⲁ, ⲙⲁⲕⲁⲣⲓⲟⲥ; après ⲁⲃⲟⲧ «mois»:
ⲁⲃⲃⲁ ⲇⲁⲛⲓⲏⲗ «l'abbé Daniel».
ⲁⲡⲁ ⲡϣⲱⲓ «l'abbé Bschai».
ⲡⲓⲁⲃⲟⲧ ⲉⲡⲏⲡ «le mois d'Epip»[6].
3. Lorsqu'un nom commun est mis en apposition à un autre nom commun, il est uni à lui comme un adjectif au moyen de ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ 28):
ⲛⲉⲛⲓⲟϯ ⲛ̀ⲁⲡⲟⲥⲧⲟⲗⲟⲥ «nos Pères, les Apôtres».
ⲡⲓⲥⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲁⲭⲟⲥ «le frère moine»[7].
Quelquefois il prend l'article sans ⲛ̀:
ⲛⲉⲕⲉⲃⲓⲁⲓⲕ ⲛⲓⲡⲣⲟⲫⲏⲧⲏⲥ «tes serviteurs, les prophètes»[8].
4. L'apposition d'un nom à un pronom personnel absolu ou affixe se fait au moyen de la particule ϧⲁ:
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϧⲁ ⲡⲓϫⲱⲃ ⲛ̀ⲣⲉϥⲉⲣⲛⲟⲃⲓ «moi, faible pécheur»[9].
ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ⲧⲏⲣⲉⲛ ϧⲁ ⲡⲉⲕⲗⲁⲟⲥ «nous tous, ton peuple»[1].
ⲟⲩⲟⲓ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϧⲁ ⲛⲓⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟⲓ «malheur à vous, riches»[2].
Lorsque le mot mis en apposition est un pronom, voir § 63.
5. Un nom de nombre mis en apposition prend ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
ⲁⲩⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲡⲥⲛⲁⲩ «ils se tinrent debout, tous les deux»[3].
ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲡⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲩⲥⲟⲡ «ils s'en allèrent, tous les deux ensemble»[4].
Nous entendons par annexion (اضافة) le rapport d'un nom à son complément déterminatif. Pour éviter toute équivoque, nous appellerons le premier nom régissant (المضاف) et le second nom régi (المضاف اليه).
L'annexion se faisait en égyptien par la simple addition du nom régi au nom régissant: il nous en est resté quelques exemples dans les noms composés (131).
En dehors de ce cas, l'annexion se fait en copte au moyen des deux particules ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ devant ⲃ ⲙ ⲡ ⲫ ⲯ) et ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ. ⲛ̀ forme l'annexion indéterminée, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ l'annexion déterminée.
1. Emploi de ⲛ̀.
ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀) s'emploie:
1. Quand le nom régi est indéterminé, c-à-d. qu'il n'a pas d'article:
ⲟⲩⲭⲗⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲃ «une couronne d'or»;
ⲟⲩⲭⲗⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲧ «un collier d'argent».
2. Après les locutions prépositives ⲙ̀-ⲫ-ⲣⲏϯ «à la manière de», ⲙ̀-ⲡ-ⲉⲙⲑⲟ «en présence de», ϧⲁ-ⲧ-ϩⲏ «en face de», ϩⲓ-ⲧ-ϩⲏ «devant», etc.
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲙⲑⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «en présence du Seigneur»[1].
ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲥⲁⲣⲁⲑⲏⲟⲩ «comme une tempête»[2].
3. Après les formes avec suffixes des substantifs cités au § 55:
ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ «l'extrémité de la terre»[3].
ϧⲁϫⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲕⲁⲗⲁⲙⲫⲟ «avant les collines»[4].
4. Lorsque le nom régissant a l'article ⲛⲉⲛ:
ⲛⲉⲛⲃⲁⲗ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «les yeux du Seigneur»[5].
2. Emploi de ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ.
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ s'emploie:
1. Entre deux noms propres:
ⲙⲁⲣⲓⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲓⲁⲕⲱⲃⲟⲥ «Marie, (mère) de Jacob»[6].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲕⲁⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ϯⲅⲁⲗⲓⲗⲉⲁ «à Cana de Galilée»[7].
2. Lorsque le nom régissant a l'article fort ⲡⲓ ϯ ⲛⲓ:
ϯϩⲟϯ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «la crainte du Seigneur»[8].
ⲡⲓⲥⲑⲉⲣⲧⲉⲣ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲛⲁϫϩⲓ «le grincement des dents»[9].
3. Quand le nom régissant a l'article indéfini ⲟⲩ ϩⲁⲛ et que le nom régi a un article défini ou indéfini:
ⲟⲩϣϣⲏⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲱⲛϧ «l'arbre de vie»[10].
ⲟⲩⲭⲗⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ϩⲁⲛϩⲙⲟⲧ «une couronne de grâces»[11].
ϩⲁⲛⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲱⲛϧ «des années de vie»[12].
4. Quand le nom régi est séparé du nom régissant par quelque déterminatif:
ⲛⲓⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲥⲱⲣⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲣⲁⲏⲗ «les brebis égarées de la maison d'Israël»[1].
ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲧⲏⲣϥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲭⲏⲙⲓ «toute la terre d'Egypte»[2].
Remarques.
1. Lorsque le nom régissant a l'article faible ⲡ ⲧ, on emploie à volonté ⲛ̀ ou ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ.
2. Lorsqu'il y a plusieurs compléments déterminatifs à la suite, on ne répète pas la préposition de l'annexion:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲙⲑⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ «devant le Seigneur et les hommes»[3].
ϩⲁⲛⲁϩⲱⲣ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲃ ϩⲓ ϩⲁⲧ «des trésors d'or et d'argent»[4].
8.1 Directional adverbs. Coptic possesses a set of directional adverbs which correspond very closely to English adverbs of the type "up, down, in, out, over, along, etc." As with their English counterparts, the directional meanings found with verbs of motion are for all practical purposes the basic meanings (e.g. to go up, to sink down, to run in), but extended uses are equally common (e.g. to shut up, to quiet down, to think over). The Coptic directional adverbs consist formally of the preposition ⲉ plus a noun, with or without the definite article. Most of the nouns in question are seldom met outside of these particular expressions and will be considered in more detail in a later lesson. Because these adverbs are so frequent, we shall follow the practice of other editors and write them as single units. The following eight are the most important:
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | out, away |
| ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ | in |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ | up |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ | down |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ | down |
| ⲉⲧϩⲏ | forward, ahead |
| ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ | back, rearward |
| ⲉⲧⲡⲉ | upward |
| ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ | upward |
The adverbs may be used alone, as in
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. | He went away. |
| ⲁϥⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. | He came in. |
| ⲁϥⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ. | He ran back. |
But they very frequently combine with a simple preposition to form a compound prepositional phrase. Among the most frequent of these are
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉ | out to, away to |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ | out of, out from in, away from; (rarely) out into |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ | same as preceding |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓ | away from on, out from on, away from at |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ | (1) away from (a person); (2) through, out through (a place); (3) through the agency of (a person or thing) |
| ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ | to, into, toward |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ | up to |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ | down to |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | up onto |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | down upon |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉ | down to, down into, down onto, down on |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | down onto, down on |
| ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ ⲉ | back to |
| ⲉⲧϩⲏ ⲉ | ahead to, forward to |
The meaning of most such compounds when used with verbs of motion is generally self-evident, but caution is in order when dealing with their use with other verbs. The dictionary should always be consulted to check on idiomatic and unpredictable meanings.
8.2 Clauses containing a First Perfect may be coordinated with the conjunction ⲟⲩⲟϩ (and) or follow one another with no conjunction (termed "asyndeton"):
| ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ, ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He sat down and wept. |
8.3 Many infinitives are used as masculine singular nouns. This usage will be noted without further comment in the lesson vocabularies from now on ("as n.m.:"). For the infinitives in Vocabulary 7 note the nouns ⲡ.ϣⲗⲏⲗ prayer, ⲡ.ⲫⲱⲧ flight, and ⲡ.ⲣⲓⲙⲓ weeping.
Note: Only the less predictable combinations of verb and prepositional phrase will be given in the lesson vocabularies. Other combinations in the exercises should be self-evident from the meanings of the individual words involved.
Des Adjectifs en Particulier.
La langue copte possède relativement peu d'adjectifs proprement dits, surtout d'adjectifs primitifs. On a vu §§ 124, 125, la formation des adjectifs dérivés; et §§ 135, 137, 141, celle des adjectifs composés.
On supplée au manque d'adjectifs de deux manières:
1. Au moyen de l'annexion (158, 1):
ⲡⲓⲣⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ «le nom salutaire»[1].
ϯⲥⲙⲏ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩϯ «la voix divine»[2].
2. Au moyen du qualitatif des verbes, précédé du relatif ⲉⲧ pour les substantifs déterminés et de l'auxiliaire ⲉ⸗ avec les suffixes (3e présent) pour les substantifs indéterminés:
| Sg. | dét. | ⲡⲓⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲃ | «L'Esprit-Saint»; |
| indét. | ⲟⲩⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ ⲉϥⲟⲩⲁⲃ | «un esprit saint»[3]. | |
| Pl. | dét. | ⲛⲓⲙⲱⲓⲧ ⲉⲧⲥⲟⲩⲧⲱⲛ | «les voies droites»[4]; |
| indét. | ϩⲁⲛⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲉⲩⲥⲟⲩⲧⲱⲛ | «des voies droites»[5]. |
Pour ce qui concerne la détermination, il y a deux remarques à faire:
1. Lorsque le qualitatif est attribut, il a toujours la forme indéterminée:
ⲉϥⲉⲁⲣⲉϩ ⲉ ⲛⲉⲕⲙⲁⲛ̀ϭⲟϫⲓ ⲉⲩ-ⲥⲟⲩⲧⲱⲛ «il gardera tes voies droites»[6].
2. Tout mot suivi de ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ est considéré comme déterminé et demande ⲉⲧ:
ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧ-ⲧⲁⲓⲏⲟⲩⲧ «tout ce qui est précieux»[7].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧ-ϣⲟⲡ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧ-ⲣⲏⲧ ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ «tous ceux qui sont dans les villes et tout ce qui pousse de terre»[8].
Les adjectifs primitifs et dérivés se placent soit avant, soit après le substantif; les adjectifs composés se placent toujours après.
Le mot qui est au premier rang, substantif ou adjectif, reçoit l'article que demande le sens; celui qui est au second rang est toujours uni au premier au moyen de ⲛ̀ et sans article:
ϯⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟ «la ville opulente»;
ϯⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲕⲓ «la grande ville»;
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲉ «l'homme sage (49, 2)»[1].
ϩⲁⲛⲥⲁⲃⲏ ⲛ̀ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ «les femmes sages»[2].
Les adjectifs suivants se placent toujours avant le substantif:
ⲛⲓϣϯ «grand»,
ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ «premier»,
ⲛⲟϫ «grand»,
ϧⲁⲉ «dernier»,
ⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ «petit»,
ⲙⲏϣ «nombreux»,
et les deux adjectifs grecs ⲁⲅⲓⲟⲥ et ⲙⲟⲛⲟⲅⲉⲛⲏⲥ:
ⲛⲉⲕⲁⲅⲓⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ «tes saints disciples»[3].
ⲡⲓⲙⲟⲛⲟⲅⲉⲛⲏⲥ ⲛ̀ϣⲏⲣⲓ «le fils unique».
Quand il y a deux adjectifs, un seul peut précéder le substantif:
ⲟⲩⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲓⲉ «un beau petit enfant»[4];
ⲡⲓⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲃⲱⲕ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲉ «le serviteur fidèle et prudent»[5].
ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ «tout» se place toujours, sans ⲛ̀, après le substantif qui reste au singulier, sans article:
ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ «toute chose», ⲃⲁⲗ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ «tout œil».
Mais pour le mot ⲙⲁ «lieu», le pluriel ⲙⲁⲓ (Nomb. 18, 31) est plus fréquent que le singulier (Gen. 20, 13).
Le verbe et les autres mots qui se rapportent au nom déterminé par ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ se mettent au pluriel:
ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲁⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧϥ «toutes les choses ont été faites par lui»[1].
ⲛⲓϥⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲥⲉⲥⲙⲟⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ «tout esprit te loue»[2].
Cependant on trouve quelquefois le singulier:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲑⲛⲁϭⲁⲥϥ ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲑⲉⲃⲓⲟϥ «quiconque s'élève sera humilié»[3].
Les adjectifs primitifs sont invariables.
Les autres adjectifs qui ont un féminin et un pluriel s'accordent en genre et en nombre avec leur substantif:
ⲟⲩⲥⲁⲃⲏ ⲛ̀ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ «une femme prudente»;
ϩⲁⲛⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «des hommes prudents».
Cependant, quand ils sont attributs, ils restent ordinairement invariables:
ϥⲛⲁⲁⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲛ̀ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟ «il nous rendra riches»[4].
ⲉⲥ-ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲣⲉⲙϩⲉ «elle est libre»[5].
De même, le mot qui est au second rang demeure le plus souvent invariable, parfois aussi il s'accorde:
ϩⲁⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲉ «des hommes prudents»[6].
ϩⲁⲛⲥⲁⲃⲏ ⲛ̀ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ «des femmes prudentes»[7].
A. Comparatif.
Le comparatif d'infériorité «moins» n'existe pas en copte; on ne dit pas «moins grand», mais «plus petit».
Le comparatif de supériorité «plus», pour les adjectifs, verbes et adverbes se rend par ⲉ-, ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ ou bien par:
ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ-, devant un nom;
ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲉ-, ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ (subj.), devant un verbe;
ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗, ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉⲣⲟ⸗, avec les suffixes.
Ex.
ⲉⲛⲁⲁϥ ⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ «plus grand que Jean»[1].
ⲛⲓϣϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ «plus grand que lui»[1].
ⲡⲁⲛⲟⲃⲓ ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲡⲉ ⲉ ⲭⲁϥ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «mon péché est trop grand pour m'être pardonné»[2].
ⲉⲓⲉⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲭⲓⲱⲛ «je deviendrai plus blanc que la neige»[3].
ϥϫⲟⲣ ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉⲣⲟⲓ «il est plus fort que moi»[4].
ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ ⲉⲧⲏⲓⲥ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲉ ⲧⲏⲓⲥ ⲛ̀ⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ «il vaut mieux te la donner à toi que de la donner à un autre»[5].
ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲉⲣⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ ⲉϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲙⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ «mieux vaut être esclaves des Egyptiens que de mourir dans le désert»[6].
Quand le terme de comparaison n'est pas exprimé, on se sert de ⲛ̀-ϩⲟⲩⲟ «davantage» placé après le mot qu'il détermine:
ⲉϥⲥⲟⲧⲡ ⲛ̀ϩⲟⲩⲟ «plus parfait».
B. Superlatif.
1. Le superlatif absolu s'exprime au moyen de ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ «très, beaucoup» ajouté à l'adjectif:
ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ⲣⲁϣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ «une très grande joie»[1].
On trouve aussi ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϣⲱ «très»:
ⲉϥϩⲟⲣϣ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϣⲱ «très lourd»[2].
2. Le superlatif relatif se rend par les particules ϧⲉⲛ, ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲟⲩⲧⲉ «entre, de, parmi» précédées de l'adjectif et suivies du complément:
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «celui qui est le plus petit parmi vous»[3].
ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲟⲩⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲁⲡⲟⲥⲧⲟⲗⲟⲥ «le plus petit des Apôtres»[4].
9.1 Prepositions with pronominal suffixes. A pronominal object of a preposition is expressed by means of a suffixed form of the pronoun. The preposition itself assumes a prepronominal form which must be learned with each preposition. For example, the preposition ⲉ becomes ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ before pronominal suffixes. The mark ⸗ is a convention used in Coptic grammars to indicate any form to which a pronominal suffix is to be added. The prepronominal forms of the prepositions introduced thus far are as follows:
| ⲛ̀ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ |
| ϧⲉⲛ | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ⸗ |
| ϧⲁ | ϧⲁⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ϩⲓ | ϩⲓⲱ(ⲱ)⸗ |
| ⲛⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉⲙⲁ⸗ |
| ϣⲁ | ϣⲁⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ⲉ | ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ | ϩⲓϫⲱ⸗ |
| ⲉϫⲉⲛ | ⲉϫⲱ⸗ |
| ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ | ϩⲓⲧⲟⲟⲧ⸗ |
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ | ⲛ̀ⲥⲱ⸗ |
| ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ | ϩⲓⲣⲱ⸗ |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲛ | ⲉⲣⲱ⸗ |
| ⲛⲁϩⲣⲉⲛ | ⲛⲁϩⲣⲁ⸗ |
| ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ | ϩⲁϩⲧⲏ⸗ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲉ | ⲟⲩⲃⲏ⸗ |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ | ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲏⲧ⸗ |
Because the variety exhibited by the prepronominal forms is at first puzzling, the following comments may be of some help:
The nouns contained in these expressions will be dealt with in a later lesson.
Typical inflections of these prepositions are as follows:
| ⲉⲣⲟⲓ | to me |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲕ | to you (m.s.) |
| ⲉⲣⲟ | to you (f.s.) |
| ⲉⲣⲟϥ | to him |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲥ | to her |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲛ | to us |
| ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ | to you (pl.) |
| ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ | to them |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲏⲓ | with me |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ | etc. |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲉ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲥ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲛ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| ⲛϧⲏⲧ | in me |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏϯ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲥ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲓ | against me |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲕ | etc. |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏϥ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲥ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲛ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲟⲩ |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧ | because of me |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏϯ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲥ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲟⲩ |
The prepronominal form of ϩⲓ appears as ϩⲓⲱⲧ⸗; typical forms are
| ϩⲓⲱⲧ | on me |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ϩⲓⲱϯ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧϥ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲥ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ϩⲓ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲟⲩ |
The following details on the forms of suffixed pronouns in general should be noted for future reference:
Translate the following prepositional phrases. Replace the nominal object with the appropriate pronominal suffix. E.g. ⲉⲧⲃⲉ ⲡⲉⲓϩⲱⲃ → ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ.
De la Numération.
Les nombres sont représentés par les lettres surmontées d'un seul trait jusqu'à mille et de deux à partir de mille.
1. Nombres cardinaux.
1. Les nombres simples.
| Boḥairique | Ṣaꜥidique | ||||
| masc. | fém. | masc. | fém. | ||
| 1 | ⲁ̅ | ⲟⲩⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲓ | ⲟⲩⲁ | ⲟⲩⲉⲓ |
| 2 | ⲃ̅ | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | ⲃ̅ϯ ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | ⲥⲉⲛⲧⲉ |
| 3 | ⲅ̅ | ϣⲟⲙⲧ | ⲅ̅ϯ ϣⲟⲙϯ | ϣⲟⲙⲛⲧ | ϣⲟⲙⲧⲉ |
| 4 | ⲇ̅ | ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ, ϥⲧⲟⲩ- | ϥⲧⲟⲟⲩ | ϥⲧⲟⲉ, ϥⲧⲟ | |
| 5 | ⲉ̅ | ϯⲟⲩ | ϯⲟⲩ | ϯⲉ | |
| 6 | ⲋ̅ | ⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ⲥⲟⲉ, ⲥⲟ | |
| 7 | ⲍ̅ | ϣⲁϣϥ | ⲍ̅ϯ ϣⲁϣϥⲓ | ⲥⲁϣϥ | ⲥⲁϣϥⲉ |
| 8 | ⲏ̅ | ϣⲙⲏⲛ | ⲏ̅ϯ ϣⲙⲏⲛⲓ | ϣⲙⲟⲩⲛ | ϣⲙⲟⲩⲛⲉ |
| 9 | ⲑ̅ | ⲯⲓⲧ | ⲑ̅ϯ ⲯⲓϯ | ⲯⲓⲥ | ⲯⲓⲧⲉ |
| 10 | ⲓ̅ | ⲙⲏⲧ, ⲙⲉⲧ- | ⲓ̅ϯ ⲙⲏϯ | ⲙⲏⲧ | ⲙⲏⲧⲉ |
| 20 | ⲕ̅ | ϫⲱⲧ | ⲕ̅ϯ ϫⲱϯ | ϫⲟⲩⲱⲧ | ϫⲟⲩⲱⲧⲉ |
| 30 | ⲗ̅ | ⲙⲁⲡ, ⲙⲁⲃ | ⲙⲁⲁⲃ | ||
| 40 | ⲙ̅ | ϩⲙⲉ | ϩⲙⲏ, ϩⲙⲉ | ||
| 50 | ⲛ̅ | ⲧⲉⲟⲩⲓ, ⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ | ⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ | ||
| 60 | ⲝ̅ | ⲥⲉ | ⲥⲉ | ||
| 70 | ⲟ̅ | ϣⲃⲉ, ϣϥⲉ | ϣⲃⲉ, ϣϥⲉ | ||
| 80 | ⲡ̅ | ϧⲁⲙⲛⲉ | ϩⲙⲉⲛⲉ | ||
| 90 | ϥ̅ | ⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲟⲩⲓ | ⲡⲉⲥⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ | ||
| 100 | ⲣ̅ | ϣⲉ | ϣⲉ | ||
| 200 | ⲥ̅ | ϣⲏⲓ | ϣⲏⲧ | ||
| 1000 | ⲁ̿ | ϣⲟ | ϣⲟ | ||
| 10000 | ⲓ̿ | ⲑⲃⲁ | ⲧⲃⲁ |
2. Les nombres composés.
Dizaines.
De 11 à 100 on forme les nombres en ajoutant les unités aux dizaines:
| 11 | ⲓ̅ⲁ̅ | ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ |
| 12 | ⲓ̅ⲃ̅ | ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲥⲛⲁⲩ |
| 23 | ⲕ̅ⲅ̅ | ϫⲱⲧ-ϣⲟⲙⲧ |
| 34 | ⲗ̅ⲇ̅ | ⲙⲁⲡ-ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ |
| 45 | ⲙ̅ⲉ̅ | ϩⲙⲉ-ϯⲟⲩ |
| 89 | ⲡ̅ⲑ̅ | ϧⲁⲙⲛⲉ-ⲯⲓⲧ |
etc.
Centaines et mille.
On forme les centaines et les mille en plaçant les unités devant ϣⲉ 100 et ϣⲟ 1000 au moyen de ⲛ̀.
ⲥⲛⲁⲩ se met généralement après, sans ⲛ̀:
| 200 | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀-ϣⲉ, ⲃ̅ϣⲉ, ϣⲉⲥⲛⲁⲩ. |
Pour 200 on peut aussi employer un mot spécial ϣⲏⲓ qui est comme le duel de ϣⲉ.
| 300 | ⲧ̅ | ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 400 | ⲩ̅ | ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 500 | ⲫ̅ | ϯⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 600 | ⲭ̅ | ⲥⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 700 | ⲯ̅ | ϣⲁϣϥ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 800 | ⲱ̅ | ϣⲙⲏⲛ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 900 | ⳁ̅[1] | ⲯⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ |
| 2000 | ⲃ̿ | ⲃ̅ϣⲟ, ϣⲟ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ |
| 3000 | ⲅ̿ | ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ϣⲟ |
etc.
Remarque.
Les mille peuvent aussi s'exprimer au moyen des centaines précédées des dizaines et unies par ⲛ̀:
| 2000 | ϫⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ | (vingt cents) |
| 1100 | ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ | «onze cents» |
| 1200 | ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϣⲉ | «douze cents» |
etc.
Myriades et au-delà.
Pour exprimer les 10000, on emploie ⲑⲃⲁ «myriade»; au delà, on suit la marche ordinaire.
ⲥⲛⲁⲩ se met toujours après:
| 20000 | ⲑⲃⲁ-ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | «2 myriades» |
| 30000 | ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ⲑⲃⲁ | «3 myriades» |
| 40000 | ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲑⲃⲁ | «4 myriades» |
| 100000 | ⲣ̅ⲁ̿ | |
| 1000000 | ⲁ̿ⲁ̿ |
3. Syntaxe.
Le nom de la chose nombrée se joint au nom de nombre au moyen de ⲛ̀, il reste au singulier. Le déterminatif qui précède, (article, adjectif, pronom) reste de même au singulier, masculin avec un nom masc. et féminin avec un nom féminin:
ⲡⲓ-ⲧⲉⲃⲧ ⲃ̅ «les deux poissons»[1].
ⲧⲁⲓ-ⲉⲛⲧⲟⲗⲏ ⲃ̅ϯ «ces deux préceptes»[2].
ⲡⲓ-ⲙⲉⲧ-ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ «les 12 disciples».
ϯ-ⲙⲏϯ ⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲕⲓ «les 10 villes»[3].
ⲡⲓ-ϥⲧⲟⲩⲗⲁⲕϩ «les quatre angles».
ⲡⲓ-ϥⲧⲟⲩⲑⲏⲟⲩ «les quatre vents».
Le verbe auquel ces mots servent de sujet se met au pluriel:
ⲁⲩⲓ ϩⲁⲣⲟϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ «les douze vinrent vers lui»[1].
2. Nombres distributifs.
Les nombres cardinaux redoublés forment les distributifs:
| ⲁ̅ⲁ̅ | ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲁⲓ | «un à un»[2]; |
| ⲃ̅ⲃ̅ | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | «deux à deux»; |
| ⲅ̅ⲅ̅ | ϣⲟⲙⲧ ϣⲟⲙⲧ | «trois à trois»; |
| ⲣ̅ⲣ̅ | ϣⲉ ϣⲉ | «cent à cent». |
ⲁⲩⲣⲱⲧⲉⲃ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁ ⲙⲁ ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲣ̅ⲣ̅ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲛ̅ⲛ̅ «ils prirent place par groupes de 100 et de 50»[3].
De même on répète deux fois, sans article, les noms qu'on veut employer dans un sens distributif:
ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ «par homme»;
ϯϧⲉⲗⲗⲟⲧ ⲇⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ϣⲱϯ ϣⲱϯ «la vallée était percée de puits»[4].
Nombres périodiques.
Ils s'expriment par les nombres distributifs joints au substantif au moyen de (ⲛ̀):
ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «tous les deux jours».
3. Nombres ordinaux.
Ils se forment par l'addition du préfixe ⲙⲁϩ- aux nombres cardinaux; ils se mettent avant ou après le substantif avec ⲛ̀:
ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϩϣⲟⲙⲧ «le troisième jour»[1].
ⲡⲓⲙⲁϩϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ idem[2].
ϯⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ «la deuxième année»[3].
ⲟⲩⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲙ̀ⲫⲉ «le deuxième ciel»[4].
Remarques.
1. ⲥⲛⲁⲩ est quelquefois séparé de ⲙⲁϩ par le substantif:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲥⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲁⲃⲟⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲁⲩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲙⲁϩⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ «le premier jour du second mois, la deuxième année»[5].
2. «Premier» se dit ϣⲟⲣⲡ, fém. ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ, qui se place toujours avant le substantif, et ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ, fém. ϩⲟⲩⲓϯ, qui se met avant ou après:
ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ «le premier jour»[6].
ⲡⲓϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ⲁⲃⲟⲧ «le premier mois»[7].
ϣⲟⲣⲡ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲧⲁϩ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ «tout premier fruit»[8].
4. Nombres fractionnaires.
«Demi» se traduit par ⲫⲁϣⲓ, de ⲫⲱϣ «diviser», ou par ϫⲟⲥ, ϫⲉⲥ-. Ce dernier mot prend toujours l'article indéfini ⲟⲩ. Quand le substantif est seul, ϫⲟⲥ se place après lui:
ⲟⲩⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲟⲩϫⲟⲥ «une coudée et demie»[9].
Quand il y a un autre nombre, ϫⲟⲥ se place entre ce nombre et le substantif, excepté avec ⲥⲛⲁⲩ qui suit immédiatement le substantif:
ϣⲟⲙϯ ⲟⲩϫⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ «trois années et demie»[10];
ⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲟⲩϫⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ϣⲓⲏ «deux coudées et demie de longueur»[1].
La forme abrégée ϫⲉⲥ- ne s'emploie que dans quelques mots composés: ϫⲉⲥ-ⲕⲓϯ «demi-drachme».
Les fractions supérieures à «demi» se forment au moyen du préfixe ⲣⲉ:
ⲣⲉϣⲟⲙⲧ «un tiers»,
ⲣⲉϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ «un quart»,
ⲣⲉϯⲟⲩ «un cinquième»,
ⲣⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ «un sixième»,
ⲣⲉϣⲁϣϥ «un septième»,
ⲣⲉϣⲙⲏⲛ «un huitième»,
ⲣⲉⲯⲓⲧ «un neuvième»,
ⲣⲉⲙⲏⲧ «un dixième».
Ex:
ⲫⲣⲉϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩϩⲓⲛ «le tiers d'un hin»[2].
On trouve aussi, mais rarement, comme préfixe fractionnaire ⲧⲉⲣⲉ, ex. ⲡⲓⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ «le quart»[3], et ⲟⲩⲉⲛ- dont la forme pleine ⲟⲩⲱⲛ n'est employée qu'en Ṣaꜥidique: ⲡⲓⲟⲩⲉⲛ-ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ «la quatrième partie»[4].
L'année (ϯⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ) qui commence le 29 août[5] est composée de 12 mois (ⲁⲃⲟⲧ) chacun de 30 jours. Elle est augmentée de 5 jours complémentaires (6 dans l'année bissextile) qui forment le petit mois (ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ⲁⲃⲟⲧ).
Voici les noms des mois:
| Boḥairique. | Ṣaꜥidique. | |
|---|---|---|
| ⲑⲱⲟⲩⲧ | ⲑⲟⲟⲩⲧ, ⲑⲁⲩⲧ | توت |
| ⲡⲁⲟⲡⲓ | ⲡⲁⲁⲡⲉ, ⲡⲟⲟⲡⲉ | بابه |
| ⲁⲑⲱⲣ | ϩⲁⲧⲱⲣ | هتور |
| ⲭⲟⲓⲁⲕ | ⲕⲓⲁϩⲕ, ⲭⲟⲓⲁϩⲕ | كيهك |
| ⲧⲱⲃⲓ | ⲧⲱⲃⲉ | طوبه |
| ⲙⲉⲭⲓⲣ | ⲙ̄ϣⲓⲣ | امشير |
| ⲫⲁⲙⲉⲛⲱⲑ | ⲡⲁⲣⲙϩⲁⲧ | برمهات |
| ⲫⲁⲣⲙⲟⲩⲑⲓ | ⲡⲁⲣⲙⲟⲩⲧⲉ | برموده |
| ⲡⲁⲭⲱⲛ, ⲡⲁϣⲟⲛⲥ | ⲡⲁϣⲟⲛⲥ | بشنس |
| ⲡⲁⲱⲛⲓ | ⲡⲁⲱⲛⲉ, ⲡⲁⲁⲛⲉ | بؤونه |
| ⲉⲡⲏⲡ | ⲉⲡⲉⲡ | ابيب |
| ⲙⲉⲥⲱⲣⲏ | ⲙⲉⲥⲱⲣⲏ | مسرى |
| ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ⲁⲃⲟⲧ | خمسة ايام النسي |
Pour indiquer le quantième du mois, on se sert des nombres cardinaux précédés de ⲥⲟⲩ:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲥⲟⲩⲓ̅ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲁⲃⲟⲩⲧ «le 10 du mois»[1].
ⲛ̀ⲥⲟⲩⲓ̅ⲇ̅ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲁⲃⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ «le 14 du premier mois»[2].
Remarque.
Le premier du mois se dit ⲥⲟⲩⲁⲓ pour ⲥⲟⲩⲟⲩⲁⲓ:
ⲛ̀ⲥⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲁⲃⲟⲧ «au premier jour du mois»[3].
Le jours de la semaine (ϯⲉⲃⲇⲟⲙⲁⲥ) sont:
| ϯⲕⲩⲣⲓⲁⲕⲏ | الاحد | dimanche, |
| ⲡⲓⲃ̅ | الاثنين | lundi, |
| ⲡⲓⲅ̅ | الثلاثاء | mardi, |
| ⲡⲓⲇ̅ | الاربعاء | mercredi, |
| ⲡⲓⲉ̅ | الخميس | jeudi, |
| ϯⲡⲁⲣⲁⲥⲕⲉⲩⲏ | الجممة | vendredi, |
| ⲡⲓⲥⲁⲃⲃⲁⲧⲟⲛ | السبت | samedi. |
Ces noms peuvent aussi être précédés du mot ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «jour»:
| ⲡⲓ-ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲕⲩⲣⲓⲁⲕⲟⲛ | يوم الاحد |
| ⲡ-ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲡ-ⲃ̅ | يوم الاثنين |
Dans la table des Théotokies les jours sont encore désignés par les adjectifs ordinaux:
| ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϩⲃ̅ | le deuxième jour, |
| ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁϩⲅ̅ | le troisième jour. |
Le copte a trois termes pour dire «heure»:
1. ⲁϫⲡ (ϯ), forme non accentuée, toujours suivie d'un nombre:
| ϯⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲁϫⲡⲅ̅ϯ | «la prière de tierce»[1]; |
| ϯⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲁϫⲡⲋ̅ | «la prière de sexte»[2]; |
| ϯⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲁϫⲡⲑ̅ϯ | «la prière de none»[3]. |
2. ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ (ϯ), forme pleine:
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲁϫⲡⲍ̅ϯ ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁϥ | «hier à 7 heures» (littér. à l'heure de 7 h.)[4]. |
3. ⲛⲁⲩ «moment, temps» qui correspond au français «environ, vers»:
| ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲁⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲉⲣⲓ | «vers midi». |
| ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲁϫⲡⲑ̅ϯ | «vers neuf heures».[5] |
| ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲣⲟⲩϩⲓ | «vers le soir».[6] |
10.1 The Direct Object. The direct object of a transitive verb is usually introduced with the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗):
| ⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲏⲓ. |
| He built a house. |
| ⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ. |
| He built it. |
Many verbs, especially those denoting perception, employ ⲉ:
| ⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϧⲣⲱⲟⲩ. |
| We heard his voice. |
| ⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| We heard it. |
Occasionally other prepositions assume this function, as for example ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ in
| ⲁϥϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He looked for his wife. |
| ⲁϥϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲥ. |
| He looked for her. |
The appropriate preposition for each transitive verb will be given in the lesson vocabularies when a verb is introduced.
10.2 The Indirect Object (Dative). An indirect object, if present, is introduced with the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲛⲁ⸗, inflected like ⲛⲉⲙⲁ⸗ in §9.1):
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲙ̀ ⲡϫⲱⲙ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ. |
| I gave the book to the man. |
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲛⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡϫⲱⲙ. |
| I gave him the book. |
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| I gave it to him. |
It is unfortunate that the prenominal forms of the most frequent direct and indirect object markers are the same (ⲛ̀, ⲙ̀ before ⲡ and ⲙ). In general the direct object precedes the indirect object unless the direct object is nominal and the indirect object is pronominal. In the latter case either order is correct, but there is a preference for placing the indirect object first. The preposition ⲉ (ⲉⲣⲟ⸗) also often marks what Greek and English regard as an indirect object (dative).
10.3 The Negative of the First Perfect. The negative forms of the First Perfect are not formally related to the positive forms:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ | I did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ | you (m.s.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϣⲉ ⲛⲉ | you (f.s.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ | he did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ | she did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ | we did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (pl.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ | they did not go |
With a nominal subject: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ the man did not go.
Variant spellings such as ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕ-, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥ-, and ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛ- are not uncommon.
10.4 As noted in Lesson 9, many prepositions consist of a simple preposition compounded with a noun. The nouns occurring in these expressions belong to a special group which take pronominal suffixes to indicate possession. We shall deal with the more important of these individually in later lessons, but for the moment note ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, the pre-suffixal form of ⲧⲱⲣⲓ (hand). The absolute form ⲧⲱⲣⲓ survives only in the special meanings "handle, tool, spade" and in some compound verbal expressions (see Glossary); in the sense of "hand" it has been replaced by ϫⲓϫ. Prepositions compounded with ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, such as ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ⲉⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, often employ a construction with an anticipatory pronominal object before the real nominal object, the latter being introduced by the particle ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
| ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| by (through the agency of) the king |
| ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ |
| to (into the hands of) his brothers |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| from (from the hand of) his wife |
This same construction is also occasionally found with the other prepositions introduced thus far.
Des Verbes en Eux-Mêmes.
On distingue dans le verbe copte deux formes importantes: l'infinitif et le qualitatif.
A. Infinitif.
1. Sens.
L'infinitif est la forme primitive, il indique toujours une action.
Dans les verbes transitifs, il désigne une action qui peut être exercée de deux manières.
Elle peut passer à un autre objet (sens actif), ou bien rester dans le sujet même qui agit (sens neutre).
ⲟⲩⲱⲛ signifie «ouvrir» et «s'ouvrir»,
ⲑⲱⲟⲩϯ «réunir» et «se réunir».
Dans le premier cas ces verbes ont un complément direct; dans le second cas, le complément direct devient sujet:
ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲣⲟ «il ouvrit la porte»; ⲁ ⲡⲓⲣⲟ ⲟⲩⲱⲛ «la porte s'ouvrit»[1].
ⲁϥⲑⲱⲟⲩϯ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲟⲩ «il réunit l'eau»;
ⲁϥⲑⲱⲟⲩϯ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲟⲩ «l'eau se réunit»[1].
Dans les verbes intransitifs, l'infinitif indique une action qui reste dans le sujet lui-même; dans les verbes qualitatifs, l'action d'acquérir la qualité exprimée par la racine;
ⲁⲓⲁⲓ «croître»,
ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ «devenir blanc»,
ϣⲱⲡⲓ «devenir»,
ϩⲗⲟϫ «devenir doux».
2. Genre.
L'infinitif en égyptien était traité comme un nom, il était masculin ou féminin; il y a lieu en copte de faire la même distinction.
L'infinitif masculin est le radical verbal sans aucune addition: ⲃⲱⲗ «délier», ⲫⲱⲣϣ «étendre».
L'infinitif féminin est le radical augmenté de la terminaison du féminin ⲓ (ég. it): ⲙⲓⲥⲓ «enfanter», ⲓⲣⲓ «faire» (22).
Mais il importe de remarquer que, par suite de la chute d'une consonne finale (21, 22), plusieurs infinitifs masculins sont aussi terminés en ⲓ, par exemple: ϣⲱⲡⲓ «être» (21), ⲣⲱϧⲓ «laver» (22).
On distingue les infinitifs féminins surtout par leur voyelle formative (196). D'ailleurs ils sont tous compris dans le 4e groupe des verbes simples (204, 218) et dans le premier groupe des verbes causatifs formés du préfixe ⲥ (223, 1).
3. Formes.
Selon le mode d'adjonction de son complément direct, l'infinitif des verbes transitifs peut avoir les trois formes expliquées aux §§ 33–40:
1. La forme pleine à l'état absolu: ⲁϥⲥⲱ́ⲛⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲣⲱ́ⲙⲓ «il créa l'homme».
2. La forme abrégée à l'état construit: ⲁϥⲥⲉⲛⲧ-ⲡⲓⲣⲱ́ⲙⲓ.
3. La forme avec suffixes à l'état pronominal: ⲁϥⲥⲟ́ⲛⲧϥ «il le créa».
Les infinitifs masculins (193) ont pour voyelle formative, à l'état absolu, o long ou bref: ⲱ dans les monosyllabes et les syllabes ouvertes: ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲫⲱ-ⲣϣ «étendre», ⲥⲱ-ⲧⲉⲙ «écouter»;
ⲟ dans les syllabes fermées quand le verbe est polysyllabique: ⲥⲟⲃ-ϯ «préparer», ⲃⲟⲣ-ⲃⲉⲣ «chasser».
Dans les infinitifs féminins (194), la voyelle formative est en général ⲓ, quelquefois ⲁ ou ⲉ: ⲙⲓⲥⲓ, ⲓⲣⲓ, ⲣⲁϣⲓ «se réjouir», ⲫⲉⲣⲓ «briller».
A l'état construit, le verbe ne portant pas l'accent tonique, la voyelle formative est remplacée par la voyelle auxiliaire ⲉ (19): ⲃⲉⲗ-, ⲫⲉⲣϣ-, ⲥⲉⲧⲉⲙ-, ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲉ-, ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲉⲣ-.
A l'état pronominal, les infinitifs masculins ont, comme à l'état absolu, o pour voyelle formative, mais avec la quantité opposée:
Les infinitifs en ⲱ prennent ⲟ: ⲃⲟⲗ⸗, ⲫⲟⲣϣ⸗, ⲥⲟⲑⲙ⸗ (23).
Les infinitifs en ⲟ prennent ⲱ à la syllabe suivante (14): ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ⸗, ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣ⸗.
Dans les infinitifs féminins, si le verbe est polysyllabique, ⲓ se change régulièrement en ⲁ; s'il est monosyllabique, ⲓ se maintient et est suivi de ⲧ (220): ⲙⲁⲥ⸗, ⲁⲓ⸗, (27); ϣⲓ ϣⲓⲧ⸗ «mesurer».
Les verbes qui ont une voyelle formative autre que ⲓ sont presque tous intransitifs (219, 220).
Diverses influences peuvent faire subir à ces règles générales des exceptions (29–33); elles seront indiquées dans la classification des verbes et plus en détail dans le tableau général.
Pour la suffixation au verbe, voir 280 et suivants.
B. Qualitatif.
Le qualitatif est une forme spéciale du verbe, qui ressemble à l'infinitif comme emploi et indétermination du temps, mais en diffère considérablement par le sens. Tandis que l'infinitif indique toujours une action, le qualitatif désigne le résultat de cette action, l'effet produit par elle, l'état, la manière d'être, la qualité où elle aboutit et se termine; de là précisément dérive son nom.
Le qualitatif existe dans les verbes transitifs et intransitifs. Dans les verbes transitifs, il a le sens passif:
ⲃⲱⲗ «délier», qual. ⲃⲏⲗ «être délié»;
ϭⲓⲥⲓ «exalter», qual. ϭⲟⲥⲓ «être exalté». En français, pour plus de commodité, nous traduisons le qualitatif des verbes transitifs par l'infinitif passif, mais il faut remarquer que le sens est assez différent. ⲃⲏⲗ signifie proprement «état ou qualité de ce qui est délié», sans importer l'idée d'une action subie actuellement par ce qui est délié. De même pour ϭⲟⲥⲓ, etc.
Dans les verbes intransitifs, le qualitatif garde le sens neutre:
ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ «devenir blanc», qual. ⲟⲩⲟⲃϣ «être blanc»;
ⲁϣⲁⲓ «se multiplier», qual. ⲟϣ «être abondant».
Le qualitatif se forme de l'infinitif par un changement intérieur de voyelle ou par l'addition d'une terminaison (207 et suivants). Il se conjugue comme l'infinitif à l'indicatif présent et à l'imparfait.
Dans quelques verbes transitifs, le qualitatif a, à peu près, le sens de l'infinitif qui a disparu ou est peu employé. Tels sont:
ⲕⲏⲛ «cesser», au lieu de ⲕⲱⲛ inusité;
ⲓⲏⲥ «se hâter», à côté de ⲓⲱⲥ plus rare.
Tous les verbes n'ont pas nécessairement un qualitatif; celui-ci manque dans quelques verbes transitifs et intransitifs, comme dans ϫⲱ «dire», ⲙⲟⲥϯ «haïr», ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ «lever », ⲙⲉⲩⲓ «penser», ⲛⲁⲩ «voir».
Les verbes qui n'ont que l'infinitif absolu, sans les autres formes et sans le qualitatif, sont appelés verbes invariables; les autres, verbes variables.
Au point de vue de l'étymologie et de la formation, les verbes se divisent en simples, causatifs et composés.
Les verbes simples sont formés de la racine elle-même: ⲃⲱⲗ «délier», ⲱⲛϧ «vivre».
Les verbes causatifs sont formés de la racine et d'un préfixe qui lui donne le sens causatif: ⲧ-ⲁⲛϧⲟ «vivifier».
Les verbes composés sont formés de deux racines: ϣⲉⲡ-ϩⲙⲟⲧ «rendre grâce».
A. Verbes simples.
Division d'après les radicales.
Sous le rapport du nombre et de la nature des lettres radicales, les verbes simples se divisent en 8 classes:
1. Verbes de 2 radicales: ⲃⲱⲗ.
2. Verbes à seconde radicale géminée: ϧⲙⲟⲙ.
3. Verbes de 3 radicales: ⲫⲱⲣϣ.
4. Verbes à troisième radicale faible: ⲙⲓⲥⲓ (msy).
5. Verbes de 4 radicales: ⲃⲟⲣⲃⲉⲣ.
6. Verbes de 5 radicales: ⲥⲕⲟⲣⲕⲉⲣ.
7. Verbes à troisième radicale géminée: ⲥⲟⲃϯ (spdd).
8. Verbes à troisième radicale faible: ⲙⲟⲥϯ (msdy).
Plusieurs verbes coptes ont perdu une ou deux des radicales qu'ils avaient en égyptien, par ex. ϣⲱⲡⲓ, ég. ḫpr «être», ⲭⲱ, ég. ḫaꜥ «placer». Au point de vue de la morphologie, quelques-uns de ces verbes se comportent comme s'ils avaient toutes leurs radicales, les autres suivent la règle de la nouvelle classe à laquelle ils appartiennent en copte.
Dans la classification suivante, nous donnons les règles générales en indiquant les principales exceptions, on trouvera les autres au tableau général des verbes.
1. Verbes de deux radicales.
Règle:
| Infinitif | Qualitatif | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| absolu | construit | pronominal | ||
| ⲱ | ⲉ | ⲟ | ⲏ | |
| ⲃⲱⲗ | ⲃⲉⲗ- | ⲃⲟⲗ⸗ | ⲃⲏⲗ | délier, |
| ⲱⲡ | ⲉⲡ- | ⲟⲡ⸗ | ⲏⲡ | compter. |
De même les verbes qui commencent par ⲙ ⲛ et ont ⲟⲩ à la place de ⲱ pour voyelle formative à l'infinitif absolu (29):
ⲙⲟⲩⲛ rester,
ⲙⲟⲩⲣ lier,
ⲛⲟⲩⲧ moudre,
ⲛⲟⲩϫ jeter.
Quelques verbes de deux radicales ont un double infinitif, un de la forme ⲃⲱⲗ et un autre terminé en ⲓ; tels sont:
| ⲥⲱⲕ | ⲥⲱⲕⲓ | ⲥⲉⲕ- | ⲥⲟⲕ⸗ | ⲥⲏⲕ | pousser, |
| ⲥⲱⲥ | ⲥⲱⲥⲓ | — | ⲥⲟⲥ⸗ | — | renverser, |
| ⲱⲗ | ⲱⲗⲓ | ⲉⲗ- | ⲟⲗ⸗ | — | enlever, |
| ϣⲱⲕ | ϣⲱⲕⲓ | ϣⲉⲕ- | ϣⲟⲕ⸗ | ϣⲏⲕ | creuser, |
| ϥⲱⲧ | ϥⲱϯ | ϥⲉⲧ- | ϥⲟⲧ⸗ | ϥⲏϯ | effacer, |
| ϫⲱϫ | ϫⲱϫⲓ | ϫⲉϫ- | ϫⲟϫ⸗ | ϫⲏϫ ϫⲏϫⲓ | couper, |
| ϭⲱⲡ | ϭⲱⲡⲓ | ϭⲉⲡ- | ϭⲟⲡ⸗ | ϭⲏⲡ | saisir, |
| ⲓⲱ | ⲓⲱⲓ | ⲓⲁ- | ⲓⲁ⸗ (31) | (ⲓⲱⲟⲩ) | laver. |
Parmi les verbes qui n'ont qu'un infinitif de la forme ⲥⲱⲕⲓ terminée en ⲓ, avec ⲱ pour voyelle formative, quatre ont leur qualitatif en ⲟ et appartiennent à la 3e classe (213, 3), les autres l'ont en ⲏ ou n'en ont point; les voici:
| ⲕⲱϯ | ⲕⲉⲧ- | ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ | — | retourner, |
| ⲗⲱϫⲓ | — | ⲗⲟϫ⸗ | — | guérir, |
| ⲣⲱϣⲓ | ⲣⲉϣ- ⲣⲁϣ- | ⲣⲁϣ⸗ (30) | — | suffire, |
| ⲣⲱϧⲓ | — | ⲣⲁϧ (30) | — | laver, |
| ⲥⲱϧⲓ | — | ⲥⲁϧ⸗ (30) | ⲥⲏϧ ⲥⲏϧⲓ | tisser, |
| ⲥⲱϯ | ⲥⲉⲧ- | ⲥⲟⲧ⸗ | — | sauver, |
| ⲧⲱϫⲓ | — | ⲧⲟϫ⸗ | — | planter, |
| ⲫⲱϫⲓ | — | — | — | rompre, |
| ⲱϥⲓ | — | ⲟϥ⸗ | — | dompter, |
| ϥⲱϫⲓ | ϥⲉϫ- | ϥⲟϫ⸗ | ϥⲏϫ | arracher, |
| ϩⲱⲙⲓ | ϩⲉⲙ- | ϩⲟⲙ⸗ | ϩⲏⲙ | fouler. |
Pour les verbes de la forme ⲃⲱⲗ qui ont leur qualitatif en ⲟ, voir 213, 2.
Exceptions.
Dans les verbes terminés par ϣ ϧ ϩ (30):
1. Devant ϣ, parfois ⲉ et généralement ⲟ se changent en ⲁ:
| ⲃⲱϣ | ⲃⲁϣ- | ⲃⲁϣ⸗ | ⲃⲏϣ | dépouiller, |
| ⲑⲱϣ | ⲑⲉϣ- | ⲑⲁϣ⸗ | ⲑⲏϣ | définir, |
| ⲕⲱϣ | ⲕⲁϣ- | ⲕⲁϣ⸗ | — | briser. |
2. Devant ϧ, ⲟ se change toujours en ⲁ, ⲉ rarement:
| ⲑⲱϧ | ⲑⲉϧ- | ⲑⲁϧ⸗ | ⲑⲏϧ | mêler, |
| ⲫⲱϧ | ⲫⲉϧ- | ⲫⲁϧ⸗ | ⲫⲏϧ | mettre en pièces, |
| ϧⲱϧ | ϧⲁϧ- | ϧⲁϧ⸗ | — | démanger. |
Comparez aussi ⲣⲱϧⲓ, ⲥⲱϧⲓ (209).
3. Devant ϩ, ⲱ = ⲟ, ⲉ = ⲁ le plus souvent, ⲟ = ⲁ, ⲏ = ⲉ.
| ⲑⲟϩ | — | — | ⲑⲉϩ | troubler, |
| ⲙⲟϩ | ⲙⲁϩ- | ⲙⲁϩ⸗ | ⲙⲉϩ | remplir, |
| ⲛⲟϩ | ⲛⲉϩ- | ⲛⲁϩ⸗ | ⲛⲉϩ | secouer, |
| ⲟⲩⲟϩ | ⲟⲩⲁϩ- | ⲟⲩⲁϩ⸗ | ⲟⲩⲉϩ | ajouter, |
| ⲫⲟϩ | — | — | ⲫⲉϩ | parvenir, |
| ⲭⲟϩ | — | — | — | envier, |
| ϭⲟⲥ | — | — | ϭⲉⲥ | atteindre. |
2. Verbes à seconde radicale géminée.
Le redoublement ne paraît que lorsque les deux consonnes semblables sont séparées par la voyelle formative; tous les verbes de cette classe sont intransitifs.
Régle:
| ⲟ | — | — | ⲏ | |
| ϧⲙⲟⲙ | ϧⲏⲙ | s'échauffer. |
Tels sont:
ⲭⲙⲟⲙ, qual. ⲭⲏⲙ noircir,
ⲭⲃⲟⲃ, qual. ⲕⲏⲃ (23) se refroidir,
ϭⲛⲟⲛ, qual. ϫⲏⲛ (23) devenir tendre.
3. Verbes de trois radicales.
1. Parmi ces verbes, les uns ont la voyelle formative après la première radicale; ce sont les verbes transitifs:
Règle:
| ⲱ | ⲉ | ⲟ | ⲟ | |
| ⲫⲱⲣϣ | ⲫⲉⲣϣ- | ⲫⲟⲣϣ⸗ | ⲫⲟⲣϣ | étendre |
| ⲱⲧⲡ | ⲉⲧⲡ- | ⲟⲧⲡ⸗ | ⲟⲧⲡ | charger. |
De même:
1. Les verbes qui commencent par ⲙ ⲛ (29):
| ⲙⲟⲩⲛⲕ | ⲙⲉⲛⲕ- | ⲙⲟⲛⲕ⸗ | ⲙⲟⲛⲕ | former, |
| ⲛⲟⲩⲧϥ | ⲛⲉⲧϥ- | — | — | arranger. |
2. Deux verbes bilitères en copte qui étaient trilitères en égyptien:
| ⲥⲱϥ | ⲥⲉϥ- | ⲥⲟϥ⸗ | ⲥⲟϥ | profaner, |
| ⲧⲱⲃ | ⲧⲉⲃ- | ⲧⲟⲃ⸗ | ⲧⲟⲃ | sceller. |
3. Quatre verbes terminés en ⲓ, dont deux sont intransitifs:
| ⲟⲩⲱϯ | ⲟⲩⲉⲧ- | ⲟⲩⲟⲧ⸗ | ⲟⲩⲟⲧ | séparer, |
| ⲧⲱⲙⲓ | ⲧⲉⲙ- | ⲧⲟⲙ⸗ | ⲧⲟⲙⲓ | unir, |
| ϣⲱⲡⲓ (21) | — | — | ϣⲟⲡ | être, |
| ϫⲱⲣⲓ | — | — | ϫⲟⲡ | être fort. |
Dans les verbes terminés par ⲃ ⲙ ⲛ, la voyelle auxiliaire ⲉ est écrite:
| ⲑⲱⲕⲉⲙ | ⲑⲉⲕⲉⲙ- | ⲑⲟⲕⲙ⸗ | ⲑⲟⲕⲉⲙ | dégainer. |
Devant ϧ ϩ, ⲟ se change en ⲁ; de même ⲉ de l'état construit quand le verbe se termine par ⲙ (30):
| ⲣⲱϧⲧ | ⲣⲉϧⲧ- | ⲣⲁϧⲧ⸗ | ⲣⲁϧⲧ | renverser, |
| ⲑⲱϩⲉⲙ | ⲑⲁϩⲉⲙ- | ⲑⲁϩⲙ⸗ | ⲑⲁϩⲉⲙ | appeler. |
ⲱ se change en ⲟ dans:
| ϫⲟⲕϩ | ϫⲉⲕϩ- | ϫⲟⲕϩ⸗ | ϫⲟⲕϩ | piquer, |
et dans ϣⲟⲕϩ percer, ϣⲟⲛϩ ϣⲟⲛϩ⸗ priver.
II. Les verbes intransitifs ont pour voyelle formative ⲟ après la deuxième radicale à l'infinitif, après la première au qualitatif.
Règle:
| ⲟ | — | — | ⲟ | |
| ϩⲗⲟϫ | — | — | ϩⲟⲗϫ | devenir doux |
De même les verbes suivants, dans lesquels il s'est produit un changement de voyelle ou de consonne:
| ⲙ̀ⲕⲁϩ (30) | ⲙⲟⲕϩ | souffrir, |
| ϣⲗⲁϩ | ϣⲟⲗϩ | trembler, |
| ϩⲕⲟ (21) | ϩⲟⲕⲉⲣ | avoir fam, |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ | ⲟⲩⲟⲃϣ | blanchir, |
| ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲧ | ⲛⲁϣⲧ (30) | durcir, |
| ϭⲣⲟϩ | ϫⲟⲣϩ (23) | diminuer. |
III. Les verbes intransitifs en ⲁⲓ, à l'infinitif, ont aussi leur qualitatif en ⲟ:
| ⲁϣⲁⲓ | ⲟϣ | se multiplier, |
| ⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲟϫ | être sain, |
| ϧⲑⲁⲓ | ϧⲟⲧ | engraisser. |
Les verbes transitifs en ⲁⲓ suivent le modèle des verbes causatifs (223, 1):
| ⲥϧⲁⲓ | ⲥϧⲉ- | ⲥϧⲏⲧ⸗ | ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ | écrire. |
Les deux verbes ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ «connaître» et ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ «lever», qui ont ⲟⲩ pour seconde radicale, varient d'une manière tout à fait spéciale:
| ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ- | ⲥⲟⲩⲱⲛ⸗ | ⲥⲟⲩⲏⲛ (ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ) |
| ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ⲧⲉⲛ- | ⲧⲱⲛ⸗ | — |
A côté de la forme ordinaire de l'infinitif pronominal ⲥⲟⲩⲱⲛ⸗, ⲧⲱⲛ⸗, ils en ont une autre qui s'emploie devant le suffixe ⲟⲩ de la 3e plur. ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ⸗ ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ⸗, sans doute par attraction.
ϯⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ «je les connais»[1].
ⲁⲩⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ «ils se levèrent».
On trouve aussi ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ et ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ comme formes pleines à l'état absolu.
4. Verbes à 3e radicale faible.
I. Parmi ces verbes[1] les uns ont, pour voyelle formative, ⲓ après la première radicale; ils sont transitifs ou intransitifs:
Règle
| ⲓ . ⲓ | ⲉ | ⲁ | ⲟ . ⲓ | |
| ⲙⲓⲥⲓ | ⲙⲉⲥ- | ⲙⲁⲥ⸗ | ⲙⲟⲥⲓ | enfanter, |
| ⲗⲓⲃⲓ | — | — | ⲗⲟⲃⲓ | délirer. |
Devant ⲃ ⲙ ⲛ, ⲁ se change en ⲉ:
| ϫⲓⲙⲓ | ϫⲉⲙ- | ϫⲉⲙ⸗ | — | trouver, |
| ⲓⲛⲓ | ⲉⲛ- | ⲉⲛ⸗ | — | porter. |
Devant ⲕ ϣ ϧ, ⲟ est remplacé par ⲁ:
| ⲣⲓⲕⲓ | ⲣⲉⲕ- | ⲣⲁⲕ⸗ | ⲣⲁⲕⲓ | incliner, |
| ⲓϣⲓ | ⲉϣ- | ⲁϣ⸗ | ⲁϣⲓ | suspendre, |
| ⲑⲓϧⲓ | — | — | ⲑⲁϧⲓ | s'enivrer. |
Exceptions:
| ⲓⲣⲓ | ⲉⲣ- | ⲁⲓ⸗ | ⲟⲓ (27) | faire, |
| ϯ | ϯ- | ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ | ⲧⲟⲓ | donner, |
| ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ | ϩⲓ- | ϩⲓⲧ⸗ | ϩⲱⲟⲩⲓ (32) | jeter. |
II. Les autres ont différentes voyelles formatives à l'infinitif et forment leur qualitatif en ⲱⲟⲩ. Ils sont tous intransitifs:
| ⲫⲉⲣⲓ | ⲫⲉⲣⲓⲱⲟⲩ | briller, |
| ϩⲉⲣⲓ | ϩⲟⲩⲣⲱⲟⲩ | s'apaiser, |
| ϣⲁϥⲓ | ϣⲁϥⲓⲱⲟⲩ | enfler, |
| ϣⲱⲟⲩⲓ | ϣⲟⲩⲱⲟⲩ | sécher, |
| ⲁⲥⲓⲁⲓ | ⲁⲥⲓⲱⲟⲩ | guérir, |
| ϣⲁⲓ | ϣⲁⲓⲱⲟⲩ | briller. |
III. Quatre verbes, dont deux sont transitifs et deux intransitifs, ont leur qualitatif en ⲱⲟⲩ:
| ϣⲓ | ϣⲓ- | ϣⲓⲧ⸗ | ϣⲏⲟⲩ | mesurer, |
| ϭⲓ | ϭⲓ- | ϭⲓⲧ⸗ | ϭⲏⲟⲩ | prendre, |
| ⲥⲓ | — | — | ⲥⲏⲟⲩ | se rassasier, |
| ⲟⲩⲉⲓ | — | — | ⲟⲩⲏⲟⲩ | s'éloigner. |
De ϣⲓ ϭⲓ doivent être rapprochés, pour les formes de l'infinitif, les deux verbes:
| ⲙⲉⲓ | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ- | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | (ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ) | aimer, |
| ϥⲁⲓ | ϥⲓ- | ϥⲓⲧ⸗ | — | porter. |
Dans ces quatre verbes, de même que dans ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ, le ⲧ de l'état pronominal est l'ancien t du féminin (194).
5. Verbes de 4 et de 5 radicales.
Règle:
| ⲟ . ⲉ | ⲉ . ⲉ | ⲉ . ⲱ | ⲉ . ⲱ | ||
| ⲃⲟⲣⲃⲉⲣ | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲉⲣ- | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣ⸗ | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣ | jeter, | |
| ⲥⲕⲟⲣⲕⲉⲣ | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲉⲣ- | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲱⲣ⸗ | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲱⲣ | faire rouler |
A l'exception de ⲟⲩⲟⲥⲑⲉⲛ «élargir», tous les verbes de ces deux classes sont formés par un redoublement. Lorsque le thème primitif est bilitère, il se redouble en entier: ϩⲟⲛϩⲉⲛ «ordonner» de ϩⲱⲛ «ordre, ordonner». Lorsqu'il est trilitère, les deux dernières lettres seules se redoublent:
ⲑⲣⲟϣⲣⲉϣ «devenir rouge» de ⲑⲣⲟϣ «être rouge».
Il ne s'est conservé dans la langue copte qu'un fort petit nombre des racines de ces verbes.
Quelques verbes de cette classe ont un infinitif intransitif en ⲉ:
ⲥⲕⲟⲣⲕⲉⲣ «faire rouler», ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲉⲣ «rouler».
De même: ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲉⲣ «bouillir», ⲧⲉⲗⲧⲉⲗ «tomber goutte à goutte», ⲭⲣⲉⲙⲣⲉⲙ «murmurer».
ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲉⲣ et ⲧⲉⲗⲧⲉⲗ sont aussi transitifs et se construisent avec ou sans ⲛ̀[1].
6. Verbes à 3e radicale géminée et à 4e faible.
Des verbes à troisième radicale géminée, il ne s'est conservé en copte que:
| ⲥⲟⲃϯ (spdd) | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲉ- | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ⸗ | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ | prépaper |
dans lequel le redoublement ne subsiste qu'aux deux dernières formes.
De même, les verbes à quatrième radicale faible ont presque entièrement disparu en copte; on peut citer:
| ⲙⲟⲥϯ (msdy) | ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲉ- | ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲱ⸗ | — | haïr, |
| ⲙⲟⲛⲓ | — | ⲙⲁⲛⲟⲩ⸗ (29) | — | faire paître, |
ϫⲱⲓⲗⲓ être étranger; ⲥⲟϭⲛⲓ délibérer.
Tableau synoptique des huit classes de verbes.
En tenant compte du qualitatif de la majeure partie des verbes, les huit classes se groupent ainsi:
| Infinitif | Qualitatif | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| abs. | const. | pron. | |||||
| I | 1. | 2 rad. | ⲱ | ⲉ | ⲟ | ⲏ | à la première syllabe. |
| 2. | 2e gém. | ⲟ | — | — | |||
| II | 3. | 3 rad. | ⲱ | ⲉ | ⲟ | ⲟ | |
| 4. | 3e faible | ⲓ | ⲉ | ⲁ | |||
| III | 5. | 4 rad. | ⲟ | ⲉ | ⲱ | ⲱ | à la dernière syllabe. |
| 6. | 5 rad. | ⲟ | ⲉ | ⲱ | |||
| 7. | 3e gém. | ⲟ | ⲉ | ⲱ | |||
| 8. | 4e faible | ⲟ | ⲉ | ⲱ | |||
Paradigmes.
| I | 1. | ⲃⲱⲗ | ⲃⲉⲗ- | ⲃⲟⲗ⸗ | ⲃⲏⲗ |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2. | ϧⲙⲟⲙ | — | — | ϧⲏⲙ | |
| II | 3. | ⲫⲱⲣϣ | ⲫⲉⲣϣ- | ⲫⲟⲣϣ⸗ | ⲫⲟⲣϣ |
| 4. | ⲙⲓⲥⲓ | ⲙⲉⲥ- | ⲙⲁⲥ⸗ | ⲙⲟⲥⲓ | |
| III | 5. | ⲃⲟⲣⲃⲉⲣ | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲉⲣ- | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣ⸗ | ⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣ |
| 6. | ⲥⲕⲟⲣⲕⲉⲣ | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲉⲣ- | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲱⲣ⸗ | ⲥⲕⲉⲣⲕⲱⲣ | |
| 7. | ⲥⲟⲃϯ | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲉ- | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ⸗ | ⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ | |
| 8. | ⲙⲟⲥϯ | ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲉ- | ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲱ⸗ | — |
La plupart des exceptions se trouvent dans le groupe II.
B. Verbes causatifs.
Les verbes causatifs se divisent en deux classes:
1. Les causatifs formés du préfixe ⲥ,
2. Les causatifs formés du préfixe ⲧ.
1. Causatifs formés de ⲥ.
Cette formation est la plus ancienne; elle était fréquente en égyptien. En copte elle n'a donné qu'un petit nombre de verbes.
I. Cinq de ces verbes dérivent d'un radical bilitère et ont un infinitif féminin avec ⲁ ou ⲉ pour voyelle formative, leur qualitatif est en ⲏⲟⲩⲧ:
| ⲥⲁϩⲛⲓ (ϩⲱⲛ) | ⲥⲉϩⲛⲉ- | ⲥⲁϩⲛⲏⲧ⸗ | ⲥⲉϩⲛⲏⲟⲩⲧ | fournir, |
| ⲥⲉⲙⲛⲓ (ⲙⲟⲩⲛ) | ⲥⲉⲙⲛⲉ- | ⲥⲉⲙⲛⲏⲧ⸗ | ⲥⲉⲙⲛⲏⲟⲩⲧ | établir, |
| ⲥⲉⲃⲓ (ⲟⲩⲁⲃ) | ⲥⲟⲩⲃⲉ- | ⲥⲟⲩⲃⲏⲧ⸗ | ⲥⲉⲃⲏⲟⲩⲧ | circoncire, |
ⲥⲁϫⲓ (ϫⲱ) parler,
ⲥⲉⲙⲓ (ég. s-myt) plaider.
B. Quatre autres sont formés d'un radical trilitère et ont un infinitif masculin:
| ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲧⲉⲛ (ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ) | ⲥⲟⲩⲧⲉⲛ- | ⲥⲟⲩⲧⲱⲛ⸗ | ⲥⲟⲩⲧⲱⲛ | diriger, |
| ⲥⲁϩⲟⲩⲓ (ég. s-hwr) | ⲥϩⲟⲩⲉⲣ- | ⲥϩⲟⲩⲱⲣ⸗ | ⲥϩⲟⲩⲱⲣⲧ | maudire, |
| ⲥⲟϩⲓ (ⲟϩⲓ) | — | ⲥⲁϩⲱ⸗ | — | réprimander, |
| ϣⲁⲛϣ (ⲱⲛϧ) | ϣⲁⲛⲉϣ- | ϣⲁⲛⲟⲩϣ⸗ | ϣⲁⲛⲉⲩϣ | nourrir. |
Dans ce dernier verbe, il s'est produit un double changement, du ⲥ en ϣ et du ϧ de ⲱⲛϧ en ϣ. Le correspondant ṣaꜥidique de ce mot est ⲥⲁⲛϣ.
2. Verbes causatifs formés du préfixe ⲧ[1].
Règle:
| -ⲟ | -ⲉ- | -ⲟ⸗ | -ⲏⲟⲩⲧ. | |
| ⲧⲁⲕⲟ | ⲧⲁⲕⲉ- | ⲧⲁⲕⲟ⸗ | ⲧⲁⲕⲏⲟⲩⲧ | perdre. |
Cette formation est beaucoup plus récente que la précédente; elle a fourni au copte un grand nombre de verbes.
Le ⲧ n'est autre chose qu'une forme abrégée de ϯ «donner, faire que». Il rend actifs les verbes neutres:
ⲟϩⲓ «se tenir», ⲧⲁϩⲟ «faire tenir, placer»;
ⲱⲛϧ «vivre», ⲧⲁⲛϧⲟ «vivifier».
Aux verbes transitifs il donne le sens causatif:
ⲱⲗⲓ «lever», ⲧⲁⲗⲟ «faire lever, charger»;
ⲥⲱ «boire», ⲧⲥⲟ «faire boire, abreuver».
Il forme des verbes actifs avec des substantifs et des adjectifs:
ⲁⲕⲱ «perte», ⲧⲁⲕⲟ «faire périr, perdre»;
ⲥⲁⲃⲉ «prudent», ⲧⲥⲁⲃⲟ «instruire».
Tous les verbes de cette classe sont formés de la même manière.
Ils ont pour voyelle formative ⲟ à la dernière syllabe qui est toujours ouverte.
Les syllabes qui précèdent ont la voyelle auxiliaire après ⲧ, si le radical est bilitère; après la première lettre, s'il est trilitère:
ⲙⲟϩ «brûler», ⲧⲉⲙϩⲟ «faire brûler»;
ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ «s'asseoir», ⲧϩⲉⲙⲥⲟ «faire asseoir».
La voyelle auxiliaire devrait être ⲉ; mais dans beaucoup de verbes, diverses influences, spécialement la présence d'un ꜥain (ع) ancien (31), ont causé le remplacement de ⲉ par ⲁ:
ⲧⲁϣⲟ «multiplier», ⲧⲁⲣⲕⲟ «adjurer».
Lorsque le radical commence par la semi-consonne ⲟⲩ, la voyelle auxiliaire disparaît:
ⲟⲩⲁⲃ «être pur», ⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟ «purifier»;
ⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ «être sain», ⲧⲟⲩϫⲟ «guérir».
Dans quelques verbes, elle n'est pas écrite et s'abrège en un simple e muet: ⲧϣⲙⲟ «briser», ⲧⲥⲓⲟ «rassasier».
Devant une labiale, ⲧ se change en ⲑ (23):
ⲓⲣⲓ «faire», ⲑⲣⲟ «faire faire»;
ⲙⲁⲓ «juste», ⲑⲙⲁⲓⲟ «justifier».
Avec ϩ, ⲧ se contracte parfois en ⲑ (3):
ϩⲟⲣϣ «être lourd», ⲑⲉⲣϣⲟ (ⲧϩⲉⲣϣⲟ) «charger»;
ϩⲱⲗ «voler», ⲑⲗⲟ «faire envoler».
On a ⲧϩⲉⲙⲥⲟ (225) et ⲑⲉⲙⲥⲟ dans le même sens.
Lorsque ⲧ et ϣ se rencontrent, ils se contractent parfois en ϫ, parfois ⲧ disparaît, et parfois aussi les deux lettres se maintiennent:
ϣⲱⲡⲓ «être», ϫⲫⲟ (pour ⲧϣⲡⲟ, 24) «engendrer»,
ϣⲧⲟ «faire accroupir (les chameaux)»,
ϣⲱⲟⲩⲓ «sécher», ⲧϣⲟⲩⲓⲟ «faire sécher».
Remarques.
1. Quelques verbes transitifs suivent la règle des verbes de cette classe (224), bien qu'ils ne soient pas formés au moyen du préfixe causatif:
| ϭⲟ | ϭⲉ- | ϭⲟ⸗ | ϭⲏⲟⲩⲧ | planter, |
| ϭⲉⲣⲟ | ϭⲉⲣⲉ- | ϭⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | ϭⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩⲧ | allumer. |
2. Dans un petit nombre de cas l'infinitif pronominal est en ⲱ.
| ⲗⲁⲗⲟ | ⲗⲁⲗⲉ- | ⲗⲁⲗⲱ⸗ | ⲗⲁⲗⲏⲟⲩⲧ | enduire, |
| ϫⲁⲗⲟ | ϫⲁⲗⲉ- | ϫⲁⲗⲱ⸗ | ϫⲁⲗⲏⲟⲩⲧ | héberger. |
C. Verbes composés.
Les verbes composés sont formés de deux racines:
1. Un verbe à l'état construit;
2. Un nom, un verbe ou un adverbe.
Les deux principaux verbes composants sont ⲉⲣ- et ϯ-.
1. ⲉⲣ- «faire, devenir».
Ce verbe s'unit à différents mots grecs et coptes pour former des verbes neutres:
ⲉⲣ-ϩⲉⲗⲡⲓⲥ «espérer»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲟⲩⲱ «répondre»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲛⲓϣϯ «grandir»,
ⲉⲣ-ϩⲙⲟⲧ «faire don de»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲥⲟⲫⲟⲥ «devenir sage»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ «briller».
ⲉⲣ-ϩⲟⲩⲟ- «faire beaucoup» est toujours suivi d'un autre mot qui sert de complément à ⲉⲣ-:
ⲉⲣ-ϩⲟⲩⲟ-ϭⲓⲥⲓ «exalter grandement».
Le verbe ⲉⲣ- précède tous les verbes grecs employés en copte sans modifier en rien leur sens:
ⲉⲣ-ⲁⲅⲓⲁⲍⲓⲛ «sanctifier»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲉⲥⲑⲉ «prier»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲉⲝⲱⲣⲓⲍⲓⲛ «exiler»,
ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲓⲣⲁⲍⲓⲛ «éprouver».
L'impératif de ⲉⲣ- est ⲁⲣⲓ- même dans les composés: ⲁⲣⲓ-ϩⲙⲟⲧ, ⲁⲣⲓ-ⲁⲅⲓⲁⲍⲓⲛ.
2. ϯ «donner».
Ce verbe s'unit à plusieurs mots coptes pour former des verbes composés qui gouvernent tous le datif avec ⲛ̀:
ϯ-ⲥⲃⲱ «instruire»,
ϯ-ⲱⲟⲩ «glorifier»,
ϯ-ⲱⲙⲥ «baptiser»,
ϯ-ϣⲓ «mesurer».
Il s'unit rarement aux noms grecs: ϯ-ⲙⲉⲧⲁⲛⲓⲁ «s'incliner».
L'impératif de tous ces verbes se forme en remplaçant ϯ- par ⲙⲁ-: ⲙⲁⲥⲃⲱ, ⲙⲁⲱⲟⲩ.
Exceptions:
ϯϩⲟ «prier», impér. ⲙⲁϯϩⲟ;
ϯⲟⲩⲱ «cesser», impér. ⲙⲁϯⲟⲩⲱ.
3. Autres verbes composants.
Tous les verbes coptes à l'état construit forment avec leur complément, pour ainsi dire, un seul mot composé. Mais il en est quelques-uns, plus fréquents et plus remarquables, dans lesquels la composition est plus intime. Tels sont:
ϣⲉⲡ- de ϣⲱⲡ «recevoir»:
ϣⲉⲡ-ϧⲓⲥⲓ «souffrir»,
ϣⲉⲡ-ϩⲙⲟⲧ «remercier».
ϫⲉⲙ- de ϫⲓⲙⲓ «trouver»:
ϫⲉⲙ-ⲛⲟⲙϯ «se fortifier»,
ϫⲉⲙ-ϩⲏⲟⲩ «gagner»,
ϫⲉⲙ-ϫⲟⲙ «être puissant»,
ϫⲉⲙ-ϯⲡⲓ «goûter».
ϩⲓ- de ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ «jeter»:
ϩⲓ-ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ «entreprendre»,
ϩⲓ-ⲡϩⲟ «mépriser».
ϭⲓ- de ϭⲓ «prendre»:
ϭⲓ-ⲥⲁⲣⲝ «s'incarner»,
ϭⲓ-ⲥⲃⲱ «instruire».
ⲟⲩⲁϩ- de ⲟⲩⲟϩ «ajouter»:
ⲟⲩⲁϩ-ⲥⲁϩⲛⲓ «ordonner»,
ⲟⲩⲁϩ-ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ «faire de nouveau».
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉⲙ- de ⲟⲩⲱϩⲉⲙ «répéter»:
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉⲙ-ⲙⲓⲥⲓ «régénérer»,
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉⲙ-ⲕⲱⲧ «réédifier».
11.1 The Forms of the Infinitive. The nominal or pronominal object of many transitive verbs may be suffixed directly to the infinitive without the use of a prepositional object marker, as in
| ⲁⲓϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. | → |
| ⲁⲓϫⲉⲙ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. | |
| I found my father. |
| ⲁⲓϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ. | → |
| ⲁⲓϫⲉⲙϥ. | |
| I found him. |
Infinitives that allow this construction have three distinct forms: (1) the normal (absolute) dictionary form (ϫⲓⲙⲓ), (2) the prenominal form (ϫⲉⲙ-; note the conventional use of the single hyphen), and (3) the prepronominal form (ϫⲉⲙ⸗). For infinitives of some patterns these three forms are more or less predictable; for others there is much irregularity. We shall deal with the most important patterns individually in subsequent lessons. The forms of the pronouns to be suffixed to a given infinitive are very much the same as those suffixed to the prepronominal forms of the prepositions as given in §9.1. Other examples will be given as required.
11.2 Infinitives of the pattern ϭⲓ (i.e. consonant + ⲓ). Infinitives of this pattern show some irregularities, but three of these verbs (ϥⲁⲓ, ϯ, ϭⲓ) are especially frequent and their forms should be learned:
| ϯ | ϯ- | ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ | to give |
| ϭⲓ | ϭⲓ- | ϫⲉⲙ⸗ | to take |
| ϥⲁⲓ | ϥⲁⲓ- | ϥⲓⲧ⸗ | to raise, carry |
| ϣⲓ | ϣⲓ- | ϣⲓⲧ⸗ | to measure |
The verbs ⲥⲓ (to become sated) and ⲓ (to come) are intransitive and do not take direct objects. ϥⲁⲓ, ϣⲓ, and ⲥⲓ may also be spelled as ϥⲉⲓ, ϣⲉⲓ, and ⲥⲉⲓ; the spelling ⲧⲉⲓ for ϯ is rare.
Object pronouns are attached to these verbs as follows:
| ϭⲓⲧ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲕ |
| ϭⲓϯ |
| ϭⲓⲧϥ |
| ϫⲓⲧⲥ̄ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲛ |
| ϭⲓ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲟⲩ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲧ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲕ |
| ⲧⲏⲓ |
| ⲧⲏⲓϥ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲥ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲛ |
| ϯ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ |
Note that ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ (2nd pers. pl.) is attached to the prenominal form of the infinitive; the prepronominal form is also found: ϭⲓⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ.
12.1 The relative form of the First Perfect. When the First Perfect is used in relative clauses, it combines with the relative pronoun into a single unit.
| ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | which I heard |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
These forms are very frequently spelled with ⲛ̀ for initial ⲉⲛ-, as <ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓ->, <ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕ->, etc.
The relative pronoun ⲉⲧ- of the preceding paradigm and ⲉⲧ, which was introduced in §3.1, cannot be preceded directly by prepositions or direct object markers. The real syntactic function of the relative pronoun within the relative clause must be expressed by a resumptive pronoun. The general construction is most clearly understood by"Copticizing" a few English examples:
| the man who went → |
| the man who he went |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man whom I saw → |
| the man who I saw him |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| the man to whom I gave the money → |
| the man who I gave the money to him |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲓϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the boat into which we climbed → |
| the boat which we climbed into it |
| ⲡϫⲟⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| the sound which they heard → |
| the sound which they heard it |
| ⲡϧⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
This use of resumptive pronouns is required in Coptic in all but a few instances which will be mentioned later on. Similar constructions with ⲉⲧ will be treated in Lesson 19.
When a relative clause contains more than one verb, the relative pronoun need not be repeated:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| the man who arose and left |
12.2 The relative pronoun has the form ⲉⲧⲉ before the negative First Perfect:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| the man who did not flee |
| ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| the books which he did not find |
12.3 As mentioned in §3.1, all relative clauses in Coptic may be substantivized by prefixing the appropriate form of the definite article. Resumptive pronouns are required. Study the following examples carefully:
| the one who (or: he who) went |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the one (m.) whom they sent |
| ⲡⲉⲛⲧⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the one (m.) to whom I gave the money |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁϥ |
| that (m.) which I took from you |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓϭⲓⲧϥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲕ |
| those who took it (m.) |
| ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲩϭⲓⲧϥ |
| the one (f.) whom they entrusted to us |
| ⲧⲉⲧⲁⲩⲧⲏⲓⲥ ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲛ |
12.4 Infinitives (cont.). With the exception of the verbs treated in §9.2, monosyllabic infinitives of the pattern consonant + vowel are relatively uncommon and do not constitute any sort of unified class. Some of these verbs are very important, however, and their forms should be learned:
| ⲥⲱ | ⲥⲉ- | ⲥⲟ⸗ | to drink |
| ⲭⲱ | ⲭⲁ- | ⲭⲁ⸗ | to put, place |
| ⲓⲱ | ⲓⲁ- | ⲓⲁ⸗ | to wash |
| ϫⲱ | ϫⲉ- | ϫⲟ⸗ | to say |
| ⲙⲉⲓ | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ- | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | to love |
Some verbs of this type are intransitive and do not take direct objects: e.g. ⲙⲟⲩ (to die), ⲛⲁⲓ (to pity), ϣⲁⲓ (to rise: of the sun etc.), ϩⲉⲓ (to fall), <ϭⲱ> (to remain).
12.5 When introducing a direct quotation, the verb ϫⲱ requires a "dummy" object (it: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ, -ⲥ) followed by the conjunction ϫⲉ, as in
| ⲁϥϫⲟⲥ ϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| He said, "I have not seen him." |
With this particular verb the alternate object form ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ is not permitted in the First Perfect. ϫⲱ may, of course, have a real direct object otherwise:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϫⲉ-ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| I did not say these things. |
13.1 The Temporal. A special conjugation is used to express a subordinate temporal clause (English "when" with a simple past or pluperfect verb), as in
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ, ⲁⲓⲡⲱⲧ ϣⲁⲣⲟϥ. |
| When I saw him, I ran to him. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥϫⲱⲕ ⲙ̄ ⲡⲉϥϩⲱⲃ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲃⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| When he had completed his work, he left. |
The full inflection of this form, called the Temporal Conjugation, is as follows:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | when I heard |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | etc. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| when the man heard |
Alternate spellings, such as ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲓ-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲕ̄-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣϥ̄-, are common.
The Temporal is negated by prefixing -ⲧⲙ̄- to the infinitive:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲧⲙ̄ϭⲓⲛⲉ ⲙ̄ⲙⲟϥ |
| when I did not find him |
With a nominal subject, -ⲧⲙ̄- usually remains with the verbal prefix:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲧⲙ̄-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲟⲩⲱϣⲃ̄ |
| when the man did not answer |
A Temporal clause usually stands before the main clause, but occurrences after the main clause are not rare:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥϣⲁϫⲉ, ⲁⲓⲣⲓⲙⲉ. |
| ⲁⲓⲣⲓⲙⲉ ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥϣⲁϫⲉ. |
| I wept when I heard his words. |
When a Temporal clause is continued with a second verb, the Temporal prefix is not repeated and the First Perfect is used:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϩⲣⲟⲟⲩ ⲁⲩⲱ ⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϩⲟ… |
| when I heard his voice and saw his face… |
13.2 Relative clauses with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. Contrast the two sentences:
| ⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| My father left me there. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| It was my father who left me there. |
The second sentence, known in English as a type of cleft sentence ("it was … that/who …"), singles out the subject ("my father and no one else") as the actor, while the first sentence merely describes a past action with no special emphasis. The Coptic correspondent of the English cleft sentence employs ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ followed by the relative form of the verb. ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ usually combine with the relative form to produce ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓ-, ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲕ-, etc.:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
This form should not be confused with the nominalized relative ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ etc., which consists of the definite article plus the relative form (see §12.3). Contrast
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̄ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| It was my father who left me there. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| My father is the one who left me there. |
The second sentence is a normal ⲡⲉ sentence: ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ is the subject, ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ is the predicate.
The cleft sentence with ⲡⲉ is a favorite one with the interrogative pronouns:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ? |
| Who sent you? |
| Who was it that sent you? |
| ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲕⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ? |
| What did you give to them? |
| What was it that you gave to them? |
Note that in this case the English cleft sentence pattern ("who was it that") is slightly different from the one given above.
13.3 The preposition ⲉ is used before an infinitive to express purpose:
| ⲁⲓⲓ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| I have come to speak with you. |
The subject of the infinitive in this construction is usually the same as that of the main verb, but some laxness occurs, as in
| ⲁϥ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| He sent me to speak with you. |
13.4 Coptic has no real passive conjugations. The passive is expressed by using the 3rd pers. pl. of the active form in an indefinite sense:
| ⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ϣⲁⲣⲟⲕ. |
| I have been sent to you. |
That such expressions are to be taken in a passive sense is most evident (1) when there is no clear reference for the pronoun "they", or (2) when an agent is added, usually with ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ, as in
| ⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ. |
| I have been sent by the king. |
13.5 Infinitives (continued). Transitive infinitives of the pattern ⲕⲱⲧ have the following forms:
| ⲕⲱⲧ | ⲕⲉⲧ- | ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ | to build |
| ϫⲱⲕ | ϫⲉⲕ- | ϫⲟⲕ⸗ | to complete |
| ϩⲱⲡ | ϩⲉⲡ- | ϩⲟⲡ⸗ | to hide, to conceal |
| ⲱⲡ | ⲉⲡ- | ⲟⲡ⸗ | to count |
Transitive verbs of this pattern are quite common.
14.1 The Second Perfect. As we shall see in subsequent lessons, each "first" tense in Coptic has a counterpart called a second tense, the use of which places a special emphasis on some element of the sentence other than the verb, usually an adverbial phrase. Contrast the following:
First Perfect:
| ⲁ-ⲫⲁⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ. |
| This happened because of you. |
Second Perfect:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲫⲁⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ. |
| It was because of you that this happened. |
As our translation indicates, the English cleft sentence is a handy way to render Coptic sentences with second tense verbal forms. Except for the special uses taken up below, the use of a second tense is not obligatory but depends on what the writer chooses to emphasize.
The Second Perfect has the same inflectional forms as the Relative of the First Perfect, but usually without the initial ⲉ: ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, etc.
When phrases containing interrogative pronouns or adverbs are placed after the verb, a second tense is regularly used, but exceptions are not rare:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ? |
| Why did you send him? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲑⲁⲓⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲏ ⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| To whom did he bring this letter? |
But if the interrogative phrase is placed first, as is usually the case with ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ, the first tense is used:
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ ⲁⲕⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ? |
14.2 Further remarks on interrogative pronouns and adverbs. The interrogative pronouns ⲛⲓⲙ (who?) and ⲟⲩ (what?) may be used as subjects or objects of verbs and as objects of prepositions. When they are used as the subject of a verb, the verb is normally in the second tense form:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲟⲩ ϣⲱⲡⲓ? |
| What happened? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲛⲓⲙ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ? |
| Who went in? |
Examples of object usage, again regularly with the second tense:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whom did you see? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| To whom did you give it? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲭⲁ-ⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ? |
| What did he put there? |
The construction introduced in §13.2 is used much more frequently than the preceding:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? |
The interrogative adverbs ⲑⲱⲛ (where?), ⲉ ⲑⲱⲛ (whither?), ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ (whence?), and ⲛ̀ⲑⲛⲁⲩ (when?) occur regularly in post-verbal position with a second tense:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲧⲱⲛ? |
| Where did your father go? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲑⲛⲁⲩ? |
| When did they die? |
14.3 Infinitives (continued). In infinitives of the type ⲕⲱⲧ the ⲱ is modified to ⲟⲩ when the initial consonant is ⲙ or ⲛ:
| ⲙⲟⲩⲣ | ⲙⲉⲣ- | ⲙⲟⲣ⸗ | to bind |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲛ | — | — | to remain |
The ⲟ of the presuffixal form is regularly replaced by ⲁ before stem final ϩ and (usually) ϣ:
| ⲟⲩⲱϩ | ⲟⲩⲉϩ- | ⲟⲩⲁϩ⸗ | to put, place |
| ⲟⲩⲱϣ | ⲟⲩⲉϣ- | ⲟⲩⲁϣ⸗ | to want, desire |
| ⲙⲟϩ | ⲙⲁϩ- | ⲙⲁϩ⸗ | to fill |
15.1 Adjectives. Although there is some debate over the existence of adjectives as a grammatical category in Coptic, it is nevertheless convenient to retain the designation for the words treated in this lesson. Most attributive adjectives may either precede or follow the noun they modify, joined to the noun with a linking particle ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀). The noun and adjective form a close unit; any article, possessive adjective, or demonstrative stands before the whole unit:
| ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ ⲃⲁⲕⲓ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϣϯ |
| a large city |
| ⲡⲁⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ |
| ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ |
| my beloved son |
| ⲡⲥⲁⲃⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲥⲁⲃⲉ |
| the wise man |
These examples represent the normal attributive adjective construction. There are, however, some restrictions on certain special groups of adjectives:
Some adjectives have distinct feminine and plural forms; e.g.
| masc. | fem. | pl. | |
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲭⲁⲙⲉ | ⲭⲁⲙⲏ | — | black |
| ϧⲁⲉ | ϧⲁⲏ | ϧⲁⲉⲩ | last |
| ⲥⲁⲃⲉ | ⲥⲁⲃⲏ | ⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ | wise |
| ϭⲁⲗⲉ | — | ϭⲁⲗⲉⲩ | lame |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ | — | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲁϯ | beloved |
| ϣⲟⲣⲡ | ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ | — | first |
| ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ | ϩⲟⲩⲓϯ | ϩⲟⲩⲁϯ | first |
| ϣⲉⲙⲙⲟ | ϣⲙ̄ⲙⲱ | ϣⲉⲙⲙⲱⲟⲩ | alien, foreign |
The plurals in -ⲉⲉⲩⲉ also occur as -ⲉⲉⲩ. The fem. forms are used with sing. and plural fem. nouns. The plural forms occur mainly in substantivized usage:
| ⲛⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ |
| the wise |
| ⲛϩⲟⲩⲁϯ |
| the elders, prominent persons (e.g. of a city) |
Greek adjectives may appear (1) in the Gk. masc. sing. form with nouns of either gender or number:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ |
| the good man |
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ |
| the good woman |
or (2) in the Gk. fem. sing. form if the modified noun refers to a female person:
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲏ |
| the good woman |
or (3) in the Gk. neuter form with nouns of either gender if they denote non-humans:
| ⲧⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲗⲉⲓⲟⲛ |
| the perfect spirit |
Greek substantivized neuter adjectives are treated as masculine in Coptic:
| ⲡⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲛ |
| good, that which is good (τὸ ἀγαθόν) |
A noun may be modified by more than one adjective, with various orders:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ϩⲏⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ |
| the righteous poor man |
| ⲡⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ |
| the great (and) righteous king |
All Coptic adjectives may be substantivized ("one who is…, that which is…") by prefixing the appropriate form of the article:
| ⲡⲉⲃⲓⲏⲛ |
| the poor man |
| ⲛⲉⲃⲓⲏⲛ |
| the poor (people) |
| ⲡⲁⲓϩⲏⲕⲓ |
| this poor man |
| ⲧⲁⲓϩⲏⲕⲓ |
| this poor woman |
| ⲟⲩⲥⲁⲃⲉ |
| a wise man |
| ϩⲁⲛⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ |
| wise men |
When the first noun in a genitive construction is followed by an adjectival phrase, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ may optionally be used instead of ⲛ̀ for the genitive:
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ϭⲁⲗⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man's crippled child |
15.2 Adjectives as predicates are treated exactly like noun predicates. Note the obligatory use of the indefinite article:
| ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is good. |
| ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲛⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲁⲛ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are not good. |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. |
| The man is good. |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϩⲁⲛⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ ⲛⲉ. |
| The men are just. |
| ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲧⲉ ⲧⲁⲓⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| This city is large. |
15.3 The cardinal numbers from one to five are
| masc. | fem. | |
|---|---|---|
| one | ⲟⲩⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲓ |
| two | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ |
| three | ϣⲟⲙⲧ | ϣⲟⲙϯ |
| four | ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | ϥⲧⲟⲓ, ϥⲧⲟ |
| five | ϯⲟⲩ | ϯⲉ, ϯ |
The numbers from three upward stand before the noun with the adjectival ⲛ̀. The noun is in the singular form, as is the definite article when present:
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϫⲟⲓ |
| three ships |
| ⲡϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| the three kings |
| ⲧⲁⲓϣⲟⲙϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ |
| these three years |
Note the absence of the indefinite article in the indefinite expressions.
The number one is construed in the same way, but the linking ⲛ̀ may be omitted:
| (ⲡ)ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| (ⲡ)ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| (the) one man |
The number two follows its noun, which is likewise in the singular; no ⲛ̀ is used:
| (ⲡ)ⲥⲟⲛ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ |
| (the) two brothers |
| (ⲧ)ⲥⲱⲛⲓ ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ |
| (the) two sisters |
And the numbers given in the lesson.
16.1 The interrogative pronouns ⲁϣ, ⲟⲩ, and ⲛⲓⲙ may be used adjectivally. This usage is most frequent in certain fixed expressions, the most important of which are
ⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ (of) what sort? This phrase is used attributively, as in
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲟⲓ? |
| What sort of ship? |
or predicatively (note obligatory use of indefinite article):
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ? |
| Of what sort is this man? |
ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ (of) what sort? ⲛ̀ ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ in what way? how?
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ? |
| Of what sort is this sign? |
| ⲛ̀ ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ ⲁⲕϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ? |
| How did you find him? |
Similar use of ⲟⲩ and ⲛⲓⲙ is rarer, e.g. ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ? what man? ⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ what sort? In special contexts these same or similar expressions may have an indefinite value: ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ such and such a person, ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ϯⲙⲓ some village or other, ⲟⲩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ this and that.
16.2 "Each, every" is expressed by ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ placed after a singular noun with no article: ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ every man, everyone; ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ everything; ϯⲙⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ every village. Pronominal resumption is usually in the plural:
| ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ |
| everything which we heard |
| ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲛⲏⲣⲟⲛ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| every evil thing that he did |
But resumption in the singular is not rare.
16.3 The indefinite pronouns are ⲟⲩⲟⲛ anyone; ϩⲗⲓ anyone, anything. These are most frequent in negative contexts as "no one, nothing":
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| I saw no one there. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϯ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| He gave me nothing. |
ϩⲗⲓ also appears with the indefinite article: ⲟⲩϩⲗⲓ.
ϩⲗⲓ is often used adjectively:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ. |
| No man saw me. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲉⲡ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧϥ. |
| I received no book from him. |
When (ⲟⲩ)ϩⲗⲓ or phrases beginning with (ⲟⲩ)ϩⲗⲓ are direct objects of transitive verbs (i.e. object with ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗), the use of the prenominal form of the infinitive is obligatory in the First Perfect and its negative. Thus ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲱⲡ ⲛ̀ ϩⲗⲓ… is not permitted in the sentence above.
As a nominal predicate ϩⲗⲓ means "nothing", even when no negative is formally involved. The indefinite article is obligatory:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲗⲓ. |
| I am nothing. |
| ϩⲁⲛϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲉⲩⲛⲟⲩⲧⲉ. |
| Their gods are nothing. |
ⲛ̀ ϩⲗⲓ or ϩⲗⲓ alone may be used adverbially in the sense "(not) at all":
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ (ⲛ̀) ϩⲗⲓ. |
| I didn't speak with him at all. |
Note also the expression ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ everyone, everybody.
16.4 "All, the whole (of)" is expressed by ⲧⲏⲣ⸗ used in apposition to a preceding noun or pronoun. A resumptive suffix is required:
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ |
| all the men (lit. the men, all of them) |
| ⲡⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ ⲧⲏⲣϥ |
| the whole world, all the world |
| ⲁⲩⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ. |
| They all came in. |
The pronominal suffixes are the same as those used on prepositions and infinitives; the 2nd pers. pl. form is ⲧⲏⲣⲧⲉⲛ. The 3rd pers. pl. ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ may also be used for 2nd pers. pl. reference.
16.5 The numbers from six to ten:
| masc. | fem. | |
|---|---|---|
| six | ⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ⲥⲟ, ⲥⲟⲉ |
| seven | ϣⲁϣϥ | ϣⲁϣϥⲓ |
| eight | ϣⲙⲏⲛ | ϣⲙⲏⲛⲓ |
| nine | ⲯⲓⲧ | ⲯⲓϯ |
| ten | ⲙⲏⲧ | ⲙⲏϯ |
They are used like the numbers three to five in §15.3.
Partitive expressions with numbers employ the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗):
| ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| one of the men |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| three of them |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ |
| three of the ships |
The number"one", ⲟⲩⲁⲓ (f. ⲟⲩⲓ) is also used as an indefinite pronoun: a certain one, a certain man (or woman), as in
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ϣⲁ ⲡⲁⲣⲭⲓⲉⲡⲓⲥⲕⲟⲡⲟⲥ. |
| A certain man went to the archbishop. |
And the words and expressions treated in the lesson.
17.1 The Imperative of most verbs is the same as the Infinitive, with no indication of number or gender:
| ⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ. |
| Walk behind me. |
| ⲙⲉⲣ-ⲡϫⲟⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲱⲛⲓ. |
| Tie the boat to the rock. |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ-ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| Love the Lord. |
| ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| Listen to my words. |
Negation is with the prefix ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣ-:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲟⲩ. |
| Don't speak with them. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉ ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| Do not go to the city. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲛⲕⲟⲧ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| Do not lie down here. |
A few verbs have special Imperative forms with prefixed ⲁ-:
| ⲛⲁⲩ: | ⲁⲛⲁⲩ | look, see |
| ⲟⲩⲱⲛ: | ⲁⲟⲩⲱⲛ | open |
| ϫⲱ: | ⲁϫⲉ-, ⲁϫⲟⲧ⸗ | say, speak |
| ⲓⲛⲓ: | ⲁⲛⲓⲟⲩⲓ, ⲁⲛⲓⲧ⸗ | bring |
| ⲓⲣⲓ: | ⲁⲣⲓⲟⲩⲓ, ⲁⲣⲓ-, ⲁⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | do, make |
The verb ⲙⲁ, ⲙⲁ-, ⲙⲁⲧ⸗ (or ⲙⲏⲉⲓ⸗) is used as the imperative of ϯ, but ϯ may also be used. The imperative of ⲉⲓ (to come) is expressed by ⲁⲙⲟⲩ, which has distinct feminine and plural forms: f. ⲁⲙⲏ, pl. ⲁⲙⲱⲓⲛⲓ.
17.2 The vocative is expressed by using a noun with the definite article or a possessive prefix: ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ O king! ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ O my son! The Greek vocative particle ⲱ (Gk. ὦ) may also be used, but not before a designation of God.
17.3 Infinitives of the type ⲙⲓⲥⲓ, with stressed vowel -ⲓ- and final unstressed -ⲉ, have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲙⲓⲥⲓ | ⲙⲁⲥ(ⲧ)- | ⲙⲁⲥ⸗ | to bear (a child) |
| ⲓϣⲓ | ⲉϣ- | ⲁϣ⸗ | to hang up, suspend |
The prenominal forms of many of these verbs occur with or without the final -ⲧ. Several important verbs of this type have irregularities:
| ⲓⲣⲓ | ⲉⲣ- | ⲁⲓ⸗ | to do, make |
| ⲓⲛⲓ | ⲉⲛ- | ⲉⲛ⸗ | to bring |
| ϣⲓⲛⲓ | ϣⲉⲛ- | ϣⲉⲛ⸗ | to seek, inquire |
| ϫⲓⲙⲓ | ϫⲉⲙ- | ϫⲉⲙ⸗ | to find |
The final ⲛ of ⲉⲛ-, ϣⲉⲛ-, and ϫⲉⲙ- may be assimilated to ⲙ̄ before a following ⲡ or ⲙ. Note that in ⲉⲛ⸗, ϣⲉⲛ⸗ and ϫⲉⲙ⸗ the syllabic ⲉⲛ is the stressed vowel of the word. ⲉⲣ- is often written as ⲉⲣ-. Suffixes are added to these forms regularly: ϫⲉⲙⲧ, ϫⲉⲙⲕ, ϫⲉⲙⲓ, ϫⲉⲙϥ, ϫⲉⲙⲥ, ϫⲉⲙⲛ, ϫⲉⲙ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ, ϫⲉⲙⲟⲩ. ⲁⲓ⸗ is inflected like ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ in §11.2.
17.4 There is a certain ambiguity surrounding the terms transitive and intransitive in classifying Coptic verbs. The strictest definition of a transitive verb requires (1) that its direct object be marked with the "preposition" ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗) and (2) that the general equivalence ⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ = ⲕⲟⲧϥ be attested for the verb, i.e. that the verb possess prenominal and presuffixal forms. A less strict definition would require a transitive verb to satisfy either, but not necessariy both, of the above criteria. This is approximately the position adopted by W. E. Crum in his Coptic Dictionary, the standard lexical work in the field. Verbs not satisfying either of these criteria are labeled intransitive or are left unlabeled.
In the present work the designation transitive is extended to include verbs having prenominal and presuffixal forms that correspond exactly in meaning to the infinitive with ⲉ or ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ (e.g. ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ, ϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ). Thus ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉϥ = ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ and ϣⲉⲛϥ = ϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ are taken as fully equivalent to the criterion ⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ = ⲕⲟⲧϥ above. A verb like ⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ (to seize) is considered transitive because its direct object is marked by ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, even though it does not have prenominal or presuffixal forms. It seems reasonable, therefore, to extend the designation transitive even further and to include verbs like ⲛⲁⲩ and ⲉⲙⲓ (to understand), both of which normally have an object with ⲉ, but neither of which has prenominal or presuffixal forms. In other words, as long as there is no lexical contrast requiring the preposition ⲉ to have the semantic force of a true preposition (for, in regard to), we have generally labeled verbs with ⲉ-objects as transitive in the glossary of this work. Some subjectiveness remains, however, and one can sympathize with W. E. Crum in his desire to drop the terms transitive and intransitive altogether (op. cit., p. vii).
ⲙⲟⲩϯ vb. tr. to call (ⲉ), summon, name. Note the constructions:
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They named him John. |
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲣⲁⲛ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They called his name John. |
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ. |
| They named him after his father. |
18.1 The First Present (Pres. I):
| ϯⲣⲓⲙⲓ | I am weeping |
| ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (m.s.) are weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (f.s.) are weeping |
| ϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ | he is weeping |
| ⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ | she is weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲣⲓⲙⲓ | we are weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (pl.) are weeping |
| ⲥⲉⲣⲓⲙⲓ | they are weeping |
With nominal subject:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| The man is weeping. |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| A man is weeping. |
The prefix of the 2nd pers. fem. sing. also appears as ⲧⲉⲣ- or ⲧⲣ̄-. ⲟⲩⲟⲛ must be used to introduce an indefinite nominal subject.
The First Present usually describes action, activity, or process in progress at the time of speaking. It is therefore equivalent to the English progressive present (am weeping, am writing, etc.) except in those English verbs that do not normally use this form (e.g. think, know, see, hear, understand, wish, hope, believe), where its equivalent is the simple present: ϯⲉⲙⲓ I understand, ϯⲛⲁⲩ I see, etc.
The First Present is negated with ⲛ̀ before the subject pronoun and ⲁⲛ after the verb: ⲛ̀ϯⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ I am not weeping. The second pers. ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ usually appears as ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, with ⲅ for ⲕ by assimilation to the preceding ⲛ̀ and with a shift of the supralinear stroke: ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ to ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ (i.e. from əng- to nəg-). A similar shift of the stroke occurs in the 3rd pers. sing.: ⲛ̀ϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, ⲛ̀ⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ. ⲛ̀ is optional before a nominal subject: (ⲙ̀) ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ. An indefinite subject requires the negation ⲙⲙⲟⲛ; no ⲁⲛ is used: ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ⲟⲩ)ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ no man (or no one) is weeping. As in the negative of predications of existence, the indefinite article is usually omitted if the negation is felt as general rather than particular.
The infinitives ϣⲉ ⲛⲁ⸗ and ⲓ are not used in the First Present.
With the sole exception of ⲟⲩⲱϣ (to wish, love), the prenominal and presuffixal forms of the infinitive cannot be used in the First Present. Certain compound verbs are an exception to this rule and will be considered in a later lesson.
The pronominal prefixes of the First Present and its negative are also used before adverbial predicates:
| ϯϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| I am in the house. |
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲉϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| They are not in the house. |
18.2 The First Future (Fut. I) is formed by prefixing ⲛⲁ- to the Infinitive. Inflection is exactly like that of the First Present, including its negative:
| ϯⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲭⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ… | |
| Neg. | ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, ⲛ̀ⲭⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ… |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ | |
| Neg. | (ⲙ̀) ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ | |
| Neg. | ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ |
The First Future corresponds to the English simple future (I shall write, I shall go) or to the intended (planned) future (I am going to write, going to go). The 2nd pers. pl. commonly appears as ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲁ- for expected ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ-.
18.3 The term intransitive as applied to Coptic verbs requires a further comment (cf. §17.4). Coptic has many intransitive verbs, such as verbs of motion (ⲉⲓ, ϣⲉ ⲛⲁ⸗, ⲙⲟϣⲓ) and verbs denoting activities involving no direct object (ⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲛⲕⲟⲧ, etc.), whose classification is not problematic. But the intransitive use of verbs that are also transitive requires some attention. In certain situations any transitive verb may be used intransitively: the object may be omitted because it is understood from the context, or the speaker may wish to predicate the action of the verb without reference to any particular object (e.g. we plowed all day as opposed to we plowed the field). This usage is as commonplace in Coptic as it is in English and will not be noted in the vocabularies or final glossary. There is another type of intransitive usage, however, that is quite different. Compare the following:
| (1) | ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥϫⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϥⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| when he had completed his days |
| (2) | ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲉϥⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| when his days were completed |
(1) is the normal active transitive use of ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ; (2) involves a change in voice from active to passive (or medio-passive, as a more general term). For speakers of English this medio-passive usage offers no problem since many English verbs have the same ambiguity: he closed the door vs. the door closed; he burned the paper vs. the paper burned. In the vocabularies and final glossary the designation intr. before the meaning of a verb whose transitive meaning is given first will always refer to this medio-passive usage. Of the transitive verbs introduced up to this point, the following have important medio-passive uses:
18.4 Infinitives of the type ⲕⲱϯ (to turn), with stressed -ⲱ- and final unstressed -ⲉ, have the same prenominal and presuffixal forms as the type ⲕⲱⲧ:
| ⲕⲱϯ | ⲕⲉⲧ- | ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ | to turn |
ⲛⲟⲩϫ (to throw), with -ⲟⲩ- for -ⲱ- because of initial ⲛ (cf. p. xvi) also belongs to this type; the infinitive ⲛⲟⲩϫ mentioned in Voc. 14 is a less frequent variant. Infinitives with -ⲱⲱ- and final -ⲉ have similar forms:
| ϣⲱⲱϭⲉ | ϣⲉⲉϭⲉ- | ϣⲟⲟϭ⸗ | to strike, wound |
18.5 Greek verbs occur frequently in Coptic texts. These have a single fixed infinitive form resembling the Greek imperative form and are inflected like any other Coptic verb. Examples:
| ⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | πιστεύω | to believe (ⲉ) |
| ⲉⲡⲓⲧⲓⲙⲁ | ἐπιτιμάω | to rebuke (ⲛⲁ⸗) |
| ⲡⲉⲓⲣⲁⲍⲉ | πειράζω | to tempt (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗) |
| ⲛⲏⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | νηστεύω | to fast |
| ⲁⲣⲭⲓ | ἄρχω | to begin (+ ⲛ̀ + Inf.: to begin to do something) |
And the Greek verbs in §18.5 above.
19.1 The relative forms of the First Present and First Future employ the relative pronoun ⲉⲧ, ⲉⲧⲉ. When the relative pronoun is the subject of the relative clause, no further pronominal subject element is required:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ |
| the man who is weeping |
| ⲛⲉⲧ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| those who hear my words |
| ⲙⲙⲁⲧⲟⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the soldiers who will seize him |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| the men who will bring the silver |
When the relative pronoun is not the subject of the relative clause, a subject noun or pronoun and resumptive pronouns are required; the relative pronoun combines with the various subject elements as follows:
| ⲉϯ | who/which I… |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲕ | who/which you… |
| ⲉⲧⲉ(ⲣ) | etc. |
| ⲉⲧⲉϥ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲥ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲧⲟⲩ | (note this form) |
With nominal subject:
| ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| who/which the man… |
Study the following examples carefully:
| ⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉϯⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| the words which I am writing |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉⲕϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ |
| the man whom you are seeking |
| ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲉⲧⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱϩ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲥ |
| the city in which they are settling |
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲭⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ |
| the child whom he will leave behind |
| ⲛⲉⲛⲧⲟⲗⲏ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ ⲛⲁⲛ |
| the commandments which he will give to us |
| ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲛⲁⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲕ |
| the money which your father will entrust to you |
When the verb of the relative clause is negative Pres. I or Fut. I, the relative pronoun is ⲉⲧⲉ and subject as well as resumptive pronouns must be expressed in all constructions:
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| the men who do not heed me |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| the man who will not heed me |
| ⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ |
| the words which we do not understand |
| ⲛϯⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ |
| the villages which they will not seize |
19.2 The direct object of a transitive verb may be used in a reflexive sense:
| ⲁⲓⲛⲟϫⲧ ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. |
| I threw myself to the ground. |
| ⲁϥⲓⲁϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲓⲁⲣⲟ. |
| He washed himself in the water of the river. |
Some verbs have special meanings in the reflexive, e.g.
ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ (1) to return, go back (to: ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ ⲉ, ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉ, ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϣⲁ, ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ, ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ); (2) to repeat an action, usually coordinated, as in
| ⲁϥⲕⲟⲧϥ ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He wept again. |
or with ⲉ + Inf., as in
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲕⲟⲧⲛ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲥ. |
| We did not see her again. |
The verb ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ occurs optionally with reflexive suffixes: ⲁϥⲧⲱⲛϥ = ⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ (he arose). After stem-final -ⲛ the 2nd pers. masc. sing. suffix -ⲕ often appears as -ⲅ: ⲁⲕⲧⲱⲛⲕ you arose.
The reflexive verb ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗, to stand, is actually a compound of ⲟϩⲓ (a form of the verb ⲱϩⲓ, to stand) and the preposition ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ to or at the foot/feet of. ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ itself consists of the prep. ⲉ and the noun ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ foot, which belongs to that small group of nouns that may take pronominal suffixes in a possessive sense: ⲣⲁⲧ my foot, ⲣⲁⲧⲕ your foot, etc.
19.3 Infinitives of the type ⲥⲱⲧⲡ, to choose, constitute the largest class of verbs in Coptic and have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲥⲱⲧⲡ | ⲥⲉⲧⲡ- | ⲥⲟⲧⲡ⸗ |
When the final consonant of the infinitive is a blmnr consonant, the presuffixal form is usually written with -ⲉ- before the suffixes -ⲧ, -ⲕ, -ϥ, -ⲥ: ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉϥ, ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉⲧ, ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉⲕ, etc. When the final consonant is -ϩ, spelling alternates between -ϩ and -ⲁϩ in the unbound form: ⲟⲩⲱⲛⲁϩ or ⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ.
When the second consonant of the Infinitive is ϩ (more rarely ϣ), the presuffixal form may have -ⲁ- instead of -ⲟ-:
| ⲟⲩⲱϩⲉⲙ | ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ- | ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to repeat |
| ⲑⲱϩⲉⲙ | ⲑⲁϩⲉⲙ- | ⲑⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to invite |
When the infinitive begins with ⲙ or ⲛ, -ⲱ- is replaced with -ⲟⲩ-:
| ⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ | ⲙⲉⲩⲧ- | ⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧ⸗ | to kill |
| ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁϩⲉⲙ- | ⲛⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to rescue |
20.1 The Inflected (Causative) Infinitive.
| ⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | that I hear |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | that you hear |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| that the man hear |
Negation is with ϣⲧⲉⲙ- placed either before the whole expression or before the infinitive: ϣⲧⲉⲙⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ or ⲧⲣⲁϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ that I not hear.
The Inflected Infinitive is used in the following ways:
As a complementary infinitive, with ⲉ, after appropriate verbs of wishing or commanding when the subject of the infinitive is different from that of the main verb. Contrast
| ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉ ϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I want to remain here. |
| ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲕϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I want you to remain here. |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉϣⲧⲉⲙⲧⲣⲉⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| We want you not to go away. |
It is not incorrect, however, to say ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲁϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ, with no change in subject.
Like the ordinary infinitive with ⲉ, the Inflected Infinitive is used in a wide range of result or purpose expressions, often corresponding to English "for… to…"
| ⲁ-ⲡⲥⲏⲟⲩ ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| The time arrived (lit. was fulfilled) for us to leave. |
| ⲁϥϯ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲝⲟⲩⲥⲓⲁ ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲛⲟⲩϫ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲛⲡ︤ⲛ︦ⲁ︥ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲕⲁⲑⲁⲣⲧⲟⲛ. |
| He gave him the power (for him) to cast out unclean spirits. |
Because of the frequent use of the Inflected Infinitive with ⲉ, we shall spell this as a single unit, as in the preceding examples.
With the preposition ϧⲉⲛ + the definite article ⲡ- the Inflected Inf. has the force of a temporal clause with "while, as":
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥⲙⲟϣⲓ |
| while/as he was walking |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲃ ϣⲗⲏⲗ |
| as the priest was praying |
The tense of such "clauses" depends on the context. They occur frequently after introductory ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ:
| ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲇⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥϣⲉⲙϣⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ… |
| It happened, however, as he was serving in the temple, that… |
After the preposition ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ and without an article the Inflected Inf. is equivalent to a temporal clause with "after":
| ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲁⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ |
| after I saw them, … |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| after his father left, … |
20.2 Impersonal Expressions. The impersonal use of ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ was introduced in Vocabulary 9. There are several other impersonal expressions, some verbal, some anomalous, which occur frequently:
ϩⲱϯ it is necessary (neg. ⲛ̀ ϩⲱϯ ⲁⲛ), followed by the Inflected Inf. The subject of the infinitive may be anticipated with the preposition ⲉ; an untranslatable ⲡⲉ often co-occurs with ϩⲱϯ.
| ϩⲱϯ (ⲡⲉ) ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| It is necessary that we flee. |
| ϩⲱϯ (ⲡⲉ) ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| It is necessary that I speak with you. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ it is possible; neg.: ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ it is not possible. The subject of a following infinitive may be introduced with ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, with the Inflected Inf., or both:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲉ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| It is not possible to understand his words. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲉ ⲉⲙⲓ. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ) ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ. |
| It is not possible for us to understand. |
ⲥϣⲉ (or ⲥϣⲉ) it is appropriate, proper, fitting; neg.: ⲛ̀ ⲥϣⲉ ⲁⲛ or ⲙⲉϣϣⲉ. The subject of the infinitive may be anticipated with prep. ⲉ.
| ⲥϣⲉ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. |
| It is proper for him to enter. |
| ⲛ̀ ⲥϣⲉ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| It is not proper for you to remain here. |
The relative forms ⲡⲉⲧⲉ ⲥϣⲉ, ⲛⲉⲧⲉ ⲥϣⲉ, what is proper (neg.: ⲡⲉⲧⲉ/ⲛⲉⲧⲉ ⲙⲉϣϣⲉ) are often used as substantives.
ⲣⲁⲛⲁ⸗ to please, used impersonally with subject ⲥ- and an object suffix, or with a personal subject and a reflexive suffix. The suffix on ⲁⲛⲁ⸗ is required; a nominal object is anticipated by a suffix and introduced with ⲛ̀.
Study the following examples:
| ⲁⲥⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ. |
| It pleased him to come (i.e. he came willingly) into this world. |
| ⲁⲥⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲙⲏϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲩⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ. |
| It pleased the crowd (for them) to see this. |
| ⲁⲓⲣⲁⲛⲁⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| It pleased me to hear your words. |
Note also the partially synonymous verb ⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁ⸗ to be willing, desire, which is used only with a personal subject and reflexive suffix:
| ⲁⲓⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| I wanted to write to you (about) these things. |
ⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁ⸗ is not used in the First Present; ⲣⲁⲛⲁ⸗ has no such restriction.
20.3 The verb ⲡⲉϫⲉ-, ⲡⲉϫⲁ⸗, followed by its subject, is equivalent to ϫⲱ in the First Perfect, but is used only to report speech, with ϫⲉ:
| ⲡⲉϫⲉ-ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϫⲉ… |
| The old man said, "… |
| ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲏⲓ ϫⲉ… |
| He said to me, "… |
20.4 Infinitives of the types ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲉⲗ, to console, and ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ, to disturb, have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲗ̄ | ⲥⲗ̄ⲥⲗ̄- | ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ⸗ |
| ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ | ϣⲑⲉⲣⲧⲉⲣ- | ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ⸗ |
With the exceptions of the infinitives treated below in Lesson 26, the remaining types of transitive infinitives do not constitute regular classes of any significant size. The following verbs of minor types have occurred in the lessons up to this point:
| ϣⲉⲙϣⲓ | ϣⲉⲙϣⲉ- | ϣⲉⲙϣⲏⲧ⸗ | to serve |
| ⲥϧⲁⲓ | ⲥϧⲉ- | ⲥϧⲏⲧ⸗ | to write |
| ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ- | ⲥⲟⲩⲱⲛ⸗ | to know |
| ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ | ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲉⲩ- | ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ⸗ | to send |
When the presuffixal form of the infinitive ends in a diphthong, as in ⲥϧⲏⲧ⸗ and ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ⸗, the object suffix of the 3rd pers. pl. regularly appears as -ⲥⲟⲩ: ⲥϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ to write them, ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩⲥⲟⲩ to send them. The -ⲥ- of this form sometimes appears also before other suffixes, e.g. ⲥϩⲁⲓⲥϥ̄ to write it.
And the impersonal expressions ϩⲱϯ, ⲥϣⲉ, ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ.
21.1 The Imperfect.
| ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ | I was building |
| ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ | you were building |
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲕⲱⲧ | etc. |
| ⲛⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲥⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲛⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ |
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲕⲱⲧ |
| the man was building |
The Imperfect is optionally, but often, followed by an untranslatable ⲡⲉ: ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ, ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ, etc. Negation is with ⲁⲛ: ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ (ⲡⲉ), ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ (ⲡⲉ), etc.
The Imperfect is used to describe an action, activity, or process as in progress in past time and is normally the equivalent of the English past progressive unless idiom requires the simple past, e.g. ⲛⲁⲩⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ they knew (not: they were knowing). It also often conveys the meaning of habitual or recurring activity in the past: they used to build, they would build.
Relative clauses containing an Imperfect are introduced with the relative pronoun ⲉⲧⲉ or, more frequently, with ⲉ- prefixed directly to the verbal form:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲉⲛⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| the man who was walking on the road |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the house which they were building |
Pronominal resumption of the subject is required. In general, the prenominal and suffixal (prepronominal) forms of the infinitive may not be used in the Imperfect.
21.2 The Qualitative. Many verbs possess a second lexical form known as the qualitative. The qualitative describes a state or quality resulting from the action, activity, or process expressed by the Infinitive; it is most conveniently taken as equivalent to English "to be" plus an adjective. The qualitative of transitive verbs is passive from the English point of view. E.g.
| Inf. | ⲕⲱⲧ | to build | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ | to be built (i.e. in a fully constructed state) |
| Inf. | ϩⲱⲡ | to hide | Q. | ϩⲏⲡ | to be hidden, secret |
The form of the qualitative is more or less predictable for verbs belonging to the main classes:
type
| ⲕⲱⲧ: | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲣ: | Q. | ⲙⲏⲣ |
| ⲏⲡ | to be reckoned, ascribed to (ⲉ) |
| ϫⲏⲕ (ⲉⲃⲟⲗ) | to be finished, done, perfect |
| ⲃⲏⲗ | to be loosened, undone, untied, dissolved |
| ϣⲏⲡ | to be received, acceptable |
| ⲙⲉϩ | to be full |
| ⲟⲩⲉϩ | to live, dwell, be |
| ⲙⲏⲣ | to be bound |
| ⲑⲏⲙ | to be shut |
| ⲟⲩⲏⲛ | to be open |
type
| ⲕⲱϯ: | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ |
| ⲛⲟⲩϫ: | Q. | ⲛⲏϫ |
| ⲕⲏⲧ | to be turned, turning, circulating |
| ⲛⲏϫ | to be lying, reclining (esp. at table); to be |
type
| ⲙⲓⲥⲓ: | Q. | ⲙⲟⲥⲓ |
| ⲙⲟⲥi | to be born |
| ϣⲟⲃⲓ | to be different, various |
type
| ⲥⲱⲧⲡ: | Q. | ⲥⲟⲧⲡ |
| ⲫⲱϧⲧ: | Q. | ⲫⲁϧⲧ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛϩ | to be manifest, clear, plain |
| ϭⲟⲣⲡ | to be known, revealed, clear |
| ⲣⲟⲕϩ | to be burned, destroyed by fire |
| ⲫⲁϧⲧ | to be prostrated, bowing |
type
| ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲉⲗ: | Q. | ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ |
| ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ: | Q. | ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ |
| ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ | to be consoled |
| ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ | to be disturbed, upset |
Otherwise, there is some irregularity:
| ⲭⲱ: | Q. | ⲭⲏ | to be situated, lying; to be |
| ⲥϧⲁⲓ: | Q. | ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ | to be in writing, written |
| ⲥⲓ: | Q. | ⲥⲏⲟⲩ | to be sated, full |
Note that ⲭⲏ, ⲛⲏϫ, and ⲟⲩⲉϩ may all correspond to English "to be" when location or position is involved.
The qualitative is a verb and may stand in place of the Infinitive in the First Present and the Imperfect, together with their negative and relative forms. It is especially important to keep in mind that the qualitative does not express a passive action (cf. §13.4); it describes the state that the subject is (or was) in:
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲟ ⲑⲏⲙ ⲡⲉ. | The door was shut. |
| ⲛ̀ϯϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ ⲁⲛ. | I am not disturbed. |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲏϫ ϩⲓ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. | The man is lying on the ground. |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲙⲏⲣ | the men who are bound |
The qualitative may not be used in any of the other conjugations introduced up to this point, including the various constructions with the Infinitive and Inflected Infinitive.
21.3 Prepositional phrases with ϧⲉⲛ + a noun with the indefinite article occur very frequently as adverbs:
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | completely |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϣⲥ̄ⲛⲉ | suddenly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϭⲉⲡⲏ | hurriedly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲏⲓ | truly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲁϣⲓ | joyfully |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϧⲓⲥⲓ | with difficulty, anxiously |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ | agitatedly |
For ϣⲥ̄ⲛⲉ, ⲙⲏⲓ, and ϭⲉⲡⲏ see the Vocabulary below.
22.1 Possession is predicated by the use of ⲟⲩⲟⲛ and ⲟⲩⲟⲛ compounded with the preposition ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗. There are two sets of forms:
| (A) | (B) | |
|---|---|---|
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛϯ- | I have |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲕ- | you have |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ- | etc. |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧϥ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲥ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲥ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲛ | ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲛ̄- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲏⲧⲉⲛ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲩ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ- |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man has |
And similarly for the negative: (A) ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁⲓ I do not have; (B) ⲙⲙⲟⲛϯ-. Set (B) is actually a reduced proclitic form of (A). Both sets may be accompanied by an untranslatable ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ (there).
If the possessor is pronominal (i.e. suffixal), an immediately following object is unmarked:
| (A) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| (B) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧϥ-ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He has a wife. |
But if some word intervenes (and this is possible only in set A), the object is marked with ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗).
| (A) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He has a wife. |
If the possessor is a noun, the object is usually not marked:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| The man has a wife. |
Pronominal objects are used only with set (A) and are attached directly to the subject suffixes. These are generally limited to the third person forms:
| m.s. | -ϥ, -ⲥϥ̄ |
| f.s. | -ⲥ |
| ⲥ.pl. | -ⲥⲟⲩ |
as in ⲟⲩⲟⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓϥ̄, ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲥϥ̄ I have it (m.), ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲥ̄ you have it (f.), ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲟⲩ he has them.
We have seen that the genitive is expressed with ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ after indefinite nouns (ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ), nouns with demonstrative prefixes (ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ), and nouns with a following modifier (ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ϭⲁⲗⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ). ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗ is used similarly when the possessor is pronominal:
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲓ |
| a servant of mine |
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ |
| this book of yours |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ |
| three sons of his |
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗ may be used predicatively:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ. |
| He has a large house. |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ |
| the house that belongs to him |
ϣⲟⲡ ⲛⲁ⸗ is also sometimes used to predicate possession:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϩⲁⲧ ϣⲟⲡ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| I have no money. |
The occasional use of ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ to indicate possession should also be noted. We have already seen an instance of this in the idiom ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ lit., there is/is-not power in.
22.2 Possessive pronouns, corresponding to English mine, yours, his, hers, etc., are formed by adding the appropriate pronominal suffix to m.s. ⲫⲱ⸗, f.s. ⲧⲱ⸗, c.pl. ⲛⲟⲩ⸗; thus, ⲫⲱⲓ, ⲫⲱⲕ, ⲫⲱ, ⲫⲱϥ, ⲫⲱⲥ, ⲫⲱⲛ, ⲫⲱⲧⲉⲛ, ⲫⲱⲟⲩ, and similarly for ⲧⲱ⸗ and ⲛⲟⲩ⸗. When used as predicates of ⲡⲉ- sentences, they serve to predicate possession:
| ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲟⲩϥ ⲛⲉ |
| the books which are his |
| ⲫⲱⲓ ⲡⲉ. |
| It is mine. |
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲟⲓ ⲫⲱϥ ⲡⲉ. |
| This ship is his. |
| ⲛⲟⲩⲕ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are yours. |
| ⲧⲱⲕ ⲧⲉ. |
| It (f.) is yours. |
The proclitic pronouns ⲫⲁ-, ⲑⲁ-, and ⲛⲁ- are used to express "that of, that which pertains or belongs to". Number and gender are determined by an understood or expressed antecedent. The exact meaning must be gained from the context:
| ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ |
| the affairs of my father |
| ⲛⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲉϥⲥⲟⲛ |
| his children and those of his brother |
| ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ |
| the inhabitants of the city |
| ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲁⲓⲙⲓⲛⲓ |
| people of this sort |
22.3 The qualitative (continued). Many intransitive verbs of motion or position (e.g. ⲙⲟϣⲓ, ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗, ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ) do not have a strong contrast in meaning between infinitive and qualitative, the process and state involved being about the same thing. ⲟϩⲉ and ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ are in fact qualitative forms that have usurped the role of the infinitives ⲱϩⲓ and ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ for all practical purposes. But note the following:
| Inf. | Q. | |
|---|---|---|
| ⲃⲱⲕ | ⲃⲏⲕ | to be going, be on the way there |
| ⲓ | ⲛⲏⲟⲩ | to be coming, be on the way here, be about to come, be about to arrive |
| ⲫⲱⲧ | ⲫⲏⲧ | to be fleeing, running, in pursuit |
| ϧⲱⲛⲧ | ϧⲉⲛⲧ | to be near, nigh, at hand |
| ϭⲱ | ϭⲉⲉⲧ | to remain, wait, stay, be |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲛ | ⲙⲏⲛ | to be enduring, lasting, continual |
| ⲁⲗⲏⲓ | ⲁⲗⲏⲩ | to be riding, mounted |
The infinitives ⲉⲓ and ⲃⲱⲕ may not be used in the First Present and Imperfect; only the qualitatives ⲛⲏⲟⲩ and ⲃⲏⲕ appear in these conjugations. For the other verbs the qualitative is preferred, but the infinitive is also found. The future nuance of ⲛⲏⲟⲩ is especially noteworthy.
There are many intransitive verbs for which the infinitive and qualitative bear a "becoming"/"being" relationship to each other:
| Inf. | ϣⲱⲡⲓ | to become, come into existence |
| Q. | ϣⲟⲡ | to be, to exist |
| Inf. | ⲃⲟⲕⲓ | to become pregnant |
| Q. | ⲉⲉⲧ | to be pregnant |
Included among these are many verbs with -ⲟ- or -ⲁ- in the final stem syllable:
| Inf. | ⲛϣⲟⲧ | to become hard |
| Q. | ⲛⲁϣⲧ | to be hard |
| Inf. | ⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ | to become well |
| Q. | ⲟⲩⲟϫ | to be well |
| Inf. | ϩⲕⲟ | to become hungry |
| Q. | ϩⲟⲕⲉⲣ | to be hungry |
| Inf. | ⲁⲓⲁⲓ | to increase |
| Q. | ⲟⲓ | to be great |
| Inf. | ⲟⲩⲟⲡ | to become holy |
| Q. | ⲟⲩⲁⲃ | to be holy |
23.1 The Circumstantial.
| ⲉⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | I, hearing |
| ⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | you, hearing |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| the man, hearing |
The Circumstantial is used only in subordinate clauses modifying either a particular element of the main clause or the main clause as a whole. Such clauses describe an activity or state existing simultaneously with the time designated by the verb of the main clause and do not, in themselves, have a tense. They correspond to various English constructions: nominative absolutes, participial modifiers, or temporal clauses with "as, while, when" and a progressive verb form. Typical uses in Coptic include
subject complement:
| ⲉⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ, ⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲏϣ. |
| Standing near the temple, I saw a great crowd. |
object complement:
| ⲁⲩϩⲉⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲁⲅⲟⲣⲁ. |
| They found the man sitting in the marketplace. |
| ⲁⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲩⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| We saw them walking on the road. |
complement to the entire main clause:
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ϫⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ, ⲁⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ. |
| As our teacher was saying these things, a great wonder occurred. |
If the context requires it, circumstantial clauses may also be translated as causal, concessive, or conditional clauses.
There are several important special uses of circumstantial clauses in Coptic:
They are regularly used as relative clauses to modify an indefinite antecedent. Contrast
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| the man who understands my words |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| a man who understands my words |
Such indefinite antecedents include ϩⲗⲓ, ⲟⲩⲁⲓ, ⲟⲩⲟⲛ, and ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩⲟⲛ. Further examples will be found in the exercises.
Certain verbs are regularly followed by the Circumstantial of a complementary verb:
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲩⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϫⲱⲣϩ ⲧⲏⲣϥ. |
| They continued talking the whole night. |
| ⲁⲥⲗⲟ ⲉⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| She stopped crying. |
The Circumstantial of ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ is regularly used to introduce direct quotation after appropriate verbs:
| ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣⲃ̄ ⲛⲁⲩ, ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ… |
| He answered them, saying… |
The Circumstantial is not negated. Instead, the circumstantial prefix ⲉ-, also called the circumstantial converter, is added to the negative of the First Present:
| ⲉ-ⲛ̀ϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
| I, not hearing |
| ⲉ-ⲛ̀ⲅⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
| you, not hearing |
After ⲉ- the syllabic pronunciation of ⲛ is given up; the stroke is not needed, but is sometimes retained.
23.2 Nouns as adjectives. In Coptic, as in English, a large number of nouns may do double duty as adjectives (cf. pencil sharpener, bookstore, brick wall, etc.). The order is reversed in Coptic, with the modifying noun second, preceded by the adjectival linking ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
| ⲟⲩⲁⲫⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲧ |
| a silver cup |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ϣⲁϥⲉ |
| a desert place |
| ⲡⲉϥⲥⲙⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲥⲱⲙⲁ |
| his corporeal form (lit. body-form) |
| ⲟⲩⲓⲁⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲭⲣⲱⲙ |
| a fiery river |
Such items are very frequent, but not as freely formed as their English counterparts. In some cases two translations are possible: ⲟⲩⲁⲫⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲣⲡ a wine cup or a cup of wine. Note that, as with adjectives, the construction differs from the genitive by the absence of an article on the second noun.
Several words form a large number of compounds whose meanings are more or less completely predictable. Among these are
ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ (place of), as in
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ϣⲱⲡⲓ | dwelling place |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̄ ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | eating place, refectory |
| ⲙⲁ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲟϣⲓ | road, path |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲕⲁ-ⲱⲓⲕ | pantry (place for putting bread) |
ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ (seller of, vendor of, dealer in), as in
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲃⲧ | fish-monger |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲁϥ | meat-seller |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲣⲡ | wine-seller |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲧ | dealer in silver |
A glance through the final Glossary will provide dozens of further examples.
The nouns ⲣⲱⲙⲓ and ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ often occur redundantly in this construction; the order of the nouns may be reversed:
| ⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| his sister (lit., woman-sister) |
| ⲡϩⲁⲙϣⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the carpenter (lit., man-carpenter) |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲁϫⲓ |
| the enemy (lit., enemy-man) |
Noun-noun modification does not always correspond exactly to English idiom, but little difficulty will be met in translating these constructions. Most of them will not be given separate listing in the vocabularies or Glossary.
24.1 The Second Present has exactly the same inflection as the Circumstantial. This ambiguity poses a serious difficulty for the reader of Sahidic Coptic which can be resolved only by a careful study of the context. The uses of the Second Present parallel those of the Second Perfect:
emphasis on an adverbial element:
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲁⲓ ϣⲟⲡ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲟⲃⲓ. |
| It is because of my sins that these things happen to me. |
preceding various interrogative expressions:
| ⲉⲕϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whom do you seek? |
| ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲟⲩ? |
| Why is he weeping? |
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ? |
| Where is he? |
When ⲑⲱⲛ is used with a nominal subject, the usual idiom is ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ N? Where is N?, without the expected ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ? |
| Where is your father? |
The alternate construction (ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲑⲱⲛ?) is less frequent.
Clauses containing second tense forms are negated with ⲁⲛ:
| ⲉⲓⲟⲩⲉϩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ⲁⲛ. |
| It is not here that I dwell. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲁⲛ. |
| It is not for you that I did it. |
As may be seen from the translation, the negation applies to the adverbial element and is not a negation of the verb proper.
24.2 The Bipartite Conjugation (Present-Imperfect System). The First Present, its relative forms, the Circumstantial, the Second Present, and the Imperfect comprise a system:
| Pres. I | ϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Rel. Pres. I | ⲉⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| Circumstantial | ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Pres. II | ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
Following the penetrating analysis of H. J. Polotsky (see Bibliography), Coptic scholars now refer to this system as the Bipartite Conjugation. This term arises from the fact that the base form, the First Present, consists only of subject + predicate, with no conjugational prefix. The remaining forms of the system consist of this bipartite nucleus preceded by a set of elements called converters: the relative converter ⲉⲧ/ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ, the circumstantial converter ⲉ/ⲉⲣⲉ, the second tense converter ⲉ/ⲉⲣⲉ, and the imperfect converter ⲛⲁ/ⲛⲁⲣⲉ. The term tripartite is applied to all other Coptic verbal conjugations, which consist of a verbal prefix + subject + predicate, e.g. the First Perfect ⲁ⸗ϥ-ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. The First Future is a special case and will be treated in the following lesson.
The conjugations belonging to the Bipartite Conjugation may have three kinds of predicates: infinitives, qualitatives, or adverbial predicates (i.e. adverbs or prepositional phrases). In the tripartite conjugations only the infinitive may be used. The conjugations of the Bipartite Conjugation, as we have already seen, characterize an action as durative, continuing, or (less commonly) habitual. The following features of the Bipartite Conjugation are equally distinctive:
The Imperfect may be expanded into a subsystem of its own by the prefixation of the other converters:
| Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Imperfect Rel. | ⲉⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| Imperfect Circum. | ⲉ-ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
These forms have all the characteristics of, and belong to, the Bipartite Conjugation. The relative forms have already been introduced. The circumstantial forms are used syntactically exactly like the Circumstantial (of Pres. I). The past tense of the action is explicitly marked, however, while in the Circumstantial it must be gained from the context. Second tense forms of the Imperfect may occur, but they are too rare for consideration here. All verbal forms containing the imperfect converter may be followed by ⲡⲉ.
24.3 Numbers (continued). The 'teens are formed by prefixing ⲙⲉⲧ- to special forms of the units. ⲙⲉⲧ- is a proclitic form of ⲙⲉⲧ ten:
| 11 | m. | ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲁⲓ | f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲓ |
| 12 | m. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ | f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ(ⲉ) |
| 13 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲟⲙⲧ | ||
| 14 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | ||
| 15 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϯⲟⲩ | ||
| 16 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ||
| 17 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲁϣϥ(ⲉ) | ||
| 18 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲙⲏⲛ |
Construction is the same as that of the units:
| ⲙⲉⲧϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| thirteen men |
25.1 The relative, imperfect, circumstantial, and second tense converters may be used with the First Perfect, the First Future, existential and possessive predications, and copulative sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. The relative forms for all of these have already been discussed. The second tense of the First Perfect, i.e. the Second Perfect, was introduced in Lesson 14. The second tense forms of existential, possessive, and copulative sentences are too rare for inclusion here.
| Neg. | ||
|---|---|---|
| First Perfect | ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Perf. I Rel. | ⲉⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Perf. I Circum. | ⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Pluperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (ⲡⲉ) |
| Second Perfect | ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
The imperfect of the First Perfect (ⲛⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ) corresponds to the English pluperfect: he had heard, he had written. The circumstantial of the First Perfect is used to describe an action as completed prior to the tense of the verb in the main clause.
| ⲉ-ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ, ⲁϥⲥϧⲁⲓ… |
| Having sat down, he wrote… |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩ. |
| We found him dead (lit., having died). |
| First Future | ϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Rel. | ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Circum. | ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Second Future | ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The circumstantial of the First Future describes an action as imminent, about to take place, with respect to the tense of the main clause:
| ⲉⲓⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ. |
| As I was about to leave, he summoned me. |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉϥⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ. |
| We found him on the point of death. |
The imperfect of the First Future describes an action as imminent in past time:
| ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲁⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉ ⲡϫⲟⲓ (ⲡⲉ). |
| I was about to get on the ship. |
This form is commonly called the imperfectum futuri. The Second Future (ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ) has all the normal uses of a second tense form. Special uses of both these conjugations will be mentioned later on.
The First Future and its related system are formally an off-shoot of the Present System, with ⲛⲁ- inserted before the infinitive. It has no other characteristics of the Bipartite Conjugation, however: (1) it is not durative (except with certain aspectually neutral verbs, e.g. ⲣⲁϣⲓ); (2) only the Infinitive may occur in predicate position; (3) the prenominal and prepronominal forms of the Infinitive occur freely.
| Existential and Possessive | ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Relative | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Circumstantial | ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
The circumstantial forms describe a state simultaneous to the tense of the main clause:
| ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲱⲓⲕ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| There being no food there, we left. |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| We found him unable to speak. |
The imperfect forms simply place the state in past time:
| ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ (or ⲛⲉⲩⲟⲛ-) ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ (ⲡⲉ). |
| There was a man. |
| ⲛⲉⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙⲏϣ ⲛ̀ ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ (ⲡⲉ). |
| He had many wives. |
Copulative sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| Relative | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| Circumstantial | ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ | ⲉ-ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ |
The circumstantial and imperfect are used as above.
The circumstantial forms of all the subsystems listed above have a frequent use as relative clauses after indefinite antecedents:
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲁϥⲕⲉⲧ-ⲟⲩⲏⲓ |
| a man who had built a house |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲩⲥⲧⲏⲣⲓⲟⲛ ⲉⲩⲛⲁϭⲟⲣⲡϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| a mystery which is about to be revealed |
| ⲟⲩⲭⲏⲣⲁ ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁⲥ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| a widow who has no son |
| ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲭⲏⲣⲁ ⲧⲉ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ |
| a boy whose mother is a widow |
The circumstantial converter ⲉⲣⲉ- is sometimes used improperly for ⲉ- before copulative sentences.
25.2 The Conjunctive.
| (ⲛ̀)ⲧⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥ-, and ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥ- also appear frequently as ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥ-. The conjunctive is used to continue the force of a preceding verbal prefix. In a sense, it is no more than an inflected form of the conjunction "and". It is especially frequent after a First Future or an Imperative:
| ϯⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. |
| I shall go and speak with him. |
| ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲧⲁⲥⲃⲱ. |
| Sit down and listen to my teaching. |
| ⲉⲛ-ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| Bring the books and give them to him. |
It may be used to continue the force of virtually any preceding verbal prefix except that of the affirmative First Perfect, but even this restriction does not hold in the relative forms. It is also used after an Inflected Infinitive, as in
| ϩⲱϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲛ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. |
| It is necessary that we go and speak with him. |
In many instances, especially where there is a change of subject, the Conjunctive clause has the meaning of a purpose or result clause:
| ⲁⲛⲓⲧϥ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| Bring him to me so that I may see him. |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱⲙ. |
| Give them (food) so that they may eat. |
This usage depends very much on the presence of an injunctive (imperative) force, implicit or explicit, in the first clause. For the conjunctive with Greek conjunctions, see Lesson 30.
The Conjunctive resembles the Tripartite Conjugation: only the Infinitive may be used as its verbal component. Negation is with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ- before the Infinitive. If the Conjunctive continues a negative verb, however, the negation may carry over.
The following selection is from the Sayings of the Fathers. See p. 1.6 for a brief description of this text.
| ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲭⲏⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉϥⲥⲏϭ. ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ, ⲁϥⲭⲁϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲡⲁ ⲙⲁⲕⲁⲣⲓⲟⲥ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲭⲁϥ ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲣⲟ, ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲉⲓ. ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥϫⲟⲩϣⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲉⲛⲕ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ?" ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲇⲉ ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ. ⲁϥⲉⲛⲧ, ⲁϥⲛⲟϫⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ." ⲡⲉϫⲉ-ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲛⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲧⲱⲛⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲫⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲧⲁϩⲟϥ." ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲁϥⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ, ⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ, ⲁϥⲧⲁϩⲉ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲏϯ ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲓ ⲉⲩⲣⲁϣⲓ. |
| There was someone in Egypt who had a paralyzed son. And he brought him and set him in the cell of Apa Makarios, and he left him weeping near the door, and he went to a distance. The monk looked and saw the little boy weeping, and he said to him, "Who brought you here?" And he said, "It was my father. He brought me, he cast me away, and he went." The monk said to him, "Get up and run and catch up to him." And immediately, he became well, and he arose, he caught up to his father, and in this way they went to their house rejoicing. |
Note: The term ⲁⲡⲁ is a title of respect, ultimately from Aramaic ʾabbā, father. ⲙⲁⲕⲁⲣⲓⲟⲥ is a proper name.
26.1 Compound verbs. Coptic vocabulary is particularly rich in compound verbs. Most compound verbs consist of a simple infinitive in the prenominal form plus a nominal element, usually without an article, e.g. ϯ-ⲱⲟⲩ to praise, ϭⲓ-ⲃⲁⲡⲧⲓⲥⲙⲁ to be baptized. Meanings are for the most part predictable from those of the components.
The verbs most frequently occurring in compounds are ϯ- to give, ϭⲓ- to take, ϥⲓ- to raise, carry, ϫⲉⲙ- to find, ⲭⲁ- to put, and ⲉⲣ- to do, make. Some examples:
Compounds with ⲉⲣ- are the most frequent of all and fall into two groups. In the first group ⲉⲣ- has its basic meaning "to do, make, perform":
ⲉⲣ-X ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ (X is a number) has two meanings: (1) to reach the age of X; (2) to pass X years.
In the second group of ⲉⲣ- compounds ⲉⲣ- has the meaning "to become", e.g. ⲉⲣ-ⲟⲩⲣⲟ to become king (over: ⲉϫⲉⲛ). The second element may be virtually any noun or adjective in the language, so that a complete catalogue is impossible. Qualitatives are uniformly ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀, as in ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ to be king. Further examples:
The distinction between these two groups is often blurred, however, with qualitatives of the ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ type being extended to the first group as well, e.g. ⲉⲣ-ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ to marvel, become amazed (at: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, ⲉ, ⲉⲑⲃⲉ, ⲉϫⲉⲛ), to admire; Q ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ to be amazed.
Less frequently the nominal element of a compound verb has the definite article:
In the case of ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲱⲃϣ, ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲙⲉⲩⲓ, and many others of this type a pronominal object is expressed by a possessive prefix on the noun: ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲱⲃϣ to forget him, ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ to remember him.
Because compound verbs employ the prenominal form of the infinitive, the question arises concerning their occurrence in the Bipartite Conjugation, where the prenominal form is usually prohibited. In general, compound verbs are an exception to Jernstedt's Rule and may be used freely as they stand in the Bipartite Conjugation. Two types of compounds, however, do tend to follow Jernstedt's Rule:
the type ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲙⲉⲩⲓ, with the definite article on the noun. In the Bipartite Conjugation the full form of the infinitive is used. Contrast
| ⲁⲓⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ. |
| I remembered him. |
| ϯⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ. |
| I remember him. |
many compounds whose nominal element is a part of the body. Contrast
| ⲁⲓϯ-ⲧⲟⲧⲥ. |
| I helped her. |
| ϯϯ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲟⲧⲥ. |
| I am helping her. |
26.2 The element ϣ-, ⲉϣ-, originally a full verb "to know, know how to", may be prefixed to any infinitive to express "can, be able". E.g.
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϣϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| He was not able to go. |
| ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁϣϯ-ⲧⲟⲧⲕ ⲁⲛ. |
| I shall not be able to help you. |
It occurs redundantly and optionally in the compounds of ϫⲟⲙ: ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ϫⲉⲙ-(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ.
26.3 Infinitives of the type ⲧⲁⲕⲟ. There is a fairly large group of verbs whose infinitives begin with ⲧ- and end in -ⲟ, e.g. ⲧⲁⲕⲟ ⲧⲁⲕⲉ- ⲧⲁⲕⲟ⸗ Q ⲧⲁⲕⲏⲟⲩⲧ to destroy. At an older stage of Egyptian these verbs were compound causatives with a form of ϯ (to give) plus a verbal form inflected by suffixation. Thus, the original construction involved two verbs (e.g. I caused that he pay a fine) which coalesced into a single verb with two objects (I caused him to pay a fine). Traces of the older construction survive in Sahidic, e.g. Luke 3:.4 ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲧⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲟⲥⲓ Do not make anyone pay a fine (i.e. suffer a loss). ⲧⲧⲟ ⲧⲧⲉ- is the causative of ϯ itself. The lack of an object marker on the second object is characteristic of the construction, but the absence of an article in this particular example stems from its association with the compound verb ϯ-ⲟⲥⲓ to pay a fine, suffer a loss. In general, however, there is no need to take the older construction into account in Coptic, since most of these verbs are simply transitive. Some examples:
ⲧ + ϣ results in initial ϫ:
Sometimes the initial ⲧ- is lost, as in
A few verbs have retained a final -ⲥ or -ⲟⲩ (a frozen subject suffix):
The Imperative of these verbs may optionally have a prefixed ⲙⲁ-: ⲙⲁⲧⲁⲙⲟ, ⲙⲁⲧⲁⲗⲟ, etc. Cf. §17.1.
(The compound verbs given in 26.1, the prefix ϣ- in 26.2, and the verbs ⲧⲁⲙⲟ, ⲧⲁⲗⲟ, ⲧⲁⲛϧⲟ, ϫⲫⲟ, ϫⲫⲓⲟ, ⲕⲧⲟ, ϫⲉⲩ, and ⲧⲟⲩⲛⲟⲥ in 26.3)
27.1 Negative adjective compounds. The prefix ⲁⲧ- is used to form negative adjectives from verbs and nouns:
| ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ignorant |
| ⲁⲧⲙⲟⲩ | immortal |
| ⲁⲧϩⲏⲧ | senseless, foolish |
| ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | disobedient |
| ⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ | imperishable |
| ⲁⲧϫⲟⲙ | powerless, impotent |
| ⲁⲧⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | invisible |
This prefix was originally a negative relative pronoun; a trace of this older usage is found in the resumptive pronoun required in some expressions, e.g.
| ⲁⲧⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | unseeable, unseen |
| ⲁⲧⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | ineffable; without ⲉⲣⲟ⸗: speechless |
| ⲁⲧⲕⲓⲙ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | immovable |
The resumptive pronoun agrees with the modified noun:
| ⲟⲩⲙⲩⲥⲧⲏⲣⲓⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲧⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| an ineffable mystery |
| ⲟⲩϫⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲧⲕⲓⲙ ⲉⲣⲟⲥ |
| an immovable power |
Nearly all ⲁⲧ- adjectives freely compound with ⲉⲣ- (Q ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀), as in ⲉⲣ-ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ to become/be ignorant, ⲉⲣ-ⲁⲧⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ to become/be invisible.
27.2 Compound nouns. The distinction between a compound noun and a noun + ⲛ̀ + noun phrase is somewhat arbitrary. As a working definition we shall assume (1) that the first noun of a true compound noun must be in a reduced form different from the free (unbound) form, if indeed the latter exists; (2) that the linking ⲛ̀ be absent or at least optional. The most productive compounding prefixes are ⲙⲉⲧ-, ⲣⲉⲙ(ⲛ̀)-, ⲣⲉϥ-, and ϫⲓⲛ.
ⲣⲉϥ- forms agent or actor nouns; the second element is normally a simple or compound infinitive, but occasionally a qualitative:
| ⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲛⲟⲃⲓ | sinner |
| ⲣⲉϥϣⲉⲙϣⲓ | server, worshipper |
| ⲣⲉϥⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ | dead person |
| ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ | destroyer; perishable |
| ⲣⲉϥϭⲓⲟⲩⲓ | thief |
These may be used nominally or adjectivally, e.g.
| ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲛⲟⲃⲓ |
| a sinful woman |
| ⲟⲩⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ |
| a destructive spirit |
| ⲧⲁⲓⲥⲁⲣⲝ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ |
| this perishable flesh |
and may be formed freely from virtually any appropriate verb in the language.
ⲣⲉⲙ-, ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀-, a reduced form of ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀, man of:
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ |
| an Egyptian |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ |
| a wise, discerning person |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲍⲁⲣⲉⲑ |
| a person from Nazareth |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲑⲱⲛ |
| a person from where? as in ⲛⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϩⲁⲛⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲛ? Where are you from? |
ⲙⲉⲧ- is used to form feminine abstract nouns from adjectives or other nouns. Compounds in ⲙⲉⲧ- are extremely numerous; the following is a typical sampling:
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲏⲃ | priesthood |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ | kingdom, kingship; the spelling ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ is less frequent |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲁⲃⲉ | wisdom |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲃⲉⲣⲓ | youth; newness |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ | wisdom, prudence |
| ⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ | old age (of a man) |
| ⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ | old age (of a woman) |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲛⲓϣϯ | greatness; seniority |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲙⲟⲛⲁⲭⲟⲥ | monkhood |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ | imperishability; incorruptibility |
ⲙⲉⲧ- is also used to designate languages:
| ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ | Egyptian |
| ⲙⲉⲧϩⲉⲃⲣⲁⲓⲟⲥ | Hebrew |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲉⲉⲓⲉⲛⲓⲛ | Greek |
| ⲙⲉⲧϩⲣⲱⲙⲁⲓⲟⲥ | Latin |
ϫⲓⲛ- is used to form a feminine noun of action or gerund from any infinitive. The meaning ranges from concrete to abstract, e.g. ϫⲓⲛⲛⲁⲩ sight, vision; ϫⲓⲛⲟⲩⲱⲙ food (pl. ϭⲓⲛⲟⲩⲟⲟⲙ). These are so predictable in meaning that they have been systematically excluded from the Glossary unless they have acquired meanings not immediately obvious from that of the base verb.
Les frequent compounding prefixes are ⲁⲛ-, ⲓⲉⲡ- (ⲓⲟⲡⲏ), ⲓⲁϩ- (ⲓⲟϩⲓ), ⲣⲁ- ⲥϯ- (ⲥⲑⲟⲓ), ϣⲟⲩ- (ϣⲁⲩ), ϣⲃⲣ̄- (ϣⲫⲏⲣ), ϣⲛ- (ϣⲏⲣⲓ), ϣⲥ̄ⲛ̄- (ⲥⲁϣ), and ϩⲁⲙ-. The reader may check these out in the Glossary.
Nominalized relative clauses are sometimes taken as compound nouns, occurring with an extra article, e.g.
| (ⲡ)ⲡⲉⲧ ϣⲟⲩⲓⲧ | vanity |
| (ⲡ)ⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ | evil |
| ⲟⲩⲡⲉⲧ ⲟⲩⲁⲃ | a saint |
A similar usage is found with ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ, designating origin or affiliation (the def. art. appears as ⲡⲉ-, ⲧⲉ-, ⲛⲉ-):
| ⲟⲩⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲛ̄ ⲧⲥⲩⲣⲓⲁ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is a Syrian. |
| ⲛⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲁⲩⲉⲓⲇ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are the ones from the house of David. |
27.3 There is a form of the verb known as the participium conjunctivum (proclitic participle) used only for forming compounds with a following nominal element:
| p. c. | ||
|---|---|---|
| ⲥⲱ | ⲥⲁⲩ-ⲏⲣⲡ | wine-drinking, a wine-drinker |
| ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | ⲟⲩⲁⲙ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | man-eating |
| ϭⲓⲥⲓ | ϭⲁⲥⲓ-ϩⲏⲧ | arrogant |
| ⲙⲟⲛⲓ | ⲙⲁⲛ-ⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ | shepherd, tender of sheep |
It is uniformly vocalized with -ⲁ-. For most verbs the p. c. is rare or non-existent; a few verbs like the above account for most of the examples encountered. Note especially the compounds of ⲙⲉⲓ: ⲙⲁⲓ- (one who loves):
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲱⲟⲩ | desirous of fame or glory |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩⲃ, ⲙⲁⲓ-ϩⲁⲧ | desirous of wealth |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ | pious, God-loving |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | kind, philanthropic |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | gluttonous |
27.4 The Third Future and its negative:
| neg. | |
|---|---|
| ⲉⲓⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲕⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉϥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲩⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The negative forms are also spelled as ⲉⲛⲛⲁ-, ⲉⲛⲛⲉⲕ- etc. The 1st pers. sing. also occurs as ⲛⲛⲉⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ.
The Third Future is an emphatic or vivid future with a wide variety of nuances; in an independent clause it describes a future event as necessary, inevitable, or obligatory. The English translation will depend on the context: ⲉϥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ he shall hear, he is to hear, he is bound to hear, he must inevitably hear, he will surely hear, and similarly for the negative. The 2nd person is often used in commands and prohibitions:
| ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕⲡⲉⲓⲣⲁⲍⲉ ⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲡⲉⲕⲛⲟⲩϯ. |
| You shall not tempt the Lord your God. |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲁⲣⲉϩ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓⲉⲛⲧⲟⲗⲏ. |
| You shall keep these commandments. |
One of the most frequent uses of the Third Future is to express purpose or result after the conjunctions ϫⲉ and ϫⲉⲕⲁ(ⲁ)ⲥ:
| ⲁⲓⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲛⲉⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ-ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I have written to you so that you may know what has befallen me here. |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩϥ̄ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉ ⲉϥⲉⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ. |
| We shall send him to you so that he may speak with you. |
The same type of clause may be used as an object clause instead of the Inflected Infinitive after verbs of commanding, exhorting, and the like:
| ⲁⲛⲥⲉⲡⲥⲱⲡϥ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥϫⲟⲥ ⲉ ϩⲗⲓ. |
| We entreated him not to tell it to anyone. |
It may occasionally replace the Inflected Infinitive in other situations:
| ⲛ̀ϯⲙⲡϣⲁ ⲁⲛ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲉⲓⲉⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. |
| I am not worthy to enter. |
The Third Future is tripartite; only the infinitive may be used in the verbal slot. The Second Future is sometimes used instead of the Third Future after ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ and ϫⲉ.
(The adjectival and nominal compounds given in 27.1, 2.)
28.1 The Habitual and its negative.
| Neg. | |
|---|---|
| ϣⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲣ(ⲉ)ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The Habitual (or praesens consuetudinis) describes an action or activity as characteristic or habitual. It may usually be translated by the English general present (I write, I work, etc.):
| ϣⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They call him John. |
| ϣⲁⲣⲉ-ⲧⲥⲟⲫⲓⲁ ⲟⲩⲱϩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϩⲏⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ. |
| Wisdom resides in the heart of the righteous. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲉ-ⲏⲣⲡ. |
| He doesn't drink wine. |
The Habitual forms a regular system with the converters:
| Neg. | ||
|---|---|---|
| relative: | ⲉϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉ ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| circumstantial: | ⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| imperfect: | ⲛⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| second tense: | ⲉϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | — |
The Habitual is basically tenseless (hence the designation aorist in some grammars) and gains its translation value from the context. The imperfect converter makes a past tense explicit, e.g. ⲛⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥϧⲁⲓ he used to write. Note that subject resumption is required in the relative form: ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϣⲁϥⲉⲣ-ⲫⲁⲓ the man who does thus. The Habitual belongs to the Tripartite Conjugation: only the Infinitive may be used in the verbal slot.
28.2 Emphasis. The typical non-emphatic word order in a verbal clause is
(verbal prefix) + subject + verb + object + adverbial elementsWe have seen that the conversion of the verbal prefix to a second tense form places a strong emphasis on the adverbial element, requiring in most cases a cleft sentence in the English translation. The use of the Coptic cleft sentence pattern, with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ + a relative form is a further device for giving special prominence to a subject or object. A somewhat weaker emphasis is achieved by placing a specific element of the clause at the beginning. Such preposed elements are usually resumed pronominally within the clause unless they are simple adverbial phrases. This transformation, known also as fronting or topicalization, is very common in Coptic; examples abound on every page. The element preposed may be completely unmarked as such, but the Greek particle ⲇⲉ is ubiquitous in this function. Fronted personal pronouns are always in the independent form. E.g.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ. |
| Me he did't find. |
| ⲡⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲁⲩⲣⲁϧⲧϥ. |
| His son, however, they killed. |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁϯ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡϩⲁⲧ. |
| I will not give the money to you. |
The independent pronouns may be used appositionally to emphasize any suffixed pronoun, e.g. ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲇⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ but when I heard; ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ ⲛⲑⲟⲕ for your sake. We have already mentioned the repetition in ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛⲑⲟⲕ? Who are you? They may even stand before a relative clause, as in ⲡⲙⲁ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲉϯⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ the place which I am in.
The particles ⲓⲥ and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ add a certain vividness or immediacy to a following statement. If an element is topicalized, ⲓⲥ generally occurs before nouns and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ before pronouns.
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲧⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| Behold, I am the maidservant of the Lord. |
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲉⲕⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲭⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲕ. |
| Behold, you shall remain (being) mute. (Cf. §30.11) |
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲧⲉⲛⲁⲃⲟⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϫⲫⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ. |
| Behold, you shall conceive and bear a son. |
The translation"behold" is purely conventional, but it is difficult to find a better English equivalent. The forms ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ, ⲉⲓⲥⲧⲉ, ⲉⲓⲥⲡⲉ, and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ also occur. ⲓⲥ has several other functions:
with a following noun, as a complete predication:
| ⲓⲥ ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲛⲓ. |
| Here is your sister. |
as a "preposition" before temporal expressions, as in
| ⲓⲥ ϣⲟⲙϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| We have not seen him for three years. |
28.3 Emphatic and intensive pronouns.
ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, less frequently ⲟⲩⲁⲧ⸗, is used in apposition to a preceding noun or pronoun: alone, sole, self, only. E.g.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ |
| I alone, I by myself, only I |
| ⲛⲁϥ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ |
| to him alone, to him only |
| ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ |
| the king himself, the king alone |
ϩⲱ⸗ (1 c.s. ϩⲱ or ϩⲱⲧ, 2 f.s. ϩⲱϯ, 2 c.pl. ϩⲱⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ), similar to the preceding, but often with the added nuance of "also, too, moreover". E.g.
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ϩⲱⲕ, ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ, ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ ϫⲉ ⲡⲡⲣⲟⲫⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉⲧ ϭⲟⲥⲓ. |
| And you, moreover, my son, will be called the prophet of the Most High. |
| ⲓⲥ ⲉⲗⲓⲥⲁⲃⲉⲧ ⲧⲉⲥⲩⲅⲅⲉⲛⲏⲥ ⲛⲑⲟⲥ ϩⲱⲥ ⲟⲛ ⲁⲥⲃⲟⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲉⲥⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ. |
| Behold, Elisabeth your kinsman has also conceived a child in her old age. |
The form ϩⲱϥ also serves as an adverb/conjunction "however, on the other hand" without any pronominal force. ⲛⲑⲟϥ is used likewise.
ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, an intensive pronoun, used in apposition to a preceding pronoun, usually possessive or reflexive:
| ⲡⲁⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ |
| my own house |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϥϯⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| in his own village |
28.4 The reciprocal pronoun "each other, one another" is expressed by possessive prefixes on -ⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ (fellow, companion), e.g.
| ⲁⲛⲙⲓϣⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲉⲛⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ. |
| We fought with one another. |
| ⲛⲁⲩⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲟⲩⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ. |
| They were talking with each other. |
28.5 Further remarks on -ⲕⲉ-. In addition to the use of -ⲕⲉ- as an adjective "other, another" introduced in 4.3, -ⲕⲉ- may have a purely emphasizing function, e.g.
| ⲡⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man too |
| the man as well |
Both uses are frequent, and the correct translation will depend on a careful examination of the context.
There is a related set of pronouns: m.s. ϭⲉ or ⲕⲉⲧ, f.s. ⲕⲉⲧⲉ, c.pl. ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ. These occur alone mostly in negative expressions, e.g. ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ϭⲉ I saw no one else. Otherwise the articles are added, as in ⲧⲕⲉⲧⲉ the other one (f.), ⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ the others, ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ some others. For the indefinite singular ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲁⲓ and f. ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲓ, another (one), are used.
28.6 Nouns with pronominal suffixes. It was noted earlier that there is a small group of nouns which take pronominal suffixes in a possessive sense. Among the more important of these are
28.7 The nouns underlying the directional adverbs of Lesson 8 are used in several other important adverbial and prepositional expressions. With ⲛ̀, ϩⲓ, and ⲥⲁ they form adverbs of static location: e.g. ⲛ̀ ⲃⲟⲗ outside, ϩⲓ ϧⲟⲩⲛ inside, ⲥⲁ-ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ underneath, below. Each of these may be converted into a prepositional phrase by adding ⲛ̀, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗: ϩⲓ ⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ outside of, beyond; ⲥⲁ-ϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲛ̀ within, inside of. Nearly all the possible combinations occur: (ⲛ̀, ϩⲓ, ⲥⲁ) + (ⲃⲟⲗ, ϧⲟⲩⲛ, ϩⲣⲏⲓ up, ϩⲣⲏⲓ down, ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ, ⲧⲫⲉ, ⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ, ⲡϣⲱⲓ) ± ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ (sometimes also + ⲉ). Their meanings are usually obvious from the context. The noun ⲡ.ⲥⲁ in these expressions means "side, direction". It is the same ⲥⲁ we have in ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ and ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ. Note also the phrase (ⲛ̀) ⲥⲁ ⲥⲁ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ on every side, everywhich way.
(ⲓⲥ, ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ, ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, ϩⲱ⸗, ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, ⲭⲁ-ⲣⲱ⸗, ⲑⲉⲙ-ⲣⲱ⸗, ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ, ⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ, -ⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ from the lesson)
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉⲛⲓⲟϯ ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲉ ⲙⲁϩ-ⲙⲱⲟⲩ. ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲧϣⲱϯ ⲇⲉ ⲡⲉ ⲟⲩⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ. ⲁϥⲉⲣ-ⲡⲱⲃϣ ⲇⲉ ⲉ ϭⲓ-ⲡⲛⲟϩ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲧϣⲱϯ, ⲁϥⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲛⲟϩ. ⲁϥⲓⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲗⲏⲗ, ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ, "ⲡϣⲏⲓ, ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧ ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ, 'ⲙⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲅⲅⲓⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲱⲟⲩ.'" ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲁ-ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲓ ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ, ⲁ-ⲡⲥⲟⲛ ⲙⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥϣⲟϣⲟⲩ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁ-ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲟⲛ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲁ. |
| One of our fathers sent his disciple to fetch water. But the well was very far from the cell. He forgot to bring the rope with him. And when he came upon the well, he realized that he had not brought the rope with him. He made a prayer and he called out, saying, "Oh cistern, it is my father who says to me, 'fill the bucket with water.'" And immediately, the water came upward, and the brother filled his jug, and the water settled again to its place. |
29.1 The Conditional and conditional clauses.
| ⲁⲓϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | if I hear |
| ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | if you hear |
| ⲁⲣⲉϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲁϥϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲥϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲛϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲁⲣϣⲁⲛ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
Negation is with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ-: ⲁϥϣⲁⲛϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁⲣϣⲁⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. ϣⲁⲛ may be omitted in the negative: ⲁϥϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁⲣⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. The Conditional occurs only in the protasis of conditional sentences. Only the Infinitive may occur in the verbal slot.
Conditional sentences in Coptic fall formally into two clearly defined groups: (1) real, and (2) contrary-to-fact. The protasis of real conditional sentences in present time has a variety of forms:
a clause with the Conditional:
| ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you believe this |
ⲉϣⲱⲡ (if) or ⲓⲥϫⲉ (if) followed by the First Present, the Circumstantial, the Conditional, or any type of nonverbal predication:
| ⲉϣⲱⲡ/ⲓⲥϫⲉ | ⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| " | ⲉⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| " | ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you believe this | |
| " | ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ |
| if you are his father | |
| " | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| if you have the money | |
| " | ⲛ̀ϯⲙⲡϣⲁ ⲁⲛ |
| if I am not worthy | |
the Circumstantial alone often serves as protasis:
| ⲉⲛⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ, … |
| since we are here, … |
The apodosis of such conditions may be any variety of verbal clause appropriate for the required sense (e.g. Fut. I, II, III; Habitual; Imperative). The apodosis may optionally be introduced with ⲓⲉ (ⲉⲉⲓⲉ). For examples, see the exercises.
The protasis of contrary-to-fact conditions is in fact an Imperfect circumstantial clause, or, in the case of nonverbal clauses, a circumstantial of the clause with the imperfect converter:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if he were king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if he were the king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if we had a king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ | if you were here |
In past time ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- is followed by the affirmative Second Perfect or negative First Perfect:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲧⲁⲕϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you had given me the money |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϭⲓ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| if you had not taken the money |
If the clause is nonverbal, ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- alone is used. Thus, ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲕⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ means both "if you were here" and "if you had been here".
The conditional prefix ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- is not to be confused with the particle ⲁⲛ which serves to introduce a question, e.g. ⲁⲛ ⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? Did you see him?
The apodosis of both tenses is in the imperfect of the Future:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ, ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲫⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| If you believed, this would not happen. |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲧⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ, ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲫⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| If you had believed, this would not have hapened. |
The Greek conjunctions ⲉⲓⲙⲏⲧⲓ (εἰ μή τι) and ⲕⲁⲛ (κἄν) are also used to introduce protases of both real and contrary-to-fact conditions.
ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ (except that, unless, if not) is often used to introduce the protasis of a contrary-to-fact condition; the clause usually contains a Pres. I, Perf. I, or nonverbal predication:
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ | ⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | if you did not believe |
| " | ⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | if you had not believed |
| " | ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ | if you were not my father |
29.2 Inflected predicate adjectives. There is a small set of predicate adjectives inflected by means of pronominal suffixes or by proclisis to a nominal subject, e.g.
| ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. | His wife is beautiful. |
| ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ. | She is beautiful. |
The more important of these are ⲛⲁⲁ- ⲛⲁⲁ⸗ great, ⲛⲁⲛⲉ- ⲛⲁⲛⲉ⸗ good, ⲛⲉⲥⲉ- ⲛⲉⲥⲱ⸗ beautiful, ⲛⲉⲥⲃⲱⲱ⸗ wise, ⲛⲁϣⲉ- ⲛⲁϣⲱ⸗ numerous, ⲛⲉϭⲱ⸗ ugly. When used in relative clauses, they are treated like the First Present: ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ the good man, ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ the man whose wife is beautiful. They may also be preceded by the imperfect and circumstantial converters: ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ (ⲡⲉ) he was good; ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ (ⲡⲉ) a good man. ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧ⸗ (blessed is/are) belongs to this group, but a following nominal subject must be anticipated with a suffix: ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲉⲓⲣⲏⲛⲏ blessed are the peacemakers.
29.3 The comparison of both attributive and predicate adjectives is expressed by placing the preposition ⲉ before the item on which the comparison is based: ⲛⲓϣϯ ⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ greater than this, ⲥⲁⲃⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ wiser than his brothers. In addition to simple adjectives, both Coptic and Greek, the predicate adjectives of the preceding paragraph as well as appropriate qualitatives and other verbal constructions may be used in this construction. E.g.
| ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϣϯ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ. |
| He was more important than his brothers. |
| ϥϭⲟⲥⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| He is more exalted than his master. |
| ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲣⲏ. |
| It was brighter than the sun. |
| ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ ⲉ ⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲛⲓ. |
| She is more beautiful than her sister. |
A comparison may be strengthened by using ϩⲟⲩⲟ (more) in various combinations: ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ⲉ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ⲉ ϩⲟⲩⲉ, all meaning "more than". ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ alone may express an absolute comparative: ⲡⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ the greater.
The Greek preposition ⲡⲁⲣⲁ (or ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲣⲁ) may be used instead of ⲉ. Suffixes may be attached: ⲡⲁⲣⲟⲓ, ⲡⲁⲣⲟⲕ, ⲡⲁⲣⲟ etc.
29.4 Nouns with possessive suffixes (continued).
Other nouns used with pronominal suffixes are ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫ⸗ end, ⲕⲉⲛ(ⲧ)⸗ bosom, ⲣⲉⲛ(ⲧ)⸗ name, ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ⸗ price, and ϣⲁⲛⲧ⸗ nose. The Glossary may be consulted for these.
(ⲉϣⲱⲡ, ⲓⲥϫⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ, ⲛⲁⲛⲉ-, ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-, ⲛⲁϣⲉ-, ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧ⸗, ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ϥⲓ-ϩⲣⲁ⸗, ϣⲁⲛ-ϩⲑⲏ⸗ ⲉϫⲉⲛ, ⲡⲉⲧ ϩⲓⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ from the lesson)
30.1 The Injunctive (also called the Optative):
| ⲙⲁⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let me hear | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let us hear | |
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let him hear | ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let them hear | |
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let her hear | |||
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let the man hear |
The Injunctive occurs only in the 1st and 3rd persons in standard Sahidic. The 1st person corresponds to the cohortative, the 3rd person to the jussive; theoretically, the Imperative may be said to occupy the 2nd person position. The negative of the Injunctive is expressed by using the negative Imperative prefix ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣ- with the corresponding form of the Inflected Infinitive: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲣⲉϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ don't let him go, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲣⲉⲩⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧϥ̄ don't let them kill him. The Injunctive is tripartite and is used only with the Infinitive. The free form of the 1st person, ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲛ, is used alone in the sense "Let's go."
30.2 The Future Conjunctive of Result (also called the Finalis).
| — | ⲧⲁⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
ⲛ̀ may occur optionally before all of these forms. For the 1st person sing. the simple Conjunctive ⲧⲁ- may be used.
The Future Conjunctive is basically a result clause; it is especially frequent after an Imperative, e.g.
| ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲉⲣ-ⲥⲁⲃⲉ. | Listen to me and you will become wise (or: so as to become wise). |
Although the Conjunctive itself may occasionally have the value of a result/purpose clause after an Imperative, the Future Conjunctive always has this meaning. The nuance of the form can best be understood if it is viewed as the transformation of an underlying conditional sentence:
| ⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲛⲁⲩ. | ← | ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲓ ⲓⲉ ⲕⲛⲁⲛⲁⲩ. |
It may also occur after a question, e.g.
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲧⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? |
| Who has seen him so as to be able to describe him? |
If the question is rhetorical, as in this example, negation is generally implied: "No one has seen him so as…." If the question is real, the implication is "Tell me the answer so that…," as in
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ ⲡⲉⲕⲥⲟⲛ ⲧⲁⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ? |
| Where is your brother that we may speak with him? |
30.3 The Clause Conjugations. A distinction is made between sentence conjugations (Bipartite and Tripartite) and clause conjugations. The latter are so named because they correspond to a conjunction plus a clause in normal translation. To this category belong the Temporal, the Conjunctive, the Conditional, the Future Conjunctive of Result, and most uses of the Inflected Infinitive (ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ). Characteristic of this category is (1) negation with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ-, and (2) the use of the Infinitive only.
A further clause conjugation is ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (until he hears):
| ϣⲁⲛϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until I hear | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until you hear | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. | |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until the man hears |
Translation is regularly with "until," e.g.
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲓ. | We shall remain here until he comes. |
Similar in appearance to a clause conjugation is the form ϫⲓⲛ(ⲛ̀)ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (from the time that he heard). This consists, however, of the conjunction ϫⲓⲛ followed by the Second Perfect. Even more frequent are the compound expressions with ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ and ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ (as, according as, just as), both of which are followed by relative constructions, e.g.
| ⲁⲩϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ. | They found it just as he had told them. |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ, ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲛⲉⲁⲓⲥ ϩⲱⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ… | According as I have done to you, you too are to do… |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧ ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ | as it is written concerning him |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲟⲩⲛⲁϣⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ | according as they would be able to hear (i.e. understand) |
The feminine resumptive -ⲥ in these constructions refers back to ⲡⲣⲏϯ and should not be translated as a pronominal object. If a real pronominal object is required, the resumptive -ⲥ is omitted, e.g.
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩⲧ, ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϩⲱ ϯϫⲉⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ. |
| Just as my Father sent me, so I too am sending you. |
Other constructions with ⲑⲉ are treated similarly, e.g.
| ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| Thus has the Lord acted for me. |
30.4 When the Inflected Infinitive is used instead of a simple Infinitive after a verbal prefix, it has the value of a causative (hence its alternate name, the Causative Infinitive):
| ⲁⲓⲧⲣⲉⲩⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. | I caused them to enter. |
| ϯⲛⲁⲧⲣⲉⲕⲣⲓⲙⲓ. | I shall cause you to weep. |
30.5 The form ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ describes an action as expected but not yet done. It is conveniently translated as "he has not yet heard". The form is fully inflected:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
It may occur in circumstantial clauses with the circumstantial converter ⲉ-; the resultant form appears ambiguously as ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ- or simply ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ-. In this usage it is best translated as an affirmative clause with "before":
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲧⲁϩⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲫⲟϩ ⲉ ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| We shall overtake him before he reaches the city. |
With the imperfect converter ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ corresponds to the pluperfect: he had not yet heard.
30.6 An untranslatable dative with ⲛⲁ⸗ or ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ occurs optionally with many verbs, especially in the Imperative. This reflexive dative is called the ethical dative, following standard terminology. E.g.
| ϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲏⲓ. | Go home! |
| ⲥⲱ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ. | Drink! |
Verbs with which this occurs with some frequency are noted in the Glossary.
30.7 Higher numbers, ordinals, and fractions.
| 20 | ϫⲱⲧ (f. ϫⲟⲩⲱⲧⲉ) ϫⲟⲩⲧ- | 70 | ϣϥⲉ, ⲥϣ̄ϥⲉ, ϣⲃⲉ | ||
| 30 | ⲙⲁⲡ (f. ⲙⲁⲁⲃⲉ) ⲙⲁⲡ- | 80 | ϧⲁⲙⲛⲉ, ϩⲙ̄ⲛⲉ- | ||
| 40 | ϩⲙⲉ | 90 | ⲡⲓⲥⲧⲁⲩ | ||
| 50 | ⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ | 100 | ϣⲉ | 200 | ϣⲏⲧ |
| 60 | ⲥⲉ | 1000 | ϣⲟ | 10,000 | ⲑⲃⲁ |
The tens combine with the forms of the units used in the 'teens (§24.3). The -ⲧ- of -ⲧⲏ (5) is not repeated after another -ⲧ-:
| ϫⲟⲩⲧⲟⲩⲁⲓ | 21 | ⲙⲁⲡⲯⲓⲧ | 39 |
| ϫⲟⲩⲧϯⲟⲩ | 25 | ϣϥⲉϯⲟⲩ | 75 |
An intrusive -ⲧ- appears before -ⲁϥⲧⲉ (4) and -ⲁⲥⲉ (6):
| ⲙⲁⲡϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | 34 | ⲥⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ | 66 |
The numbers ϣⲉ 100, ϣⲟ 1000, and ⲑⲃⲁ 10,000 are masculine:
| ϣⲟ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | 2000 | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲑⲃⲁ | 120000 |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲟ | 3000 |
Proclitic forms of the units are frequent here, e.g.
| ϣⲙ̄ⲧ-ϣⲟ | 3000 | ⲥⲉⲩ-ϣⲟ | 6000 |
Combinations of these higher numbers with tens and units vary in form, e.g.
| ϣⲉ ⲙⲁⲡ = ϣⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲙⲁⲡ | 130 |
| ⲥⲉⲩ-ϣⲟ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ϣⲙⲏⲛ ⲛ̀ ϣⲉ | 6800 |
Ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinals with the prefix ⲙⲁϩ-. The ordinals are treated as adjectives before the noun with linking ⲛ̀. Gender distinctions are maintained:
| ⲡⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | the second day |
| ⲧⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ | the second year |
For "first" the adjectives ϣⲟⲣⲡ (f. ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ) and ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ (f. ϩⲟⲩⲓϯ) are used.
Fractional numbers worth noting are ⲧ.ⲫⲁϣⲓ (half) and ϫⲟⲥ, ϫⲉⲥ- (half). Other fractions are expressed by ⲣⲉ- prefixed to the denominator, as in ⲣⲉ-ⲙⲏⲧ one-tenth, or with ⲟⲩⲱⲛ (ⲟⲩⲉⲛ-), as in ⲟⲩⲉⲛ-ⲛ̀-ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ a fourth.
30.8 The remote (or further) demonstrative pronouns (that) are m.s. ⲫⲏ, f.s. ⲑⲏ, and pl. ⲛⲏ. These occur much less frequently than ⲫⲁⲓ, ⲑⲁⲓ, ⲛⲁⲓ because of the preference for using phrases with ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, such as ⲡⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ.
The prefixal forms ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- are usually described as the reduced forms of ⲫⲏ, ⲑⲏ, and ⲛⲏ, parallel in usage to ⲡⲁⲓ-, ⲧⲁⲓ-, and ⲛⲁⲓ-. While such a formal relationship may exist, the use of ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- in standard Sahidic is quite restricted. The form ⲡⲓ- occurs mainly in a few temporal and local adverbial expressions, such as ⲙ̀ ⲡⲓⲥⲏⲟⲩ (at that time) and ⲡⲓⲥⲁ (that side, as opposed to this side). The form ⲛⲓ- occurs most frequently in expressions involving comparison with ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ (like) or ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ (to become like); it sometimes corresponds more closely to an English generic noun, e.g. ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϭⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ like doves, like a dove. It is also found in the expression ϣⲁ ⲛⲓⲉⲛⲉϩ. Elsewhere ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- are frequent as scribal variants of ⲡⲁⲓ-, ⲧⲁⲓ-, ⲛⲁⲓ- or have the force of an emphatic article.
30.9 When it is necessary to express a durative or continuous process or state in the future, a periphrastic construction is employed using the Circumstantial. Contrast
| ⲕⲛⲁⲟⲩⲟⲡ | you will become holy |
| ⲕⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲟⲩⲁⲃ | you will be holy |
| ⲉⲕⲉⲭⲁ-ⲣⲱⲕ | you shall become silent |
| ⲉⲕⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲭⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲕ | you shall remain silent |
The difference is sometimes slight, but not infrequently spelled out. The same construction occasionally appears with other tripartite conjugational forms. A full discussion of the aspectual problem involved here lies beyond the scope of this book.
30.10 Greek conjunctions, adverbs, and prepositions that occur frequently in Coptic (for reference only). The term postpositive means that the word in question must follow immediately after the first element of the sentence, as in ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ.
30.11 Final remarks on Coptic conjunctions and particles.
ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ may mean "except" after a negative statement:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲛⲁⲓⲙⲁⲛ ⲡⲥⲩⲣⲟⲥ. | None of them became cleansed except Naiman the Syrian. |
Certain temporal expressions may occur with a following relative clause without resumptive pronouns. These function virtually as compound conjunctions. E.g.
| ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ | the day when this will happen |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥϫⲟⲩϣⲧ | on the day when he looked |
The definite article is divided into weak and strong:
| weak | strong | N.E. | |
|---|---|---|---|
| masc. | ⲡ- ⲫ- | ⲡⲓ- | pꜣ- |
| fem. | ⲧ- ⲑ- | ϯ- | tꜣ- |
| pl. | ⲛⲓ- ⲛⲉⲛ- | nꜣ-, nꜣ n | |
ⲫ and ⲑ are used instead of ⲡ ⲧ before the letetrs ⲃ ⲗ ⲙ ⲛ ⲣ and sometimes before ⲓ ⲟⲩ.
The weak article's determination is less precise. It is placed before generic or abstract nouns, and before the names of unique beings.
The strong article ⲡⲓ ϯ is a more precise determination. It indicates a particular individual.
| Weak article | Strong article | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲫ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ | God, | ⲡⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ | the god; |
| ⲧ-ⲫⲉ | the sky, heaven | ϯ-ⲫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲃⲉⲣⲓ | the new heaven[1]; |
| ⲫ-ⲣⲏ | the sun, | ⲡⲓ-ⲣⲏ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ϯ-ⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ | the Sun of Justice[1]. |
In general, the form of the article used depends on the degree of determination we want to give to the noun.
Remarks
Words that begin with ⲁ generally take the article ⲡⲓ and those that begin with ⲟⲩ, ⲱ, the article ⲡ: ⲡⲓ-ⲁⲥⲉⲃⲏⲥ "the impious one", ⲡⲓ-ⲁⲧϩⲏⲧ "the foolish one", ⲡ-ⲟⲩⲣⲟ "the king", ⲡ-ⲱⲛϧ "the life".
To avoid any ambiguity, we say:
ⲫ-ⲓⲱⲧ "the father", ⲡ-ⲓⲱⲧ "the barley";
ⲫ-ⲓⲟⲙ "the sea", ⲡ-ⲓⲟⲙ "the wine press".
The article ⲛⲉⲛ is only used before a possessed noun. ⲛⲓ can be used everywhere:
ⲛⲉⲛ-ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓ︤ⲥ︦ⲗ︥ "the sons of Israel";
ⲛⲉⲛ-ⲙⲱⲓⲧ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲱⲙⲓ "the ways of man" [2].
Sing. ⲟⲩ- "a" (A.E. wꜥ-), plur. ϩⲁⲛ-1 "some" (or left untranslated).
The construct form of Demotic hín. The full form exists in Sahidic as ϩⲟⲉⲓⲛⲉ "some".
Ex. ⲟⲩ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ "a man", ϩⲁⲛ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ "(some) men";
ⲟⲩ-ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ "a woman", ϩⲁⲛ-ϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ "(some) women".
When ⲟⲩ- is preceded by the preposition ⲉ- "towards", ⲉ ⲟⲩ is contracted to ⲉⲩ: ⲉⲩϣⲁϥⲉ "towards a desert", ⲉⲩⲥⲟⲡ "in one go".
ⲟⲩ- is a shortened form of ⲟⲩⲁⲓ "one" (A.E. wꜥ.w).
Placed before an adverb or a prepositional construction[1], the definite or indefinite article gives it the meaning of a noun or an adjective:
ⲛⲓ-ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ the superiors (lit. the above)
ⲡⲓ-ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ the outside, the outside
ⲡⲓ-ⲥⲁϧⲟⲩⲛ the interior, the inside
ⲡⲓ-ϣⲁ-ⲉⲛⲉϩ the Eternal (lit. the until eternity)
ⲓⲱⲥⲉⲫ ⲡⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲁⲍⲁⲣⲉⲑ «Joseph de Nazareth»[2].
ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ Joseph of Nazareth[3].
ⲑⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ ⲟⲩ-ⲡⲣⲟⲥ-ⲟⲩ-ⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲧⲉ ⲑⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛϭ︤ⲥ︥ ⲟⲩ-ϣⲁ-ⲉⲛⲉϩ ⲧⲉ. The kingdom of this world is fleeting, but the kingdom of Our Lord is eternal[4].
The definite article generally accompanies words in the vocative case, either alone or with the interjection ⲱ:
2. Jean 1, 46.
3. Kef. 355.
4. AM. 17, 20.
ⲣⲁϣⲓ ⲧ-ϣⲉⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲓⲱⲛ rejoice, daughter of Zion[1].
ⲁⲙⲏ ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ϯ-ⲡⲁⲣⲑⲉⲛⲟⲥ ⲧ-ϣⲉⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲃⲩⲗⲱⲛ come down, O virgin, daughter of Babylon[2].
ⲱ ⲡϭ︤ⲥ︥ ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲯⲩⲭⲏ Lord, save my soul[3].
We regularly say with the definite article ⲫ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ "God". Other proper nouns generally do not take an article. However, we find some place names with the definite article:
ⲃⲁⲃⲩⲗⲱⲛ and ⲑ-ⲃⲁⲃⲩⲗⲱⲛ Babylon, ⲧ-ⲕⲁⲛⲁCana[4], ⲑ-ⲃⲁⲥⲁⲛ[5] et ϯ-ⲃⲁⲥⲁⲛ[6] Bassan[7].
In addition to the cases in § 46, the indefinite article is used:
1. In a partitive sense like the French partitive article du , des : ⲟⲩ-ⲛⲟⲩⲃ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ-ⲗⲓⲃⲁⲛⲟⲥ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ-ϣⲁⲗ of gold, frankincense and myrrh[8].
2. With abstract and generic nouns; it is then translated into French by the definite article:
ⲟⲩ-ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ-ϩⲏⲕⲓ the rich and the poor
ⲟⲩ-ⲥⲟⲫⲓⲁ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ-ⲥⲃⲱ wisdom and science[9].
3. In adverbial expressions like:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩ-ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲧⲉⲛ with rectitude
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩ-ⲙⲉⲧⲟϫⲓ with iniquity[10].
A noun does not take an article:
1. When it is intimately united with another noun which precedes it, so as to form with it only a single whole, whether the first has the abbreviated form or the full form :
ⲡⲓ-ⲛⲉⲃ-ⲏⲓ the master of the house
ⲟⲩ-ⲓⲁϩ-ϫⲱⲓⲧ an olive grove
ⲟⲩ-ⲭⲗⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲃ a golden crown
2. When it joins a preceding verb to form a noun or a compound verb:
ⲙⲁⲥ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ mother of God
ϯ-ⲱⲟⲩ to glorify
ⲟⲩⲁⲙ-ⲥⲛⲟϥ «sanguinaire»;
ⲉⲣ-ⲛⲟⲃⲓ bloodthirsty
3. An indeterminate noun preceded by a preposition is sometimes without an article:
ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ-ⲣⲁⲥⲟⲩⲓ he saw a dream[1].
ⲉϥⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲱⲓⲕ looking for bread[2].
4. In enumerations of names, especially when the parts are joined by ϩⲓ, ⲓⲉ, ⲉⲓⲧⲉ, ⲟⲩⲇⲉ:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁ ⲥⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ ⲓⲉ ⲥⲱⲛⲓ ⲓⲉ ⲓⲱⲧ ⲓⲉ ⲙⲁⲩ ⲓⲉ ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲓⲉ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲓⲉ ⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲓⲉ ⲏⲓ whoever has left his brother or his sister or his father or his mother or his wife or his children or his field or his house[3].
5. Before the suffixed form of nouns, whether they have the other forms or not. The determination is then made by the suffixed pronoun which agrees with the annexed word. Such are:
ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫ⸗ end
ⲓⲁⲧ⸗ look at,
ⲕⲉⲛ⸗ be beside,
ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ foot,
ⲣⲱ⸗ (ⲣⲟ) mouth,
ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ⸗ price,
ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ hand,
ϧⲏⲧ⸗ milieu, ventre,
ϩⲏⲧ⸗ edge (of the hand, foot)
ϩⲑⲏ⸗ (ϩⲏⲧ) heart
ϩⲣ⸗ (ϩⲟ) face
ϫⲱ⸗ head
Ex: ⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲁⲥⲉⲃⲏⲥ the mouth of the impious[1] (lit. their mouth of the impious).
ϩⲏⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧϫⲓϫ: the tip of the hand[2] (lit. his tip of the hand).
This turn of phrase is regularly used in prepositions formed from these words: ϧⲁ-ⲣⲁⲧϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣϣⲏⲛ at the foot of the tree[3]; ⲉ-ⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ in the hands of his sons[4], ϧⲁ-ϫⲱϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲁⲗⲟⲩ in front of his child[5].
Remarks
1. We must not confuse ⲣⲟ ⲣⲱ⸗ “mouth” and ⲣⲟ pl. ⲣⲱⲟⲩ “door”; in the latter sense we use the article: ⲛⲓ-ⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲓ the doors of his house[6].
2. The three nouns ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ϩⲣ⸗ and ϫⲱ⸗ seem to have had a shortened form which has been preserved in the prepositions formed from these words: ϩⲓ-ⲧⲉⲛ- by means of ⲛⲁ-ϩⲣⲉⲛ- in front of, ⲉ-ϫⲉⲛ- on.
1. Pr. 10, 32.
2. Lév. 8, 23.
3. Gen. 18, 8.
4. Gen. 30, 35.
5. Gen. 33, 14. Cf. AB. 50.
6. Pr. 5, 8.
| Sing. | Plur. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲓ ⲧ | ي | 1. | ⲛ | نا |
| 2m. | ⲕ | كَ | 2. | ⲧⲉⲛ | كُم |
| f. | rien ou ⲓ | كِ | |||
| 3m. | ϥ | ه | 3. | ⲟⲩ | هم |
| f. | ⲥ | ها | |||
| Neutre singulier: ⲥ. | |||||
Ces pronoms s'ajoutent à l'article (74), aux noms (54), aux verbes (280), aux prépositions, pour indiquer les personnes auxquelles se rapportent ces mots. C'est ce qu'on appelle la suffixation; elle se fait directement, sans intermédiaire, ou au moyen d'une voyelle qui sera indiquée pour chaque classe de mots.
Il importe de remarquer que ⲧ de la première pers. du sing. n'était pas un pronom à l'origine. «En fait, il n'y a qu'un pronom du singulier, i; dans certains mots qui prenaient le suffixe -tou, ainsi tot «la main», tot-tou-i, tot-t-i, «ma main», est devenu tot-t, puis tot par chute de -i final; de même après les thèmes en a final, pa-i «mon», l'i est tombé et le thème est demeuré nu»[1]. Dans la suite, ⲧ a été employé comme pronom par les Coptes.
La 2 pl. a un pronom d'un fréquent usage -ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ qui est toujours régime; c'est une forme pleine, qui exige devant elle une forme abrégée[2].
Comme exemple, nous donnons ici la suffixation aux deux prépositions les plus usitées ⲉ- ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ «vers, à الى», ⲛ̀- ⲛ⸗ «à لِ»:
Sur ⲛ̀- se modèlent la particule du génitif ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- ⲛ̀⸗ «de» et la préposition ⲛⲉⲙ⸗ «avec».
| Sing. | 1. | ⲉⲣⲟⲓ | الي | ⲛⲏⲓ | لي |
| 2. m. | ⲉⲣⲟⲕ | اليكَ | ⲛⲁⲕ | لكَ | |
| f. | ⲉⲣⲟ | اليكِ | ⲛⲉ | لكِ | |
| 3. m. | ⲉⲣⲟϥ | اليه | ⲛⲁϥ | لهُ | |
| f. | ⲉⲣⲟⲥ | اليها | ⲛⲁⲥ | لها | |
| Pl. | 1. | ⲉⲣⲟⲛ | الينا | ⲛⲁⲛ | لنا |
| 2. | ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ | اليكم | ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ | لكُم | |
| 3. | ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ | اليهم | ⲛⲱⲟⲩ | لهُم |
| Sing. | Pl. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲁⲛⲟⲕ | moi | 1. | ⲁⲛⲟⲛ | nous |
| 2 m. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ | toi | 2. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ | vous |
| f. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲟ | toi f. | |||
| 3 m. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ | lui | 3. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲟⲩ | eux, elles. |
| f. | ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲥ | elle | |||
Le pronom personnel absolu remplit deux fonctions principales: 1. Il est sujet et attribut dans la proposition nominale (355); 2. il s'emploie comme apposition à un autre pronom pour en renforcer le sens (توكيد).
Apposition au sujet:
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲁⲓϫⲟⲥ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ «c'est de celui-là que j'ai parlé moi-même»[1].
ⲁⲓⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲕⲉⲣϩⲟϯ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ϧⲁⲧϩⲏ ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ «je sais que tu crains Dieu, toi»[2].
Apposition au complément:
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲭⲁⲧ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲣⲉϥϩⲓⲱⲓϣ l'Evangile «pour lequel on m'a établi moi-même prédicateur»[3].
Apposition à l'adjectif possessif:
ⲛⲉⲛ-ⲏⲟⲩ ⲁⲛⲟⲛ «nos maisons à nous»[4].
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ | 1. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ | 2. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ | 3. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ | ||
Ce mot[5] sert d'état pronominal à la préposition ⲛ (ⲙ) (316). Il s'emploie comme pronom:
1. Dans les sens du génitif: ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ «un d'eux»; ⲛⲓⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ «qui d'entre vous?».
2. Après les adverbes de lieu formés de ⲟⲩⲓⲛⲁⲙ «droite», ϫⲁϭⲏ «gauche», ⲥⲁ «côté», ⲧ-ϩⲏ «l'avant», ⲫ-ⲁϩⲟⲩ «l'arrière»: ⲥⲁⲟⲩⲓⲛⲁⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ «à ta droite»; ϩⲓⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «derrière lui»; ϩⲓⲧϩⲏ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «devant lui»[1].
3. Après la particule de renforcement ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ «même»: ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «par sa propre volonté»[2].
4. Le pronom ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ sert aussi de complément direct à la forme pleine des verbes: ⲁⲛⲓ̀ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲟⲩⲱϣⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «nous sommes venus l'adorer»[3].
Sur l'emploi de ⲙ̀- ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ comme préposition, voir 316.
Il y a en copte un certain nombre de mots qui suivent en général le nom ou le pronom personnel pour en modifier le sens. Les voici:
1. ϩⲱ⸗ aussi
2. ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗ seul
3. ⲧⲏⲣ⸗ tout
4. ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲁⲧ⸗ de soi-même
5. ⲣⲱ même
6. ⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ ensemble.
Parmi ces mots, quatre sont toujours à l'état pronominal; les deux autres sont invariables.
1°. ϩⲱ⸗ «aussi, même».
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϩⲱ | 1. | ϩⲱⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϩⲱⲕ | 2. | ϩⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ϩⲱⲓ | ||
| 3 m. | ϩⲱϥ | 3. | ϩⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϩⲱⲥ | ||
1. OSE. 353.
2. Th. 113.
3. Mt. 2, 2.
Ex:
ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥ ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉϥ ϩⲱϥ «qu'il se sauve lui-même»[1].
ⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕϣⲧⲉⲙⲧⲁⲕⲟ ϩⲱⲕ «sors afin de ne pas périr toi aussi»[2].
2°. ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗ «seul».
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ | 1. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲕ | 2. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁϯ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ | 3. | ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲁⲩⲁⲧⲥ | ||
Ex:
ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «de vous seuls»[3].
ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲑⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ «il n'est pas bon que l'homme soit seul»[4].
3. ⲧⲏⲣ⸗ «tout».
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲧⲏⲣⲧ | 1. | ⲧⲏⲣⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲧⲏⲣⲕ | 2. | (ⲧⲏⲣⲧⲉⲛ) inusité |
| f. | (ⲧⲏⲣⲓ) | ||
| 3 m. | ⲧⲏⲣϥ | 3. | ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲧⲏⲣⲥ | ||
Pour la 2 pl. on se sert de ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ: ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ «avec vous tous»[5].
ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲧⲏⲣϥ «la terre entière»[6].
ⲛⲓⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ «tous les Egyptiens»[7].
4. ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲁⲧ⸗ «de soi-même».
Ce mot, composé de ⲛ̀ et de ⲟⲩⲁⲓ «un» est très rare, il n'a été trouvé que deux fois: ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲁⲧⲥ «d'elle-même»[1]; ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲁⲧⲟⲩ «d'eux-mêmes»[2].
5. ⲣⲱ «même».
Ce mot est invariable et s'emploie comme même en français après les noms et les pronoms: ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲣⲱ «moi-même», ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲣⲱ «toi-même», ⲫⲁⲓ ⲣⲱ «celui-ci même», ⲡⲁⲓ-ϣⲓ ⲣⲱ ⲣⲱ «cette même mesure»[3].
Il s'emploie aussi adverbialement: ⲙⲟⲛⲟⲛ ⲣⲱ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲁⲥⲑⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁⲩ «seulement ne ramène pas mon fils là-bas»[4].
Les adjectifs et pronoms possessifs sont formés de l'article et des pronoms personnels affixes.
| Devant un nom sing. | Devant un nom | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| masculin | féminin | pluriel | |||||
| Sing. | 1. | ⲡⲁ- | mon | ⲧⲁ- | ma | ⲛⲁ- | mes |
| 2 m. | ⲡⲉⲕ- | ton | ⲧⲉⲕ- | ta | ⲛⲉⲕ- | tes | |
| f. | ⲡⲉ- | ton | ⲧⲉ- | ta | ⲛⲉ- | tes | |
| 3 m. | ⲡⲉϥ- | son | ⲧⲉϥ- | sa | ⲛⲉϥ- | ses | |
| f. | ⲡⲉⲥ- | son | ⲧⲉⲥ- | sa | ⲛⲉⲥ- | ses | |
| Pl. | 1. | ⲡⲉⲛ- | notre | ⲧⲉⲛ- | notre | ⲛⲉⲛ- | nos |
| 2. | ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛ- | votre | ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ- | votre | ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛ- | vos | |
| 3. | ⲡⲟⲩ- | leur | ⲧⲟⲩ- | leur | ⲛⲟⲩ- | leurs | |
Syntaxe.
1. L'article détermine l'objet possédé et s'accorde avec lui; l'affixe indique le possesseur et s'accorde avec lui: ⲡⲁ-ⲏⲓ «ma maison», ⲛⲁ-ⲓⲟϯ «mes pères», ⲧⲉⲕ-ⲙⲁⲩ «ta mère», ⲛⲉⲛ-ⲓⲟϯ «nos pères».
2. Quand l'objet possédé est indéterminé, au lieu des formes précédentes, on emploie l'article indéfini avec la particule du génitif ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- ⲛ̀ⲧ⸗: ⲟⲩ-ⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ «une maison à lui بيتٌ لهُ» tandis que ⲡⲉϥ-ⲏⲓ signifie «sa maison بيته».
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϭⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ «je suis une de tes colombes»[1].
Cette manière de s'exprimer s'emploie parfois même avec l'article défini et toujours avec les expressions qui ne peuvent pas recevoir les affixes:
ⲡⲓⲱⲙⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ «son baptême»[2].
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲃ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ «tes saints»[3].
3. L'adjectif possessif s'emploie devant les noms de nombre pour indiquer l'ordre des jours, sans que le mot «jour» soit exprimé:
ⲡⲉϥϣⲟⲙⲧ «le troisième jour».
ⲁⲛⲓ … ⲉ ⲧⲣⲱⲁⲥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲉ̅ «nous arrivâmes à Troas le cinquième jour»[4].
De même ⲉ-ⲡⲉϥ-ⲣⲁⲥϯ «le lendemain».
On doit toujours employer l'adjectif possessif formé de ⲡ et le faire accorder avec le sujet du verbe; ⲡⲉϥ-ⲣⲁⲥϯ «lendemain» est invariable parce que ϥ se rapporte au mot ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «jour» sous-entendu.
4. L'adjectif possessif ne s'emploie pas devant les noms qui ne reçoivent pas l'article (54); le rapport de possession est indiqué dans ces mots par les pronoms suffixes, comme en arabe:
ⲣⲱ-ⲓ فمي ma bouche,
ⲣⲁⲧ-ϥ رجله son pied,
ϩⲣⲁ-ⲕ وجهك ta face,
ⲧⲟⲧ-ⲥ يدها sa main.
Suffixation à ces noms.
1. Noms terminés par une vovelle: ϫⲱ⸗ «tête».
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϫⲱⲓ | 1. | ϫⲱⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϫⲱⲕ | 2. | ϫⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ϫⲱ | ||
| 3 m. | ϫⲱϥ | 3. | ϫⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϫⲱⲥ | ||
De même ⲣⲱ⸗ «bouche» et ϩⲑⲏ⸗ «cœur».
2. Noms terminés par une consonne:
| par ⲧ: ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ «pied»; | par ⲛ: ⲣⲉⲛ⸗ «nom». | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Sing. | 1. | ⲣⲁⲧ | ⲣⲉⲛⲧ |
| 2 m. | ⲣⲁⲧⲕ | ⲣⲉⲛⲕ | |
| f. | ⲣⲁϯ | ⲣⲉⲛⲓ | |
| 3 m. | ⲣⲁⲧϥ | ⲣⲉⲛϥ | |
| f. | ⲣⲁⲧⲥ | ⲣⲉⲛⲥ | |
| Pl. | 1. | ⲣⲁⲧⲉⲛ | ⲣⲉⲛⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2. | ⲣⲁⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | ⲣⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| 3. | ⲣⲁⲧⲟⲩ | ⲣⲉⲛⲟⲩ | |
Sur ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ se modèlent tous les mots terminés par ⲧ: ⲓⲁⲧ⸗, ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ϧⲏⲧ⸗, ϩⲏⲧ⸗; sur ⲣⲉⲛ⸗, les mots en ⲛ: ⲕⲉⲛ⸗, ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ⸗, de même que ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫ⸗.
Dans le mot ϩⲣ⸗ la voyelle formative se place entre le radical et les suffixes comme il suit:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϩⲣⲏⲓ | 1. | ϩⲣⲁⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϩⲣⲁⲕ | 2. | ϩⲣⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϩⲣⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ϩⲣⲁϥ | 3. | ϩⲣⲁⲩ |
| f. | ϩⲣⲁⲥ | ||
Règles et remarques.
1. Le suffix de la 1 sg. est ⲓ après une voyelle, ⲧ après une consonne; mais lorsque le mot est déjà terminé par ⲧ, on n'ajoute pas un second ⲧ, ⲣⲁⲧ (et non ⲣⲁⲧⲧ) «mon pied».
2. La 2 f. sg. ne prend rien après une voyelle, elle prend ⲓ après une consonne (ⲣⲁϯ = ⲣⲁⲧ-ⲓ).
3. Lorsque le mot terminé par une consonne a la voyelle formative après le radical, comme ϩⲣ⸗, la 1 sg. est toujours en ⲏⲓ et la 2 f. sg. en ⲉ.
4. Lorsque par suite du ⲧ radical (ⲣⲁⲧ) la 1 pl. est en ⲧⲉⲛ, la 2 pl. peut avoir deux formes:
a) Si le mot n'a pas de forme abrégée, comme ⲣⲁⲧ, on ajoute ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ à la 1 pl.: ⲣⲁⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «votre pied» au lieu de ⲣⲁⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ.
b) Si le mot a une forme abrégée, comme ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ dans ϩⲓ-ⲧⲉⲛ (57), on ajoute ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ à cette dernière forme: ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «de vous»[1].
En général, pour tous les mots qui ont une forme abrégée, la 2 pl. s'obtient en ajoutant ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ à cette forme:
ⲣⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «votre nom»; ϩⲣⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «votre face».
Pour ϫⲱ⸗ et ses composés on emploie les deux formes: ⲉϫⲱⲧⲉⲛ et ⲉϫⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ«sur vous»[2].
1. Formes.
Le pronom possessif a deux formes:
1. une forme abrégée:
| Sing. | Pl. | |
|---|---|---|
| masc. | fém. | |
| ⲫⲁ- | ⲑⲁ- | ⲛⲁ- |
2. une forme avec suffixes:
| masc. sing. | fém. sing. | pluriel | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Sing. | 1. | ⲫⲱⲓ | ⲑⲱⲓ | ⲛⲟⲩⲓ |
| 2 m. | ⲫⲱⲕ | ⲑⲱⲕ | ⲛⲟⲩⲕ | |
| f. | ⲫⲱ | ⲑⲱ | ⲛⲟⲩ | |
| 3 m. | ⲫⲱϥ | ⲑⲱϥ | ⲛⲟⲩϥ | |
| f. | ⲫⲱⲥ | ⲑⲱⲥ | ⲛⲟⲩⲥ | |
| Plur. | 1. | ⲫⲱⲛ | ⲑⲱⲛ | ⲛⲟⲩⲛ |
| 2. | ⲫⲱⲧⲉⲛ | ⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛⲟⲩⲧⲉⲛ | |
| 3. | ⲫⲱⲟⲩ | ⲑⲱⲟⲩ | ⲛⲟⲩⲟⲩ | |
En Ṣaꜥidique les formes sont les mêmes, mais avec ⲡ et ⲧ, au lieu des aspirées ⲫ ⲑ (24).
2. Sens.
La forme abrégée ⲫⲁ-, ⲑⲁ-, ⲛⲁ- a deux sens:
1. Un sens actif «possédant, possesseur de» qui correspond un peu au français «à» et à l'arabe «صاحب، ذو» dans les expressions de ce genre:
ⲛⲓⲥⲉⲣⲁⲫⲓⲙ ⲛⲁ ⲡⲓⲋ̅ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛϩ «les Séraphins aux six ailes»[1].
ⲙⲁ ⲡⲓⲧⲁⲓⲟ ⲙ̀ⲫⲁ-ⲡⲓⲧⲁⲓⲟ «donnez l'honneur au possesseur de l'honneur»[2].
ⲁⲃⲃⲁ ⲍⲁⲭⲁⲣⲓⲁⲥ ⲫⲁ-ⲡⲓⲉⲣⲫⲙⲉⲩⲓ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ «l'abbé Zacharias de bonne mémoire»[3].
2. Un sens passif qui convient aussi à la forme avec suffixes, «appartenant à, possession de»:
ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲫⲁ-ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲡⲉ «la terre est au Seigneur»[1].
ⲑⲱⲕ ⲧⲉ ϯϫⲟⲙ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲓⲱⲟⲩ «à toi appartient la force et la gloire»[2].
ⲫⲱⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲧⲏⲣϥ «à moi appartient toute la terre»[3].
3. Syntaxe.
1. Le pron. possessif, comme son nom l'indique, évite la répétition du nom du possesseur et équivaut au français «celui de, celle de, ceux de» ou «le mien, le tien, etc.»:
ⲡⲉϥⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲫⲁ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ «sa gloire et celle de son Père»[4].
ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲗⲱⲙ ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲓⲙⲁⲛⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ «ces fromages sont ceux du berger»[5].
2. Le pronom abrégé ⲫⲁ-, ⲑⲁ-, ⲛⲁ- forme avec les substantifs des composés comme:
ⲫⲁ-ⲡⲓⲣⲟ «celui de la porte = le portier».
ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲫⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ «les habitants du ciel et ceux de la terre»[6].
ⲛⲁ-ϯⲧⲁⲝⲓⲥ «ceux de l'ordre = les gardes»[7].
ⲛⲁ-ⲧϩⲏ «l'avenir»; ⲛⲁ-ⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ «le passé».
Les aspirées ⲫ ⲑ sont parfois remplacées par les fortes ⲡ ⲧ comme dans le dialecte ṣaꜥidique:
ⲧⲁ-ⲫⲙⲏⲓ «véritable»; ⲧⲁ-ⲫⲣⲟ «la bouche».
ⲡⲁ-ⲭⲱⲛ ou ⲡⲁ-ϣⲟⲛⲥ (le mois du dieu Chons) «Pachons».
3. On emploie souvent le pron. poss. après les relatifs démonstratifs ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ, ⲑⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ, ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ (97) en lui rattachant, au moyen de ⲛ, le nom de l'objet possédé:
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲫⲱϥ ⲛ̀ⲓⲱⲧ «celui qui est à lui en Père, c.-à-d. son Père»[1].
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲟⲩϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ «ses disciples»[2].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲡⲣⲟⲫⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲉϥⲧⲁⲓⲏⲟⲩⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲑⲱϥ ⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲕⲓ «aucun prophète n'est honoré dans sa propre ville»[3].
ⲑⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲑⲱϥ ⲙ̀ⲯⲩⲭⲏ «son âme»[4].
In the ancient Egyptian language, simple tenses were formed, like the Arabic preterite (الماضي), by placing the subject, noun or pronoun, after the verbal root. This mode of conjugation persisted in Coptic in the following verbs:
ⲛⲁⲁ to be tall
ⲛⲁⲛⲉ to be good
ⲛⲁϣⲉ to be numerous
ⲛⲉⲥⲉ to be beautiful
ⲡⲉϫⲉ to say
ⲉϩⲛⲉ to want
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ to be
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ to not be
ⲟⲩⲉⲧ to be different
ⲥϣⲉ it is necessary
The four words ⲛⲁⲁ, ⲛⲁϣⲉ, ⲛⲁⲛⲉ, ⲛⲉⲥⲉ are both verb and adjective; verb in that, like it, they have a subject and receive the affixed pronouns of all persons; adjective in that they express a quality like simple adjectives, without any precise idea of time. This is why we call them adjectival verbs.
They form independent propositions in all respects similar to the nominal proposition.
We can consider ⲛⲁⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲯⲁⲗⲙⲟⲥ «bon est le psaume» comme une proposition nominale ayant ⲛⲁⲛⲉ "good is the psalm" as a noun clause having (خبر) and ⲟⲩⲯⲁⲗⲙⲟⲥ as its subject (مبتدأ مؤخَّر).
These four words are composed of the auxiliary ⲛⲉ and old adjectives which remain in Coptic in the forms:
-ⲟ great (131, 1), ⲁⲛⲁⲓ to be good, ⲥⲁⲓ to be beautiful, ⲁϣⲁⲓ to be abundant.
ⲛⲁⲁ to be tall
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | (ⲛⲁⲏⲓ)[1] | 1. | (ⲛⲁⲁⲛ) |
| 2 m. | (ⲛⲁⲁⲕ) | 2. | (ⲛⲁⲱⲧⲉⲛ) |
| f. | (ⲛⲁⲉ) | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛⲁⲁϥ | 3. | ⲛⲁⲁⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲁⲁⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲛⲁⲁ-.
ⲛⲁⲁ ⲡⲉⲧ-ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲣⲟⲫⲏⲧⲉⲩⲓⲛ it is great to prophesy[2].
This word is quite rare; we prefer to use ⲛⲓϣϯ “grand” with the copula ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ.
ⲛⲁⲛⲉ to be good
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲛⲁⲛⲏⲓ | 1. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ | 3. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲛⲁⲛⲉ-.
Impersonally: ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ it is good
ⲛⲁⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲯⲁⲗⲙⲟⲥ the psalm is good[1].
ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫϯ ⲉ ⲡⲓⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ϫⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ God saw that the light was good[2].
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲓ | 1. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲕ | 2. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲛⲁϣⲱ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛⲁϣⲱϥ | 3. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲁϣⲱⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲛⲁϣⲉ-.
ⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲛⲁⲓ abundant is your mercy[3].
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲓ | 1. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲕ | 2. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱϥ | 3. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-.
It is obtained by means of ⲁⲛ which is placed after the subject.
ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ ⲁⲛ it is not good
ⲛⲁⲛⲉ ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛ-ϣⲟⲩϣⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ your glorification is not good[4].
These verbs can also accompany a word as simple qualifiers; they are then placed after this word in the following forms:
1. With a definite antecedent:
ⲉⲑⲛⲁ⸗
ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉ⸗
ⲉⲑⲛⲁϣⲱ⸗
ⲉⲑⲛⲉⲥⲱ⸗
ϯϭⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲉⲑⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ the beautiful dove
ⲫⲛⲟⲩⲛ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲁϥ the great abyss[1].
ϯⲧⲟⲓ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ the good part[2].
2. With an indefinite antecedent:
ⲉⲛⲁⲁ- ⲉⲛⲁ⸗
ⲉⲛⲁⲛⲉ- ⲉⲛⲁⲛⲉ⸗
ⲉⲛⲁϣⲉ- ⲉⲛⲁϣⲱ⸗
ⲉⲛⲉⲥⲉ- ⲉⲛⲉⲥⲱ⸗
ⲟⲩϩⲏⲧ ⲉⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ a good heart[3].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ in a good time[4].
In this form they can also be used as attributes, in the same way as other qualifiers formed from ⲉ and a qualitative (162); but in this case they are placed after the subject:
ϥⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲃⲉⲭⲉ ⲉⲛⲁϣⲱϥ your reward will be great[5].
ⲙⲁⲣⲉ ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙⲱⲓⲧ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲛⲁⲛⲉⲩ that your ways be good[6].
1°. ⲡⲉϫⲉ he said
This verb has the meaning of the perfect, it always precedes its subject and is conjugated as follows:
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲡⲉϫⲏⲓ | 1. | ⲡⲉϫⲁⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲡⲉϫⲁⲕ | 2. | ⲡⲉϫⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲡⲉϫⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ | 3. | ⲡⲉϫⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲡⲉϫⲁⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲡⲉϫⲉ-.
ⲡⲉϫⲉ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ Jesus said
ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ he said to them
We use ⲡⲉϫⲉ when the nominal subject follows immediately; if it is separated by a word, we use the pronominal form and the subject takes ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
ⲡⲉϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲗⲁⲧⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ Pilate said to them[1].
ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲓ-ϩⲏⲅⲉⲙⲱⲛ the president tells them[2].
ⲡⲉϫⲉ is composed of ⲡⲉ and the verb ϫⲱ to say.
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲉϩⲛⲏⲓ | 1. | ⲉϩⲛⲁⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲉϩⲛⲁⲕ | 2. | ⲉϩⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲉϩⲛⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲉϩⲛⲁϥ | 3. | ⲉϩⲛⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲉϩⲛⲁⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲉϩⲛⲉ-.
This verb is only used in two cases:
1. As a participle, to translate the expression “of free will”:
ⲁⲓⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲁⲓ ⲉϩⲛⲏⲓ I did this of my own free will[1].
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲉⲣⲛⲟⲃⲓ ⲉϩⲛⲁⲥ ⲁⲛ if someone sins without wanting to[2].
2. In relative clauses, with ⲉⲧ:
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉϩⲛⲉ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ what the Son wants[3].
ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲉϩⲛⲱⲟⲩ whatever they want[4].
ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲉϩⲛⲁϥ as he wishes[5].
Preceded by ⲡⲉⲧ, it takes on the meaning of the noun “will”:
ⲡⲉⲧⲉϩⲛⲁⲕ ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥϣⲱⲡⲓ thy will be done[6].
These two verbs have the meaning of an indefinite present tense. Their other tenses are:
| the imperfect: | ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ | there was |
| ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ | there was not | |
| the participle: | ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ | being |
| ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ | not being |
In the imperfect tense, we can also add ⲡⲉ after the subject. In ⲉⲙⲙⲟⲛ we often neglect to write ⲉ: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ.
These verbs have a dual purpose:
1. They serve, in the first present (236) and the first future (240), to introduce the nominal subject when it is indeterminate . This takes the indefinite article after ⲟⲩⲟⲛ in the affirmative clause and does not take any after ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ in the negative clause:
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲁ ⲭⲏ ϩⲁⲣⲟⲕ here is a place near you[1].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲏⲡⲓ ⲧⲟⲓ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ they have no number[2].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲁϩⲟ no man shall see my face[3].
In the imperfect: ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲟⲛⲁⲥⲧⲏⲣⲓⲟⲛ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲑⲟϣ ϣⲙⲓⲙ there was a monastery in the nome of Akhmim[4].
ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ϯⲕⲩⲃⲱⲧⲟⲥ there was nothing in the ark[5].
2. Followed by a dative preposition (ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲉ, ⲙ̀), they mean: “to be at, not to be at”, and consequently “to have, not to have”. The most commonly used expression is ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, which can be followed by the adverb ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ “there” placed after the subject.
This expression occurs in both absolute and constructed states .
| With the suffixes: | ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲏⲓ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲏⲓ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ | |
| etc. | etc. | |
| Before a noun: | ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- |
Often the two ⲛs contract into one:
| With the suffixes: | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲏⲓ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲏⲓ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ | |
| etc. | etc. | |
| Before a noun: | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ- | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉ- |
Syntax: The real subject takes ⲛ̀ and is placed after.
With this same meaning "there is, there is not", their use is especially frequent in the nominal clause (232, 3), when the subject is accompanied by a prepositional construction or another expression which completes the meaning of the sentence:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲏϣ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ there are many places in my Father’s house[1].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲇⲟⲗⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ there is no guile in him[2].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲧⲟϩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲃⲉⲛ ϩⲁⲣⲟⲛ ⲉⲛⲁϣⲱⲟⲩ there is plenty of straw and hay at our place[3].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲧⲟⲡⲟⲥ ⲉⲑⲣⲉⲕϣⲧⲟ ⲉⲣⲟⲛ there is room to accommodate your camels with us[4].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲉⲣϣⲓϣⲓ the son of man has power[5].
ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ϣⲏⲣⲓ the woman had a little child[6].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲗⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ⲟϫⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ he has an unjust tongue[1].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ϩⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ we have nothing[2].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩϩⲃⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ you have a suit[3].
| With the suffixes: | Sg. | 1. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛϯ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛϯ |
| 2 m. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲕ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉⲕ | ||
| f. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉϥ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉϥ | ||
| f. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲥ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉⲥ | ||
| Pl. | 1. | (ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲛ) | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉⲛ | |
| 2. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ||
| 3. | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ | ||
| Before a noun: | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ- | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉ-. |
Syntax: The real subject comes after without taking ⲛ̀:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛϯ ⲉⲣϣⲓϣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ I have the power[4].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ ϩⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ they have nothing[5].
ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲥ ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ she had a servant[6].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ do you have anything in this place?[7].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛⲧⲉϥ ϧⲁⲏ it has no end[8].
In the same sense "to have, not to have", we also use:
1.
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ |
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙⲁϣϫ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ he who has ears[9].
ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲡⲉ he did not have the power[1].
2.
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲉⲙ⸗ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛⲉⲙ⸗. |
The last two expressions are rare:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ϫⲓϫ ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ you have two hands[2].
Note. Used with ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ and ⲉⲣⲟ⸗, the verb ⲟⲩⲟⲛ conveys the idea of “to owe, to have a debt.”
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ indicates the creditor and ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ the debtor.
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲏⲣ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁϭⲟⲓⲥ كم عليك لرابي How much do you owe my master?[3].
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲛ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ من انا عليهم those who owe us, our debtors[4].
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ the one who owes, the debtor[5].
ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲫ̅ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲑⲉⲣⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ he owed 500 denarii[6].
This verb is invariable, it always precedes the subject:
ⲟⲩⲉⲧ ⲡ-ⲱⲟⲩ ⲙⲉⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲁ-ⲧ-ⲫⲉ ⲟⲩⲉⲧ ⲡ-ⲱⲟⲩ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲁ-ⲡ-ⲕⲁϩⲓ one is the glory of those who dwell in heaven, another that of those who dwell on earth[7].
This verb governs the dative with ⲛ̀:
ⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ I need
With negation: ⲛ̀-ⲥϣⲉ ⲁⲛ ou ⲥϣⲉ ⲁⲛ one must not.
With ⲡⲉⲧ it forms the neuter ⲡⲉⲧ-ⲥϣⲉ what is necessary, the suitable.
Prepositions are simple (ⲉ) or compound (ⲉ-ϫⲉⲛ). They are used with nouns and with affixed pronouns. In the first case they are in the constructed state and the accent is on their regime; in the second case they themselves carry the tonic accent.
ⲁⲧϭⲛⲉ- ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩ⸗ with
ⲉ- ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ towards الى
ⲛ̀- ⲛ⸗ to لِ
ⲛⲉⲙ- ⲛⲉⲙ⸗ with
ⲟⲩⲃⲉ- ⲟⲩⲃⲏ⸗ against
ⲟⲩⲧⲉ- ⲟⲩⲧⲱ⸗ between
ⲥⲁ- in
ϣⲁ- ϣⲁⲣⲟ⸗ until
ϧⲁ- ϧⲁⲣⲟ⸗ under
ϧⲉⲛ- ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ⸗ in
ϩⲁ- ϩⲁⲣⲟ⸗ towards
ϩⲓ- ϩⲓⲱⲧ⸗ on
ⲁⲧϭⲛⲉ- without
ⲁⲧϭⲛⲉ- ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩ⸗ or ⲁϭⲛⲉ- ⲁϭⲛⲟⲩ⸗ (Ṣ. ⲁϫⲛ̄- ⲁϫⲛ̄ⲧ⸗).
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩⲓ | 1. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩⲕ | 2. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | |||
| 3 m. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩϥ | 3. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲁⲧϭⲛⲟⲩⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ⲁⲧϭⲛⲉ- or ⲁϭⲛⲉ-.
The regime of this preposition does not generally take the article; it can be a noun or a verb in the infinitive:
ⲁϭⲛⲉ ⲛⲟⲃⲓ without sin[1];
ⲁϭⲛⲉ ⲉⲣϩⲏⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ without hesitation[2].
ⲉ- ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ towards, at
This preposition (61) means:
1. to, towards الى with physical or moral movement: ⲉ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ towards the desert[3], ⲉⲣⲟϥ to him.
2. to لِ with the dative meaning: ϩⲟⲛϩⲉⲛ ⲉ to order to ⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉ to show to.
3. from, out of من: ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲧⲥⲏϥⲓ to escape the sword[4].
4. on على:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲭⲣⲉⲟⲥ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ I have a debt[5].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲉϥⲉⲉⲣϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲉⲣⲟ he himself will be your master[6].
ⲧⲁⲗⲟ⸗ ⲉ to climb on
5. It is used to form the comparative (171).
There are a number of active verbs in French which are neuter in Coptic and govern their complement with ⲉ- ⲉⲣⲟ⸗.
These are:
1. Verbs that express an operation of the senses or the mind:
ⲛⲁⲩ to see, ϫⲟⲩϣⲧ to look, ⲥⲟⲙⲥ to consider;
ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ to hear, ϭⲓⲥⲙⲏ to listen;
ϣⲱⲗⲉⲙ to smell;
ϫⲟⲙϫⲉⲙ to feel, ϭⲟϩ to touch;
ⲉⲙⲓ to know, ⲕⲁϯ to understand, ⲙⲉⲩⲓ to think, ⲛⲁϩϯ to believe, ⲉⲣϩⲉⲗⲡⲓⲥ to hope.
2. Verbs that express speech: ⲙⲟⲩϯ to call, ⲥⲙⲟⲩ to bless, ϩⲱⲥ to praise, ϯϩⲟ to pray, ⲥⲁϩⲟⲩⲓ to curse, ϩⲱⲟⲩϣ to blame, ϫⲱⲛⲧ to be angry with.
3. Several verbs that express movement: ⲕⲓⲙ to move, ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ to throw, ϣⲁⲣⲓ to strike, ⲕⲱϯ, ⲧⲁⲕⲧⲟ to surround, ⲁⲣⲉϩ, ⲣⲱⲓⲥ to keep.
ⲛ̀- (ⲙ̀- 28) ⲛ⸗ (from eg. n).
It is the dative preposition (61):
ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲫⲓⲗⲓⲡⲡⲟⲥ he said to Philip[1].
ⲡⲉϫⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲁϥ they said to him
ⲟⲩⲟⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ woe to the world[2].
The verb ϯ and its compounds govern the dative with ⲛ̀.
ⲛ̀- ( ⲙ̀-) ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ (from the eg. m).[3] in.
This preposition (65) means:
1. “in, during” for place and time:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲉⲟⲟⲩ on this day, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ in this place.
ⲁϥⲟϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ he spent two days there[4].
ⲁϥⲱⲛϧ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲥⲏⲑ ⲛ̀ⲱ̅ⲉ̅ ⲛ̀ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ Seth lived 805 years[5].
2. from, out of, من. In this sense it is generally preceded by ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲟⲩⲉⲓ ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ do not go away from me[6].
3. “by, by means of”, for the instrument and the oath:
ⲛ̀ⲧⲥⲏϥⲓ by the sword;
ⲁϥⲱⲣⲕ ⲙ̀ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧϭⲟⲥⲓ he swore by the Most High[7].
4. It serves as a link between the verbs “to be, to become, to do, to appear” and their attribute:
ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲣⲟ to be king.
ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲙⲁⲛⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ he became a shepherd[8].
ϥⲛⲁⲁⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲛ̀ⲣⲁⲙⲁⲟ he will make us rich[1].
ⲁϥⲟϩⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲫⲏ ⲉ ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ he remained in what he was[2].
5. It unites the direct complement to the absolute form of verbs (277).
ⲛⲉⲙ- ⲛⲉⲙ⸗ with.
For the suffixation, see 61.
This preposition means:
1. with: ϯ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ I am with you[3].
2. “to” after the verb ⲥⲁϫⲓ: ⲁϥⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲟⲩ he spoke to them[4].
3. It is used to unite nouns and pronouns, as a conjunction (333): ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ your father and I[5].
ⲟⲩⲃⲉ- ⲟⲩⲃⲏ⸗ against, towards.
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲓ | 1. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲕ | 2. | ⲟⲩⲃⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏϥ | 3. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲥ | ||
This preposition is quite rare:
ⲛⲉⲛⲃⲁⲗ ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲕ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ our eyes are toward you, Lord[6].
ϯ ⲟⲩⲃⲉ- to give against, to resist.
ⲟⲩⲧⲉ- ⲟⲩⲧⲱ⸗ between.
ⲟⲩⲧⲉ ⲧⲫⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ between heaven and earth[7].
ⲟⲩⲧⲱⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ between me and you[8].
ⲟⲩⲧⲱⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩⲧⲉ ⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲟⲛϧ between me and every living soul[1].
ϣⲁ- ϣⲁⲣⲟ⸗ until.
ϣⲁ ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫⲥ ⲛ̀ϯⲟⲓⲕⲟⲩⲙⲉⲛⲏ to the ends of the earth[2].
ϣⲁ ⲉⲛⲉϩ until eternity.
On ϣⲁ used as a conjunction with the subjunctive, see 251.
ϧⲁ- ϧⲁⲣⲟ⸗ under.
Means:
1. under: ϧⲁ ⲟⲩⲙⲉⲛⲧ under a bushel[3].
In this sense it is used with verbs that mean "to carry" when the carrier is supposed to be under the burden:
ⲉⲧⲟⲡⲧ ϧⲁ ⲛⲟⲩⲉⲧⲫⲱⲟⲩⲓ laden with their burdens[4].
2. “about, for or against” after the verb “to testify”; “against” after “to murmur”:
ⲉⲣⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉ ϧⲁ testify for or against[5].
3. for: ⲟⲩⲃⲁⲗ ϧⲁ ⲟⲩⲃⲁⲗ an eye for an eye[6].
In this sense it precedes the price supplement:
ⲡⲓϣⲱⲡ ϧⲁ ϩⲁⲧ one who is bought with money[7].
4. of, about:
ϯⲗⲟⲅⲟⲥ ϧⲁ to account for[8].
ϥⲓ ⲫⲣⲱⲟⲩϣ ϧⲁ take care of[9].
5. as, in the capacity of:
ⲁⲩϯ ⲛ̀ⲓⲱⲥⲏⲫ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲁ ⲃⲱⲕ they sold Joseph as a slave[10].
ϧⲉⲛ- ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ⸗ in.
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ | 1. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲕ | 2. | ϧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ or ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏϯ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ | 3. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲥ | ||
Means:
1. in[1], for time and place:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ in the world.
ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲁⲣⲭⲏ in the beginning.
2. to, in:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲫⲣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲫⲓⲱⲧ in the name of the Father.
ⲁⲓϯⲙⲁϯ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ I took pleasure in him[2].
3. “by means of” for the instrument: ϧⲱⲧⲉⲃ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲥⲏϥⲓ to kill by the sword[3].
4. among, instead of: ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ among men[4].
ϩⲁ- ϩⲁⲣⲟ⸗ towards.
Means "towards, in front of":
ⲁⲩⲓ̀ ϩⲁⲣⲟϥ they came to him[5].
ⲁⲩⲉⲛϥ ϩⲁ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ they led him to Jesus[6].
ⲁϥⲕⲟⲧϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲁⲃⲣⲁⲁⲙ ϩⲁ ⲛⲉϥⲁⲗⲱⲟⲩⲓ Abraham returned to his children[7].
ϧⲁhas sometimes been used instead of ϩⲁ apparently simply out of confusion: ⲉⲓⲉ̀ⲓ̀ ϧⲁⲣⲟⲕ[8] for ⲉⲓⲉ̀ⲓ̀ ϩⲁⲣⲟⲕ I will come to you.
ϩⲓ- ϩⲓⲱⲧ⸗ on.
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϩⲓⲱⲧ | 1. | ϩⲓⲱⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϩⲓⲱⲧⲕ | 2. | ϩⲓ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϩⲓⲱϯ | ||
| 3 m. | ϩⲓⲱⲧϥ | 3. | ϩⲓⲱⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϩⲓⲱⲧⲥ | ||
Before a noun: ϩⲓ-.
Means:
1. on, على:
ϩⲓ ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲓⲧ on the way[1].
ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲧⲱⲟⲩ he lived on the mountain[2].
2. in, في: ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ in the desert[3].
3. under, in the time of, على عهد: ϩⲓ ⲕⲗⲁⲩⲇⲓⲟⲥ under Claudius[4].
4. with, بِ مع: ϣⲁⲩⲟⲩⲟⲙϥ ϩⲓ ⲱⲓⲕ they eat it with bread[5].
5. of, in:
ϩⲓ ⲟⲩⲥⲟⲡ at once[6].
ϩⲓ ⲫⲟⲩⲉⲓ from afar.
Compound prepositions are formed from a simple preposition and a noun indicating a part of the human body: ϫⲱ⸗ head, ϩⲣ⸗ (83) face, ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ (82) hand, ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ (82) foot, ⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ chest, or the place: ⲥⲁ, ⲥⲕⲉⲛ side.
Compound prepositions:
1. of ϫⲱ⸗ head:
ⲉϫⲉⲛ- ⲉϫⲱ⸗ on, على;
loc. prep. ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ on going up, ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ on going down;
ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ- since;
ϧⲁϫⲉⲛ- ϧⲁϫⲱ⸗ before, in front;
ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ- ϩⲓϫⲱ⸗ on, loc. prep. ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ from on while descending , from on while ascending, and more rarely “from while moving away ”, ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ on without movement.
2. of ϩⲣ⸗ face:
ⲉϩⲣⲉⲛ- ⲉϩⲣ⸗ towards, in front of, by, against;
ⲛⲁϩⲣⲉⲛ- ⲛⲁϩⲣ⸗ in front of, near.
3. de ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ hand:
ⲉⲧⲉⲛ- ⲉⲧⲟⲧ⸗ to, لِ;
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛ- ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ to, in the power of, by, of, من:
ⲛⲁⲩϭⲓⲱⲙⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧϥ they were baptized by him[1].
Loc. prep. ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛ of, من;
ⲥⲁⲧⲟⲧ⸗ right away, immediately;
ϣⲁⲧⲉⲛ- until;
ϧⲁⲧⲉⲛ- ϧⲁⲧⲟⲧ⸗ near, near, at the foot of, at;
ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ- ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧ⸗ by, by means of”, loc. prep. ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ from coming , by means of” (276, 1).
4. of ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ foot:
ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ at the foot of, on foot;
ⲛ̀ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ on foot;
ϧⲁⲣⲁⲧ⸗ at the foot of, under:
ⲁⲥⲃⲟⲣⲃⲉⲣ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲁⲗⲟⲩ ϧⲁⲣⲁⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲃⲱ ⲛ̀ϫⲱⲓⲧ she threw the child at the foot of an olive tree[2].
5. from ⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ chest: ϧⲁⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ near, ϩⲓⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ same meaning.
6. of ⲥⲁ- side. This word is a preposition by itself; it indicates the situation in a place:
ⲥⲁ ⲡⲉⲓⲉⲃⲧ in the east[3].
ⲟⲩⲓⲛⲁⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ on your right[4].
It can be joined to the article: ⲉⲡⲥⲁ ⲙ̀ⲫⲓⲟⲙ on the sea side[5].
It forms:
a. ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ- ⲛ̀ⲥⲱ⸗ which means “behind, after”:
ⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ follow me[6], and is used after some verbs: ⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ- to seek, ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ- to grant.
b. ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ- ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲱ⸗ after; ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲉⲧⲁ⸗ after[1].
c. ⲥⲁⲙⲉⲛϩⲏ ⲛ̀, ⲥⲁⲙⲉⲛϩⲉ-, ⲥⲁⲙⲉⲛϩⲏ⸗ behind, after:
ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲥⲁⲙⲉⲛϩⲏ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ he followed his brothers[2].
ⲥⲱϣ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲥⲁⲙⲉⲛϩⲏⲛ she shouts behind us[3].
7. of ⲥⲕⲉⲛ- side: ⲉⲥⲕⲉⲛ- next to, along, on the edge of:
ⲉⲥⲕⲉⲛ ⲫⲓⲟⲙ on the seashore[4].
ϩⲓⲥⲕⲉⲛ- or ⲓⲥⲕⲉⲛ- same meaning:
ϩⲓⲥⲕⲉⲛ ⲫⲓⲟⲙ on the seashore[5].
ⲓⲥⲕⲉⲛ ⲫⲓⲁⲣⲟ on the river bank[6].
The main Greek prepositions used in Coptic are:
ⲕⲁⲧⲁ according to:
ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲫⲣⲏϯ like.
ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲁϥϫⲟⲥ as he said.
ⲡⲁⲣⲁ of, من, beyond, above.
By analogy with ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ we sometimes form in Boḥairic and generally in ṣaꜥidic ⲕⲁⲧⲁⲣⲟ⸗, ⲡⲁⲣⲁⲣⲟ⸗: ⲕⲁⲧⲁⲣⲟϥ according to him[7].
ⲭⲱⲣⲓⲥ without; the following word is usually without an article:
ⲭⲱⲣⲓⲥ ⲁⲛⲁⲅⲕⲏ without necessity.
ⲓⲙⲏϯ (εἴ μή τι) if not, except.
ϩⲱⲥ (ὡς) as, as; the following word does not take an article:
ϩⲱⲥ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ as good, ϩⲱⲥ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ as man.
There are a number of simple adverbs in Coptic, such as: ⲁϩⲁ «yes», ⲑⲱⲛ «where?», ⲣⲁⲥϯ «tomorrow». These will be learned through use. We only give the general rules here.
These adverbs are formed by means of the particle ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀) placed before the name of time and place:
ⲙ̀-ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ in this place, here
ⲛ̀-ⲑⲙⲏϯ in the middle
ⲙ̀-ⲙⲁⲩ there
ⲙ̀-ⲫⲟⲟⲩ today
ⲙ̀-ⲙⲏⲛⲓ every day
ⲛ̀-ⲣⲁⲥϯ tomorrow
Adverbs of manner are formed:
1. By means of ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀) and a noun or an infinitive without an article:
ⲙ̀-ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ in Egyptian
ⲛ̀-ⲭⲱⲗⲉⲙ quickly
ⲛ̀-ⲭⲱⲡ in secret
2. By means of ϧⲉⲛ and a noun or an infinitive with the article ⲟⲩ:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲉⲧⲉⲫⲗⲏⲟⲩ in vain;
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ manifestly.
3. By means of ⲛ̀ and an adjective: ⲛ̀-ϣⲟⲣⲡ first.
With adjectives composed of privative ⲁⲧ and a verb, ⲛ̀ forms adverbial expressions which are translated by the infinitive preceded by without: ⲛ̀ⲁⲑⲟⲩⲱⲙ without eating[1], ⲛ̀ⲁⲧⲥⲱ without drinking, ⲛ̀ⲁⲧϣⲗⲏⲗ without praying[2].
Coptic has several widely used adverbs which are formed from a simple preposition and one of the following words indicating the situation in the place:
| ⲃⲟⲗ | out | ϧⲟⲩⲛ | inside |
| ⲡ-ϣⲱⲓ | the top | ⲡ-ⲉⲥⲏⲧ | the bottom |
| ϩⲣⲏⲓ | above | ϧⲣⲏⲓ | underneath |
| ϩⲏ | in front | ⲫ-ⲁϩⲟⲩ | behind |
ⲃⲟⲗ forms ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «outside, going out». This adverb accompanies a certain number of verbs, and, although it adds to the meaning the nuance of exit (angl. out , g. aus ), of manifestation, of completion, it is not generally translated: ⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ “appear, manifest”. The other adverbs formed from ⲉⲃⲟⲗ are: ⲙ̀ⲃⲟⲗ «outside», ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ «outside».
ϧⲟⲩⲛ: ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ «inside , while entering», ⲛ̀ϧⲟⲩⲛ, ⲥⲁϧⲟⲩⲛ “inside” without movement.
ⲡϣⲱⲓ: ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ “up” with movement, ⲙ̀ⲡϣⲱⲓ, ⲥⲁⲡϣⲱⲓ “up” without movement.
ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ: ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ “down” with movement, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ, ⲥⲁⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ “down” without movement.
ϩⲣⲏⲓ: ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ “up, above, here, going up ”, ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ “above” without movement.
ϧⲣⲏⲓ: ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ “down, below, here, going down ” , ⲛ̀ϧⲣⲏⲓ “below” without movement.
ϩⲏ: ⲉⲧϩⲏ, ⲉⲑⲏ “in front of, ahead of, beyond”, ⲛ̀ϩⲏ recently, ⲥⲁⲧϩⲏ «before, previously», ϧⲁⲧϩⲏ in front of, ϩⲓⲧϩⲏ, ϩⲓⲑⲏ in front of.
ⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ: ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ behind, ⲥⲁⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ, ϩⲓⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ behind.
Remarks.
1. Adverbs composed of ⲉ form prepositional phrases when they are followed by ⲉ or ϩⲁ:
ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲁ from going out , moving away
ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ, ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ϩⲁ towards entering
ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ ⲉ, ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ ϩⲁ upwards
ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ on, etc.
Very common is the use of ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ of, of among.
2. After compounds of ⲥⲁ we use ⲙ̀, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗: ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ outside, ⲥⲁϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲙ̀ inside, ⲥⲁⲡϣⲱⲓ ⲙ̀ above, ⲥⲁⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲙ̀ below, etc.
3. After compounds of ⲛ̀ we use ϧⲉⲛ, ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ⸗: ⲛ̀ϧⲣⲏⲓ ϧⲉⲛ, ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ ϧⲉⲛ in, among:
ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ he lived among us[1];
ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ among them[2].
4. After the compounds of ⲉ, ⲛ, we can repeat ϩⲓ:
ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ towards the desert[3].
ⲛ̀ϩⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ in the desert[4].
ⲛ̀ϧⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ same meaning[5].
Here are the conjunctions which give rise to some grammatical remarks.
ⲟⲩⲟϩ (Ṣ. ⲁⲩⲱ), ⲛⲉⲙ (Ṣ. ⲙⲛ̄), ϩⲓ «and».
ⲟⲩⲟϩ can be used everywhere, but preferably it is used to unite clauses:
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲁϥϫⲟⲥ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ he said and it was done[1].
ⲛⲉⲙ properly means "with" (316): it is therefore used when "and" could be replaced by "with", i.e. between nouns. It rarely connects two clauses (cf. Deut. 6:7; 11:19).
ϯⲁⲛⲁⲥⲧⲁⲥⲓⲥ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲓⲱⲛϧ the resurrection and the life[2].
ϩⲓ unites nouns that do not have an article:
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲛⲟϥ ϩⲓ ⲭⲣⲟϥ a man of blood and malice[3].
ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲉⲧϧⲁϯ ⲛ̀ⲉⲣⲱϯ ϩⲓ ⲉⲃⲓⲱ the land where milk and honey flow الارض التي تدُرّ لبنَا وعسلَا[4].
Used:
1. to announce direct speech:
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ϯϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉ ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛϫⲁϫⲓ I say to you: Love your enemies[5].
ⲁϥϣⲉⲛⲟⲩ ϫⲉ ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲛⲓⲙ he asked them: Whom are you looking for?[1].
ⲁϥϭⲱⲣⲉⲙ ⲉⲛⲓⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ϫⲉ ⲁⲙⲟⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ he signaled to the brothers (saying): Take hold of him[2].
2. To introduce indirect speech, especially after verbs that mean "to say, to declare, to know, to think, to see." We then translate it as "that."
Sometimes it is not possible to distinguish whether the speech is direct or indirect.
ⲁϥⲉⲣⲟⲩⲱ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ ϫⲉ ⲁⲓϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ Jesus answered: I told you that it was I[3].
ϯⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲣϩⲟϯ ϧⲁⲧϩⲏ ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ I know that you do not fear God[4].
ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ϫⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ God saw that it was good[5].
3. After verbs that mean “to call.”
ⲉⲩⲉⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲣⲁⲛ ϫⲉ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ they will call him Jesus[6].
ⲁ ⲫϯ ⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲡⲓⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ God called the light day[7].
ⲁϥϯⲣⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϥⲣⲁⲛ ϫⲉ ⲥⲏⲑ he called him Seth[8].
4. It indicates the cause , the reason for something:
ϥⲥⲙⲁⲣⲱⲟⲩⲧ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲥ ϫⲉ ⲁϥⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲗⲁⲟⲥ blessed be the Lord, for he has delivered his people[9].
ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛϩⲱⲥ ⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ϫⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲱⲟⲩ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲁϥϭⲓⲱⲟⲩ let us praise the Lord, for he has been greatly glorified[10].
Drive out Macarius of Edkou ϫⲉ ⲁ ⲟⲩⲥⲑⲉⲣⲧⲉⲣ ⲧⲁϩⲟⲛ because agitation has taken hold of us[1].
In this sense it is often followed by ⲟⲩⲏⲓ in truth.
ϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲏⲓ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲡⲉϥϩⲁⲧ ⲡⲉ because, in truth, it is his money[2].
5. It indicates the goal , the intention :
ⲁⲛⲓ̀ ϫⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲟⲩⲱϣⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ we have come to worship him[3].
6. ϫⲉ is used like the French “de” in expressions like this: “the name of magician” ⲡⲓⲣⲁⲛ ϫⲉ ⲙⲁⲅⲟⲥ[4].
This particle differs from its homonym in origin (e.g. gert ), in meaning and in use. While the other is proclitic, this one is enclitic and means "but, moreover, also". It is used after another conjunction: ϩⲟⲧⲉ ϫⲉ «but when»[5]. ⲉⲡⲓⲇⲏ ϫⲉ «but since»[6].
Compounds of ϫⲉ. ϫⲉ combines with some words to form the following phrases:
ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ϫⲉ (Ṣ. ⲉⲧⲃⲉ ϫⲉ «because, since»;
ⲉⲫⲙⲁ ϫⲉ (Ṣ. ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϫⲉ) «because».
They gave money to free themselves ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ϫⲉ ϩⲁⲛⲙⲁⲓⲭⲣⲏⲙⲁ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲓⲁⲣⲭⲱⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲓⲑⲟϣ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ because the magistrates of this nome were greedy[7].
I will bless in your seed all the nations of the earth ⲉⲫⲙⲁ ϫⲉ ⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲧⲁⲥⲙⲏ because you have obeyed my voice[8].
ϫⲉⲭⲁⲥ (Ṣ. ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ) “that, in order that, although”. This word is composed of ϫⲉ and ⲭⲁ-ⲥ, the pronominal state of ⲭⲱ “to leave”, with the neuter pronoun ⲥ:
He said to himself ϫⲉⲭⲁⲥ ϫⲉ ⲫϯ ⲛ̀ϯⲉⲣϩⲟϯ ⲁⲛ ϧⲁⲧⲉϥϩⲏ although I do not fear God[1].
ϫⲉⲭⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲉⲣⲡⲣⲉⲥⲃⲉⲩⲓⲛ ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲱⲛ so that they may intercede for us[2].
ϫⲉ ⲕⲁⲛ (κἄν) even though:
ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ϫⲉ ϥⲟⲛϧ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ϫⲉ ⲕⲁⲛ ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛϧⲟⲑⲃⲉⲧ ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁϩⲱⲗ ⲁⲛ he said: As the Lord lives, even if they kill me, I will not leave[3].
Comes after the word it determines: ϣⲧⲉⲙⲓ̀ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ⲟⲛ not to return to this place[4]. ⲡⲉϫⲉ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲩⲥⲏⲥ God said again to Moses[5].
This word, used as a conjunction, is rare:
The beasts of burden of the Egyptians died ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϫⲉ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲧⲉⲃⲛⲱⲟⲩⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉⲛϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲣⲁⲏⲗ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲙⲟⲩ but of the beasts of burden of the children of Israel, not one died[6].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ also has the meaning of “rather”, as in this sentence:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲑⲣⲉⲛⲉⲣⲙ̀ⲕⲁϩ ⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ϩⲱⲃ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲓ̀ ⲁⲗⲗⲁ ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛⲉⲣⲙ̀ⲕⲁϩ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲡϫⲣⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲛⲯⲩⲭⲏ let us not be saddened by the misfortunes which may happen to us, but rather let us grieve over the poverty of our souls[1].
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲓⲉ ⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ if you saw or heard[2].
ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ ⲓⲉ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ his father or his mother[3].
By repeating itself it forms the dilemma: ⲁⲣⲓ ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲁⲓⲃ̅ ⲓⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕϯⲭⲣⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϣⲗⲏⲗ ⲓⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕϣⲗⲏⲗ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϯⲭⲣⲱⲙ choose one of the two, either set fire and I will pray, or pray and I will set fire[4].
This particle, which must be distinguished from the previous one, is used between a conditional clause and the main clause on which it depends, with the meaning of "yet, however, in this case, then".
ⲕⲁⲛ ⲁϥϣⲧⲉⲙⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲓⲉ ⲟⲩϣⲁⲛϩⲑⲏϥ ⲡⲉ even if he does not bring water, yet he is merciful[5].
This turn of phrase is mainly used when the main clause expresses a request, a question, an exclamation.
ⲓⲉ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ-ⲟⲩ ⲕϯⲱⲙⲥ ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲭ︤ⲥ︥ why then do you baptize, if you are not the Christ?[6].
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϩⲱⲃ ⲛ̀ⲧⲏⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲓⲉ ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲓϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲭⲣⲓⲥⲧⲓⲁⲛⲟⲥ if I have nothing to do with you, what have you to do with the children of Christians?[7].
If he gives sight to the blind ⲓⲉ ⲟⲩ-ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ⲣⲏϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲙⲁⲩ who is this man?[8].
Clauses are divided into verbal and nominal clauses .
A verbal clause is one that contains a verb in any mood; a nominal clause is one that does not contain a verb.
From the point of view of dependence, propositions are independent or subordinate.
We will first deal with the verbal clause and the nominal clause in general and especially when they are independent.
We will then see the different types of propositions which have a particular syntax.
1. The order of the elements of the verbal clause is generally as follows:
1. Auxiliary
2. Subject, noun or affixed pronoun
3. Verb
4. Direct complement
5. Indirect complement
6. Adverbial complements
ⲁϥϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩϩⲙⲟⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲙⲑⲟ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ he gave favor to his people before the Egyptians[1].
ⲁ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲑⲁⲙⲓⲟ ⲛ̀ⲧⲫⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ God created the heavens and the earth[2].
ⲁ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲑⲟⲩⲣⲏⲥ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲧⲏⲣϥ the Lord brought a burning wind upon the earth all day long[3].
2. When the verb is in the absolute state and the indirect object is a pronoun, the latter comes before the direct object:
ⲁ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲥⲉⲙⲛⲓ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲛϩⲁⲡ the Lord gave him precepts[4].
ⲙⲁ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲏⲓ ϭⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓϩⲑⲱⲣ give me the men and take the horses[5].
3. When the verb is accompanied by the adverb ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, it is placed after the direct complement; in the previous case (2) and when the verb is in the pronominal state, it is placed after the indirect complement:
ⲟⲩⲱⲣⲡ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ send my people away[6].
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥⲟⲩⲟⲛϩϥ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ he will not show himself to you[7].
The order just indicated is often changed. When we want to highlight an element, we put it at the head of the clause by replacing it, if it is the subject or a complement, with a pronoun (ضمير عائد) which agrees with it.
We call this figure prolepsis . It is a very common construction in Coptic, especially in Holy Scripture where the translators were keen to preserve the word order of the Greek text.
Prolepsis occurs in two ways.
The highlighted element precedes the proposition without being introduced by any particle, especially when the proposition is united to the preceding one by ⲅⲁⲣ «because», ⲇⲉ «but».
Prolepsis of the subject:
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟϥ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲁϥⲧⲱⲛϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲣⲉϥⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ for he is risen from the dead[1].
ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ but my father entered[2].
ⲟⲩⲭⲁⲕⲓ ⲛⲁϥⲭⲏ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲫⲛⲟⲩⲛ darkness was over the deep[3].
In this same case, we often use the compound tenses of the auxiliary ⲉ (248), and of the relative pronoun ⲉⲧ especially when the subject is a pronoun. Cf. Andersson, AB. 40, 41.
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲉⲛⲁϥⲭⲏ ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ ϩⲏ ϧⲁⲧⲉⲛ ⲫϯ this was in the beginning with God[4].
ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉϣⲁⲩⲭⲱ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲏⲣⲡ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲣⲡ every man puts good wine first[5].
Direct complement prolepsis:
ⲟⲩϩⲑⲟ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩϭⲁⲥⲓϩⲑⲟ ⲁϥⲃⲉⲣⲃⲱⲣⲟⲩ ⲉⲫⲓⲟⲙ he threw the horse and the rider into the sea[6].
ⲟⲩⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ⲑⲙⲏⲓ ⲛⲛⲉ ⲡϭ︤ⲥ︥ ϧⲟⲧⲃⲉⲥ the Lord will not kill the righteous soul[1].
ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛⲁⲛⲟⲙⲓⲙⲟⲛ ⲙⲡⲉⲣ-ⲉⲣ ⲡⲟⲩⲱⲃϣ my son, do not forget my precepts[2]. Sometimes the reminder pronoun is missing, cf. Andersson, AB. p. 8.
Prolepsis of other complements:
ⲛⲓⲙⲱⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲁⲥⲉⲃⲏⲥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϣⲉ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ do not walk in the ways of the wicked[3].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲱ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϯϯϩⲟ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ you, O men, I pray you[4].
Place names are replaced by ⲉⲙⲁⲩ, ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ: ⲡⲓⲙⲁ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲁϩⲟ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲉϥⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲉⲕϩⲏⲧ where your treasure is, there is your heart[5].
Prolepsis of the verb:
Just like the subject and the complements, the verb, with the auxiliary and the subject affix pronoun, can also occupy the first place, when the subject is a noun; this is then introduced by ⲛ̀ϫⲉ- (Ṣ. ⲛϭⲓ-) after the verb or after the complements:
ⲁϥⲱⲣⲕ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ the Lord has sworn[6].
ⲁⲩⲛⲁϩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲙⲁⲑⲧⲏⲥ his disciples believed in him[7].
ⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲁⲃⲣⲁⲁⲙ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲉⲣϣⲱⲟⲩϣⲓ Abraham built the altar there[8].
The personal pronoun, returned after the verb, does not take ⲛ̀ϫⲉ: ⲁⲛⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲕⲉⲥⲛⲁⲩ we walked with him, me and two others[9].
ⲓⲥ and ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ.
1. ⲓⲥ (Ṣ. ⲉⲓⲥ) here is that” serves above all to highlight the subject and the regime
ⲓⲥ ⲫⲏ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲁⲃ ⲁϥⲕⲱⲗϩ ⲉⲡⲓⲣⲟ here comes the saint knocking at the door[1].
ⲓⲥ ⲣⲉⲃⲉⲕⲕⲁ ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲣⲉ ⲧⲉⲥϩⲩⲇⲣⲓⲁ ϩⲓ ⲧⲉⲥⲛⲁϩⲃⲓ here Rebecca came, her jar on her shoulder[2].
2. It is very often preceded by ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ which adds more intensity to the meaning:
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ ⲡⲓⲥⲟⲓ ϥⲭⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉⲕⲃⲁⲗ behold, the beam is in your eye[3].
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ ⲧⲁⲓⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲙ̀ⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲥϧⲉⲛⲧ see, this little town is close[4].
3. ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ (Ṣ. ϩⲏⲏⲧⲉ) is sometimes used alone; it may be followed by a highlighted word or the verb itself with or without prolepsis:
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϯⲛⲁⲑⲣⲉ ⲡϩⲏⲧ ⲙ̀ⲫⲁⲣⲁⲱ ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲧ behold, I will harden Pharaoh’s heart[5].
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫϯ this is what God has called[6].
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁⲓⲉⲣϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϩⲟ here I have admired you[7].
4. When ⲓⲥ precedes ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ, the noun prolepsis does not take place; ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ must be followed by a verb:
ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ϯⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ here I am going[8].
ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁⲓⲧⲁⲙⲟⲕ ⲉ ⲛⲏ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲁϩⲏⲧ I have informed you of all that is in my heart[9].
Just as "voici" in French, ⲓⲥ can form a nominal clause with a noun in which it fulfills the role of predicate.
ⲓⲥ ϯⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ here is the servant of the Lord[1].
ⲓⲥ ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϧⲱⲧⲉⲃ this is the time of your death[2].
It sometimes precedes the complement of time:
ⲓⲥ ⲟⲩⲙⲏϣ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ϯⲥⲟⲙⲥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ here are several days that I consider[3].
ⲓⲥ ⲟⲩⲏⲣ ⲛ̀ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲙⲟⲩ how many years have you been dead?[4].
Agreement is made in Coptic according to the general rules; it is only necessary to note the case where the subject is a singular collective :
1. Sometimes the verb is plural and the epithet remains singular:
ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ⲙⲏϣ ⲉϥⲙⲟϫⲧ ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ a large and mixed crowd went up[5].
2. When there are two verbs and they are separated by the collective, we can have the first in the singular and the second in the plural:
ⲉⲧⲁϥⲉⲣϩⲟϯ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲧⲏⲣϥ ⲁⲩⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧⲟⲩ after being seized with fear, all the people stood up[6].
3. Finally, the epithet can be plural and the verb singular:
ⲉϥⲉⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲓⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲛⲏ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲉⲧⲉⲕⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ the people among whom you live will see[7].
A simple noun clause is one that does not contain a verb, but only a subject and a predicate. The subject is a noun or a pronoun; the predicate, a noun, an adjective, or a prepositional construction (جار ومجرور).
It states a general assertion with the meaning of the present tense.
It is used in two cases:
1. When the subject is a noun and the predicate a prepositional construction:
ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ my father (is) in me[1].
ⲡⲁⲙ̀ⲕⲁϩ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲙ̀ⲑⲟ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ my pain is before me at all times[2].
This is exactly the construction of the first present tense (232, 3; 236, last example); the proposition is truly nominal, because it does not contain a verb. It is the same when the subject is one of the subject pronouns of the first present tense.
2. When the subject is an absolute personal pronoun, and the predicate is a noun, an adjective, or a prepositional construction formed mainly of ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ.
The predicate must always have an article; the adjective and the preposition only take the indefinite article:
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟ ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲛⲓ you are our sister[1].
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲏⲕⲓ I am poor[2].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲣⲉϥⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ you are patient[3].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲉϥⲟⲩⲁⲃ you are a holy people[4].
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ϯⲡⲟⲗⲓⲥ ⲉⲣⲙⲁⲛⲧ I am from the town of Erment[5].
In these kinds of propositions, the copula ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ; is often expressed ; it must be expressed when the pronoun is of the 3rd person (360) (cf. AB, p. 23–25).
These three words are invariable and differ only in gender and number:
sing. masc. ⲡⲉ هو,
fem. ⲧⲉ هي,
plur. ⲛⲉ هنَّا.
They are used only in the nominal clause where they are always placed after the predicate and fulfill the function of grammatical subject . They are often given the name copula , because they generally serve to unite the predicate with the real subject . But, strictly speaking, it is a demonstrative pronoun abbreviated from ⲫⲏ ⲑⲏ ⲛⲉ (Ṣ. ⲡⲏ ⲧⲏ ⲛⲏ) and meaning "this, this one, that one, these, these ones"
The propositions formed from ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ are reduced to two main types:
I. The proposition contains the predicate and the grammatical subject ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ:
(1) ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ he is my father.
(2) ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ it’s me[1].
In this type of proposition, we observe the rules of agreement for gender and number :
(1) ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲁⲣⲝ ⲧⲉ it is our flesh[2].
(2) ⲛⲉϥⲓⲟϯ ⲛⲉ they are his parents[3].
The predicate can be a noun (1), an absolute pronoun (2), an adjective (3), or a prepositional construction with the indefinite article (4):
(3) ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ he is good صالح هو»[4].
(4) ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲫⲉ ⲡⲉ he is an inhabitant of the sky[5].
It can be separated from the subject by a determinative complement:
ⲟⲩⲁⲣⲭⲏⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲧϫⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ ⲡⲉ he is an archangel of the army of heaven[5].
When there are two adjectives, the second can be placed after the subject with ⲛ̀:
ϩⲁⲛϣⲉⲙⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϫⲱⲓⲗⲓ they are guests and strangers[6].
II. The proposition contains the predicate, the copula ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ and the noun which is the real subject:
ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ the Lord is good صالح هو الرب.
ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ which, in thought, is the real subject, fulfills in the sentence the function of apposition (بدل) to the grammatical subject ⲡⲉ.
This kind of proposition offers two cases depending on whether the real subject is in the last rank or in the first.
First case. The subject is in the last row, the copula in the middle.
This is the most frequent case; it is used especially when the predicate is an absolute, personal (8), demonstrative (5) or interrogative (6) pronoun, or a noun that we want to highlight:
(8) ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ I am the Lord انا هو الرب[1].
(5) ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ this is my son هذا هو ابني[2].
(5) ⲑⲁⲓ ⲧⲉ ϯⲙⲉⲧⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉ this is the testimony هذه هي الشهادة[3].
(5) ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ such are the words[4].
(6) ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ what is this?[5].
ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲱⲉ these were the three sons of Noah[6].
(7) ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ great is the Lord[7]
When there are two adjectives, the second takes the linking particle ⲛ̀:
(7) ⲟⲩⲣⲉϥϣⲉⲛϩⲏⲧ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲏⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ the Lord is merciful and gracious[8].
If there are more than two adjectives, the second and subsequent ones are preferably referred to after the copula:
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲃⲉⲗⲗⲉ ⲡⲉ ⲛ̀ⲕⲟⲩⲣ ⲛ̀ⲉⲃⲟ ⲛ̀ϭⲁⲗⲉ he is blind, deaf, mute, lame[9].
Rules of the agreement.
1. The rules of agreement are only properly applied when the predicate is a pronoun of the 3rd person (5) (6); when it is a pronoun of the 1st or 2nd person , sing. or plural (8), we generally use ⲡⲉ.
(8) ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲫϯ for we are the temple of God[1].
(8) ⲛ̀ⲑⲟ ⲡⲉ ϯϣⲟⲩⲣⲏ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲃ ⲛ̀ⲕⲁⲑⲁⲣⲟⲥ you are the censer of pure gold[2].
(8) ⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ you are the light of the world[3].
2. When the predicate and the subject are nouns of the same gender and number, ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ agrees with them (9); otherwise, ⲡⲉ is always used (10).
(6) ⲉⲩⲥⲧⲁⲑⲓⲁ ⲧⲉ ⲧⲁⲙⲁⲩ Eustathia is my mother[4].
(9) ϩⲁⲛ ϩⲉⲗⲗⲏⲛⲟⲥ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲁⲓⲟϯ my parents are pagans[5].
(10) ⲧⲫⲉ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲑⲣⲟⲛⲟⲥ heaven is my throne[6].
Second case. The subject is in the first row, the copula in the last.
The subject is highlighted at the head of the clause, the other elements keep their respective places:
ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ the Lord is good.
In this case ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ agrees in gender and number with the subject:
ϯⲥⲁⲣⲝ ⲟⲩⲁⲥⲑⲉⲛⲏⲥ ⲧⲉ the flesh is weak[1].
ⲡⲓⲱⲥϧ ⲙⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲡⲉ ⲛⲓⲉⲣⲅⲁⲧⲏⲥ ⲇⲉ ϩⲁⲛⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛⲉ the harvest is plentiful, but the workers are few[2].
ⲭⲁⲙ ⲇⲉ ⲫⲓⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ⲭⲁⲛⲁⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ Ham is the father of Canaan[3].
When the subject is an absolute pronoun, we can replace the copula with this pronoun:
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϫⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁⲣⲁⲛ ⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲣⲱϥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲱⲧⲏⲣ who am I, that my name should come out of the mouth of the Savior?[4].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲁⲕⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ yes, you are from my bones, you[5].
The noun clause with ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ can convey the meaning of the imperfect by means of the auxiliary ⲛⲉ. The usual place of this is immediately before the predicate:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲁⲣⲭⲏ ⲛⲉ ⲡⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲡⲉ in the beginning was the Word[6].
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ and the Word was God[7].
ⲛⲱⲉ ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲑⲙⲏⲓ ⲡⲉ Noah was a righteous man[8].
ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲉ ϩⲁⲛⲉⲩⲅⲉⲛⲏⲥ ⲛⲉ these were noble[9].
Rarely the subject is placed between ⲛⲉ and the predicate:
ⲟⲛⲧⲱⲥ ⲛⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲑⲙⲏⲓ ⲡⲉ truly this man was just[10].
When the nominal clause, simple (354) or with ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ (356), is in the case of the 3rd present (238), it is preceded by the auxiliary ⲉ:
ⲡⲱⲥ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲓⲟⲩⲇⲁⲓ ⲕⲉⲣⲉⲧⲓⲛ ⲉⲧⲟⲧ ⲉⲥⲱ ⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲙⲁⲣⲓⲧⲏⲥ how do you, a Jew, ask me for a drink, a Samaritan woman?[1].
ⲁϥϫⲉⲙϥ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ⲉϥⲭⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲙ̀ϩⲁⲩ he found him buried for four days[2].
When the proposition is negative, we generally neglect to write ⲉ before ⲛ̀:
ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧϩⲉⲃⲥⲱ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϩⲟⲡ ⲧⲟⲓ ϩⲓⲱⲧϥ ⲁⲛ he saw a man without the wedding garment[3].
The negation of the nominal clause is obtained by means of ⲁⲛ which is placed after the predicate, never after the subject.
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ I am not a man[4].
Negation with ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ:
ⲟⲩ ⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲧⲉ it is not the truth[5].
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲭ︤ⲥ︥ it is not I who am the Christ[6].
ⲧⲁⲙⲉⲧⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉ ⲟⲩⲙⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲧⲉ my testimony is not true[7].
When the predicate has the article ⲟⲩ we can use ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ:
ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲫϯ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ this man does not come from God[8].
Union of Propositions Among Themselves.
Coordinated clauses are linked together in different ways:
1. They often follow each other without a conjunction:
ⲁϥⲧⲱⲛϥ ⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ he stood up and walked[1].
This happens especially when the verb is in the subjunctive (252).
ϯⲛⲁⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ I will get up, I will go in, I will sit down[2].
2. The ordinary conjunction of propositions is ⲟⲩⲟϩ:
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲡⲉϫⲉ ⲫϯ ϫⲉ ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫϯ ⲉ ⲡⲓⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ϫⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ and God said, Let there be light, and there was light, and God saw that the light was good[3].
ⲟⲩⲟϩ is also used to connect a main clause to a conditional clause:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲉϥⲉϯϫⲟⲙ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫϯ if you do this, God will make you strong[4].
3. Often the clauses follow each other sometimes without conjunction, sometimes with ⲟⲩⲟϩ:
ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲓ̀ ⲇⲉ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲁⲩⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲓϩⲉⲗⲗⲏⲛⲟⲥ ⲁⲩϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲱⲛⲓ when they had entered, the pagans saw them, they were seized with fear and became (still) like stones[1].
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲁⲓⲁⲓ ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ ⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲣⲉϥϩⲓⲥⲟⲑⲛⲉϥ and he grew up, lived in the desert and became an arrow shooter[2].
4. We use ⲟⲩⲇⲉ to connect two negative clauses, or a positive clause to a negative one.
ⲥⲉⲥⲓϯ ⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲇⲉ ⲥⲉⲱⲥϧ ⲁⲛ they neither sow nor reap[3].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲉⲣ ⲡⲁⲓϩⲱⲃ ⲟⲩⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕⲧⲁⲙⲟⲓ ⲟⲩⲇⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ I did not learn who had done this, nor did you yourself warn me, nor did I myself hear it said[4].
5. The clause formed from the 2nd perfect ⲉⲧⲁ joins itself to the following one and is generally translated as "when, after" or by a participle:
ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲓ̀ ⲉϧⲏⲧ ⲁⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲟⲩⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ having gone towards the North we saw a temple[5].
For the union of a subordinate clause with the main one, different conjunctions are used depending on the meaning (336–345).
The clauses formed from ⲉ (248, 346), the 3rd present (238) and the 3rd future (240, 3) are always dependent and unite by themselves with the main clause.
For the union of clauses by means of the subjunctive, see 252.
Interrogation can be indicated in Coptic only by tone of voice, by an interrogative pronoun (100–107), or by an adverb.
The verb is generally in a secondary tense (2nd and 3rd present and future, 2nd perfect ).
The question is not indicated by any particle; it is only recognizable from the context:
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲓⲟⲩⲇⲁⲓ are you the king of the Jews?[1].
ⲛⲉ ⲡⲉⲧⲥϣⲉ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗⲥ shouldn’t she have been untied?[2].
ⲉⲕⲛⲁϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲛ̀ⲁⲧϣⲗⲏⲗ will you stay without praying?[3].
For the interrogation in the 2nd present , see 237; in the 2nd future , see 240, 2.
1. ⲑⲱⲛ (Ṣ. ⲧⲱⲛ) «where?» without movement; ⲉⲑⲱⲛ «where?» with movement; ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ «from where?».
ⲑⲱⲛ is used in the 2nd present tense; the subject comes second without ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
ⲁⲩⲑⲱⲛ ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲁⲩϯϩⲁⲡ ⲉⲣⲟ «where are those who accused you?».
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ «where are you from?»[1].
2. ⲁⲛ (Ṣ. ⲉⲛ) «is it?». This particle is distinguished from the negation ⲁⲛ in that it always begins the clause while negative ⲁⲛ is always in second place.
ⲁⲛ interrogative is used especially in the nominal clause:
ⲁⲛ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲛϫⲟϥ ⲛⲁⲕ isn’t that what we told you?[2].
ⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲟⲛϣϫⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲛ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲁⲍⲁⲣⲉⲑ can anything good come out of Nazareth?[3].
ⲁⲛ ⲧⲉⲣⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ will you go with this man?[4].
3. ⲙⲏ (μή), used in a negative proposition, assumes the affirmative answer, and, in an affirmative proposition, the negative answer:
ⲙⲏ ⲧϫⲓϫ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲛⲁⲣⲁϣⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ will not the hand of the Lord be enough for them?[5].
ⲙⲏ ϯⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲟⲩⲟⲧ ⲁⲛ ⲉ ϯϧⲣⲉ is not the soul superior to food?[6].
ⲙⲏ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲓⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ am I my brother’s keeper?[7].
ⲙⲏ ⲛⲓⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲓⲉϩⲱⲟⲩ ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛϧⲉⲗϧⲱⲗⲟⲩ ⲙⲏ ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲣⲁϣⲟⲩ Will sheep and oxen, if they are slaughtered, be enough for them?[1].
For conditional querying, see 345.
In the double interrogation the second part is introduced by ϣⲁⲛ «or else»:
ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲫⲉ ⲡⲉ ϣⲁⲛ ⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ does it come from heaven or from men?[2].
ⲉⲩϭⲓⲧⲉⲗⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲓⲉ ⲕⲏⲛⲥⲟⲥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓϣⲏⲣⲓ ϣⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓϣⲉⲙⲙⲱⲟⲩ from whom do they get the tribute or the census paid? From their children or from foreigners?[3].
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲏ ⲉⲑⲛⲏⲟⲩ ϣⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛϫⲟⲩϣⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲁϫⲱϥ ⲛ̀ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲁⲓ are you the one who is to come or should we expect another?[4].
When the first member is preceded by ⲁⲛ, the second can be too:
ⲁⲛ ϥϫⲟⲣ ⲓⲉ ⲁⲛ ⲟⲩϫⲱⲃ ⲡⲉ ⲓⲉ ⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲓⲉ ⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲡⲉ is he strong or weak? is he small or big?[5].
Or not, ام لا translates to ϣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ:
ⲁⲛ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ϣⲟⲡ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ ϣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ is the Lord among you, or not?[6].
ⲥϣⲉ ⲉ ϯϩⲱϯ ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ϣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ should we pay tribute to the king, or not?[7].
Indirect interrogation is indicated by ϫⲉ; otherwise it resembles direct interrogation:
ⲭⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲩ ϫⲉ ϥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲏⲗⲓⲁⲥ ⲛⲧⲉϥⲛⲁϩⲙⲉϥ Leave him, let us see if Elijah will come to save him[1].
ϣⲉⲛ ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ϫⲉ ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓϫⲟϥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ask those who heard what I said to them[2].
ⲉⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲁϭⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ ϫⲉ ⲁⲛ ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲡⲁⲛⲟⲙⲟⲥ ϣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ to test whether they will keep my law or not[3].
A relative clause is one that begins with a relative pronoun, whether the pronoun is a subject or a complement. It is very common in Coptic. It can be expressed:
ⲉ- ⲉⲣⲉ- are used with an indefinite antecedent , i.e. one that has no article or has the indefinite article.
ⲉⲧ- ⲉⲧⲉ- are used with an antecedent determined by the definite article or its derivatives.
The antecedent is a noun or a demonstrative pronoun.
The use of these words can be summarized in the following diagram:
| Definite antecedent | Indefinite antecedent | |
|---|---|---|
| Before the infinitive and the qualitative: | ⲉⲧ- ⲉⲧ⸗ | ⲉⲣⲉ- ⲉ⸗ |
| Before a name, etc.: | ⲉⲧⲉ- | ⲉⲣⲉ- ⲉ- |
ⲉ- is used with the copula ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ, sometimes with ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ, never with the verb.
ⲉⲣⲉ- is also used with ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ or with the verb, but never with ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ.
The relative clause can be verbal or nominal.
Verbal:
ⲫⲏ ⲉ-ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ what we know, we say[1].
Nominal:
ⲡⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ ⲉⲧ-ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ our Father who art in heaven
The syntax of these two clauses is the same. We will give examples for the main tenses.
When the antecedent is indeterminate, we use ⲉⲣⲉ- ⲉ⸗ i.e. the 3rd present (238), ⲉ- in the nominal prop.:
When the antecedent is determined, we use ⲉⲧ- ⲉⲧⲉ-, which gives:
With the suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲉϯ | 1. | ⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲉⲧⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲉⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲉⲧⲉϥ | 3. | ⲉⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲉⲧⲉⲥ | ||
In the noun clause: ⲉⲧ- ⲉⲧⲉ-.
Definite antecedent:
ⲛⲁⲓⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ ⲉⲧⲉⲕ-ⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ these wonders that you accomplish[2].
ⲫⲙⲁ ⲉϯϣⲟⲡ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ the place where I am[3].
ⲡⲓϣⲗⲟⲗ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲛⲟⲩϯ the people who have the Lord as their God[4].
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧ-ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲑⲣⲟⲛⲟⲥ the one who sits on the throne[5].
Indefinite antecedent:
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ a man who descends[1].
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲣⲉ ⲧⲉϥϫⲓϫ ϣⲟⲩⲱⲟⲩ a man with a withered hand[2].
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲣⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲓⲱⲥⲏⲫ a man named Joseph[3].
When ⲡⲉ comes immediately before ⲉⲧ, the two ⲉ often contract into one:
ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲡⲉⲧϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲥⲟⲫⲓⲁ it is the Lord who gives wisdom[4].
ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲫⲉϧ ⲧⲉⲕϣⲑⲏⲛ who tore your tunic?[5].
ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲡⲉⲧⲥⲓϯ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲡⲉⲧⲱⲥϧ one is he who sows, another is he who reaps[6].
The future is formed in the same way as the present, just add ⲛⲁ- or ⲉ- before the infinitive:
Definite antecedent:
ⲡⲓⲉⲑⲛⲟⲥ ⲉⲧⲟⲩⲛⲁⲉⲣⲃⲱⲕ ⲛⲁϥ the nation they will serve[7].
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲛⲁⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ the one that the Lord will give you[8].
ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲏϯ ⲡⲉ ⲉⲧⲉⲕⲉ̀ⲁⲓϥ this is how you will act[1].
ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲉ̀ⲟⲩⲱⲙ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ the things that he will eat[2].
Indefinite antecedent:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲏϣ ⲉⲩⲛⲁϫⲟⲥ there are many who will say[3].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϩⲗⲓ ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲉϥⲛⲁⲓ̀ ϩⲁⲣⲟⲛ there is no one on earth who will come to us[4].
When the antecedent is determined, we use ⲉⲧ devant le 1e before the first perfect tense (244); when it is indeterminate, we use ⲉ before the same tense. The 2nd pl. determined tense is ⲉⲧⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ.
Definite antecedent:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲁ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲑⲉⲟⲇⲱⲥⲓⲟⲥ ⲟⲩⲱⲣⲡ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ at the time when King Theodosius sent for me[5].
ⲡⲁⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ my sheep that was lost[6].
ⲁϥⲓ̀ ⲉ ⲡⲓⲙⲁ ⲉⲧⲁ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲁϥ he came to the place of which God had spoken to him[7].
Indefinite antecedent:
ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲥⲕⲉⲩⲟⲥ ⲉⲁϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ like a vase that has been broken[8].
ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲃⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲉ ⲁϥϭⲟ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲓⲁϩⲁⲗⲟⲗⲓ there was a man, master of a field, who had planted a vineyard[9].
We use ⲉ before the auxiliary (ⲛⲁⲣⲉ, ϣⲁⲣⲉ) whatever the antecedent; ⲉⲧⲉ is only used when it is part of a demonstrative relative (97, 99).
ⲡⲓⲙⲁ ⲉⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ ϯⲱⲙⲥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ the place where John baptized[1].
ⲛⲓⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ ⲉⲛⲁϥⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ the wonders he did[2].
ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲛⲁⲩ ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ ⲫⲣⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲏⲓ the men who were at the door of the house[3].
We use ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ when the antecedent is determined, ⲉ ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ when it is indeterminate.
It often happens that ⲉ is confused with the vowel of ⲛ̀ and is not written; other times it is ⲛ̀ which disappears.
Definite antecedent:
ⲡⲓⲫⲁϣ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲁⲛ the net they do not know[4].
Indefinite antecedent:
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ϥϫⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲉϥⲉⲛϩⲟⲧ a man who says nothing for sure[5].
We use ⲉⲧⲉ when the antecedent is determined, ⲉ when it is indeterminate; as before, ⲉ is often omitted in writing:
ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ, ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ, ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ;
ⲉⲙⲡⲁⲣⲉ or ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲉⲙⲡⲉ or ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ, ⲉⲙⲡⲁⲧⲉ or ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ.
Definite antecedent:
ⲡⲓⲙⲁ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ ⲣⲉϥϭⲓⲟⲩⲓ ϧⲱⲛⲧ ⲉⲣⲟϥ the place where thieves do not approach[1].
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩϣⲟⲡϥ the one they will not receive[2].
Indefinite antecedent:
ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲏⲓ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲡⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ there was no house in which someone had not died[3].
ⲟⲩⲡⲁⲣⲑⲉⲛⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲥⲟⲩⲱⲛⲥ a girl that nobody knows[4].
The conditional clause generally precedes the main clause on which it depends.
The condition can be expressed without conjunction or by means of the conjunctions ϣⲁⲛ, ⲉϣⲱⲡ, ⲓⲥϫⲉ.
The 3rd present and the 3rd future can sometimes express the condition by themselves:
ⲛ̀ⲑⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲉⲕⲛⲁⲧⲱⲃϩ ⲙⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉⲡⲉⲕⲧⲁⲙⲓⲟⲛ but you, if you want to pray, go into your room[1].
Most often, however, in these kinds of propositions, the condition is expressed by ⲉϣⲱⲡ (391).
A very frequent conditional clause is the one formed from ⲉ- and the imperfect ⲛⲁⲣⲉ (248) or the auxiliary ⲛⲉ with ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ (302), with ⲡⲉ ⲧⲉ ⲛⲉ (363).
It states a condition that is not supposed to be able to be fulfilled; it is rather a wish.
In the main clause which comes second, we generally use the imperfect future tense (243):
ⲉⲛⲁⲕⲭⲏ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ ⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ if you had been here, my brother would not have died[2].
ⲉⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲛⲉⲃⲏⲓ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲛⲁϥⲛⲁⲣⲱⲓⲥ ⲡⲉ if the master of the house knew, he would watch[3].
ⲉⲛⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛϣϫⲟⲙ if it were possible[4].
ⲉⲛⲉ ⲫϯ ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ ⲡⲉ if God were your father, you would love me[5].
ⲉⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲁϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲁⲛ otherwise, I wouldn’t have told you[6].
ϣⲁⲛ is used with the auxiliary of the 2nd present ⲁⲣⲉ to express a future condition; it precedes the main clause:
ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛϫⲱⲟⲩ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲕⲭⲏ ⲥⲁⲃⲟⲗ if you tell anyone, you are excommunicated[1].
ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲁⲛϯϩⲟ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ if you pray to me, I will not listen to you[2].
ⲁⲣⲉ ϣⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲙⲟⲩⲣ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲭⲣⲱⲙ ϧⲉⲛ ⲕⲉⲛϥ ⲙⲏ ϥⲛⲁⲣⲱⲕϩ ⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓ ϩⲃⲱⲥ if someone ties fire to his chest, will it not burn his clothes?[3].
In the negative proposition ϣⲁⲛ is replaced by ϣⲧⲉⲙ:
ϯⲛⲁⲟⲩⲟⲣⲡⲕ ⲁⲛ ⲁⲕϣⲧⲉⲙ ⲥⲙⲟⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ I will not send you away, unless you bless me[4].
ⲁⲣⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ ⲫϯ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ if God is not with him[5].
ⲉϣⲱⲡ used alone expresses a condition, a case that may occur, an eventuality.
It enters into the noun proposition:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲇⲱⲣⲟⲛ if your offering is a sheep[6].
It is used especially with the 3rd present , the 3rd future , the subjunctive:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲉⲩⲥⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲏ ⲉⲧϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ if those who are in the house are not enough[1].
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲉⲕⲛⲁⲓ̀ⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲇⲱⲣⲟⲛ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ if you present an offering[2].
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲓⲁⲣⲭⲱⲛ ⲉⲣⲛⲟⲃⲓ if the prince comes to sin[3].
Most often the two conjunctions are used together:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ if you do this[4].
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛϯϩⲟ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ if we pray to you[5].
ⲓⲥϫⲉ, in the verbal proposition, expresses a real condition represented as already accomplished. It could be translated as “since”
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ ⲭⲁ ⲛⲁⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ if (since) it is me you seek, let these go[6].
In the noun clause, it expresses a simple condition:
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲧⲉⲃⲛⲏ ⲡⲉ ⲓⲉ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ whether it is a beast or a man[7].
Repeated, ⲓⲥϫⲉ separates the two members of a dilemma:
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲕⲁⲕⲱⲥ ⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ if I have spoken badly,” gives proof of the bad ;
ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲇⲉ ⲕⲁⲗⲱⲥ but if I spoke well”, why are you hitting me?[1]
"If not" translates as ⲓⲥϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ, sometimes as ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ, rarely as ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ alone.
A temporal clause is a dependent clause that expresses a circumstance or action occurring at the same time as the main clause. It corresponds to French clauses beginning with "lorque", "toute que", "comme".
It can precede or follow the main clause on which it depends. It is constructed without or with a conjunction.
The 3rd present and the 3rd future form temporal clauses by themselves:
ⲉϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛⲁϥⲁⲙⲟⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ when he was little, he looked after his father’s sheep[2].
ⲛⲁⲓ ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ ϩⲁⲛⲙⲏϣ ⲁⲩⲛⲁϩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ while he was saying these things, many believed in him[1].
ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲩⲭⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲕⲟⲓ ⲁϥⲧⲱⲛϥ it happened, while they were in the country, that he got up[2].
Why did you not come to celebrate our murder ⲉⲩⲛⲁϣⲁⲧⲉⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕⲛⲟⲩϯ when we were about to be sacrificed to your god?[3].
ⲉⲣⲉ ⲫⲣⲏ ⲇⲉ ⲛⲁϩⲱⲧⲡ ⲟⲩⲧⲱⲙⲧ ⲁϥⲓ̀ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲁⲃⲣⲁⲙ as the sun was about to set, Abraham was astonished[4].
The 2nd perfect generally forms a temporal clause (245, 3).
The conditional clause formed from ϣⲁⲛ often expresses a time condition:
ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ϣⲁ ⲙ̀ⲛⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁⲛϣⲁⲛⲟⲩⲱϣⲧ ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲧⲁⲥⲑⲟ ϩⲁⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ we will go there and, when we have worshipped, we will return to you[5].
The preposition ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ since” is used with the 3rd present and the 2nd perfect to translate the conjunctive phrase “since”.
ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ ⲉⲓϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲟϯ since I was in my mother’s womb[6].
ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ since I saw[7].
ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ is also used with ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ to mean "before" in the past:
ⲓⲥϫⲉⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲟⲩⲉⲣⲃⲟⲕⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ before it was conceived[1].
In the same sense we use ϧⲁⲧϩⲏ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ:
ϧⲁⲧϩⲏ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥϭⲓⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ before getting married[2].
The main Greek conjunctions of time used in Coptic are:
1. ϩⲱⲥ (ὡς) 'while, while', ϩⲟⲥⲟⲛ, ⲉⲫⲟⲥⲟⲛ (ὅσον, ἐφ'ὅσον) 'as, while'.
These conjunctions are used especially with the 3rd present :
ϩⲱⲥ ⲉⲕⲭⲏ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ as long as you are with him[3].
ϩⲟⲥⲟⲛ ⲉⲩⲭⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ as they were in the temple[4].
ϩⲟⲥⲟⲛ ⲉⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲣⲉϥⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧϥ ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ ⲫⲣⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲙ̀ϩⲁⲩ ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲥⲙⲏ as the dead man stood at the door of the tomb, a voice was heard[5].
2. ϩⲟⲧⲉ, ϩⲟⲧⲁⲛ (ὅτε, ὅταν) 'when, when'.
ϩⲟⲧⲉ is used especially with a second tense (3rd pres ., 3rd fut ., 2nd perfect ):
ϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲉϥϯϩⲟ ⲉⲣⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ when he prays to us, we do not listen[6].
ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲑⲁⲙⲓⲟ ⲛ̀ⲧⲫⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ ϩⲟⲧⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲱⲡⲓ this is the book of the creation of the heavens and the earth, when they were (created)[1].
Instead of ϩⲟⲧⲉ we rarely find ⲉⲛⲟⲓⲥ (ἐν οἷς):
ⲉⲛⲟⲓⲥ ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲑⲱⲟⲩϯ ⲁϥⲉⲣϩⲏⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ϫⲟⲥ when they were gathered together, he began to say[2].
ϩⲟⲧⲁⲛ is usually followed by the conditional:
ⲛⲓⲙ ⲉⲧⲛⲁϣⲱⲛϧ ϩⲟⲧⲁⲛ ⲁⲣⲉϣⲁⲛ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ϯ ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲓ who shall live, when God hath given these things?[3].
ϩⲟⲧⲁⲛ ⲁⲓϣⲁⲛϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲛⲉⲑⲛⲟⲥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ when I drive out the foreigners[4].
We also find ϩⲱⲥⲧⲉ, ϩⲟⲥⲧⲉ (ὡς δε), in the sense of “as, when”, with the 2nd perfect :
ϩⲱⲥⲧⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥϧⲱⲛⲧ ⲉ ϯⲡⲩⲗⲏ as he approached the door[5].
ϩⲟⲥⲧⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥϫⲉⲙ ϯⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲟⲩ when he had tasted the water[6].
For the expression of the temporal clause by means of the infinitive and ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ, see 265; by means of the verbal noun and ϧⲉⲛ, see 274, 275.